Docstoc

Operator's Manual CL-Class

Document Sample
Operator's Manual CL-Class Powered By Docstoc
					Operator’s Manual
    CL-Class
                     Ê5WtCs-Ë
                           2155843583
Order No. 6515 2178 13 Part No. 215 584 35 83 USA Edition A, 2005
CL 500
CL 600
CL 55 AMG
CL 65 AMG
Our company and staff congratulate you           Please read this manual carefully, then
on the purchase of your new                      return it to your vehicle where it will be
Mercedes-Benz.                                   handy for your reference.
Your selection of our product is a demon-        Please follow the recommendations
stration of your trust in our company            contained in this manual. They are de-
name. Furthermore, it exemplifies your de-       signed to acquaint you with the opera-
sire to own an automobile that will be as        tion of your Mercedes-Benz.
easy as possible to operate and provide
                                                 Please pay attention to the warnings
years of service.
                                                 and cautions contained in this manual.
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the ef-            They are designed to help improve the
forts of many skilled engineers and crafts-      safety of the vehicle operator and oc-
men. To help assure your driving pleasure,       cupants.
and also the safety of you and your passen-   We extend our best wishes for many miles
gers, we ask you to make a small invest-      of safe, pleasurable driving.
ment of time:
                                              Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
                                              A DaimlerChrysler Company
                                                                                                                                                                     Contents



                                                                                                                          Driving..................................................   45
Introduction .......................................... 9   At a glance .......................................... 21         Fastening the seat belts .................              45
Product information................................ 9       Cockpit................................................. 22       Starting the engine .........................           48
Operator’s Manual ............................... 10        Instrument cluster ................................ 24            Switching on headlamps.................                 52
    Service and warranty information .. 10                  Multifunction steering wheel ................ 26                  Turn signals ....................................       53
    Important notice for California                         Center console ..................................... 27           Windshield wipers...........................            54
    retail buyers and lessees of                                Upper part ...................................... 27          Problems while driving....................              56
    Mercedes-Benz automobiles .......... 11                     Lower part ...................................... 28      Parking and locking..............................           57
    Maintenance .................................. 12       Overhead control panel ........................ 29                Parking brake .................................         58
    Roadside Assistance ...................... 12           Door control panel................................ 30             Switching off headlamps.................                59
    Change of address or ownership.... 12                                                                                     Turning off the engine.....................             59
    Operating your vehicle outside                                                                                            Locking ...........................................     60
    the USA or Canada......................... 13           Getting started ................................... 31
Where to find it.................................... 14     Unlocking ............................................. 32
Symbols............................................... 15      Unlocking with the SmartKey.......... 32                   Safety and Security ...........................             61
Operating safety .................................. 16         Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO*......... 33                     Occupant safety ...................................         62
    Proper use of the vehicle ............... 16               Starter switch positions .................. 34                Air bags ..........................................      63
Problems with your vehicle.................. 17             Adjusting .............................................. 37      Seat belts .......................................       68
Reporting safety defects...................... 18              Seats............................................... 37       Children in the vehicle ....................             72
    Reporting safety defects ................ 18               Steering wheel ................................ 42            Blocking of rear window operation .                      78
Vehicle data recording......................... 19             Mirrors ............................................ 43    Panic alarm ..........................................      79
    Information regarding electronic                                                                                         Activating........................................       79
    recording devices........................... 19                                                                          Deactivating....................................         79
Contents



Driving safety systems.........................            80   Seats .................................................   112   Instrument cluster .............................        134
    ABS ................................................   80      Easy-entry/exit feature ................               112       Instrument cluster illumination ....                134
    BAS ................................................   81      Removing and installing                                          Coolant temperature gauge .........                 135
    ESP.................................................   82      front seat head restraints.............                114       Trip odometer ..............................        135
Anti-theft systems................................         85      Rear seat head restraints .............                115       Tachometer..................................        136
    Immobilizer.....................................       85      Lumbar support............................             117       Outside temperature indicator .....                 136
    Anti-theft alarm system ..................             85      Multicontour backrest*................                 117       Clock............................................   136
    Tow-away alarm .............................           87      Seat heating.................................          119   Control system ..................................       137
                                                                   Seat ventilation* ..........................           121       Multifunction display....................           137
                                                                Memory function ...............................           122       Multifunction steering wheel........                138
Controls in detail ............................... 89              Storing positions into memory .....                    123       Menus ..........................................    140
Locking and unlocking ......................... 90                 Recalling positions from memory .                      123       Standard display menu ................              142
   SmartKey ....................................... 90             Storing exterior rear view                                       AUDIO menu ................................         142
   SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*......... 94                           mirror parking position.................               124       CD changer operating mode ........                  145
   Opening the doors                                            Lighting..............................................    125       TEL menu* ...................................       147
   from the inside ............................. 100               Exterior lamp switch.....................              125       NAVI menu...................................        149
   Opening the trunk ........................ 101                  Combination switch .....................               129       Distronic* menu ..........................          150
   Closing the trunk.......................... 103                 Hazard warning flasher ................                130       Trip computer menu.....................             151
   Trunk lid emergency release ........ 109                        Interior lighting.............................         131       Vehicle status message
   Power closing assist                                            Courtesy lighting ..........................           133       memory menu..............................           153
   for doors and trunk lid.................. 110                   Door entry lamps .........................             133       Settings menu..............................         154
   Automatic central locking ............ 110                      Trunk lighting ...............................         133
   Locking and unlocking
   from the inside ............................. 111
                                                                                                                                                               Contents



Automatic transmission.....................            166   Automatic climate control .................. 185          Power tilt/sliding sunroof .................. 203
   One-touch gearshifting.................             168      Setting the temperature................ 189                Opening and closing the power
   Gear ranges .................................       169      Adjusting air distribution............... 189              tilt/sliding sunroof........................ 203
   Gear selector lever position .........              170      Adjusting air volume ..................... 191             Synchronizing the power
   Automatic shift program ..............              172      Maximum cooling MAXCOOL ........ 191                       tilt/sliding sunroof........................ 205
   Driving tips...................................     173      Defrosting ..................................... 191   Driving systems.................................. 206
   Steering wheel gearshift control                             Air recirculation mode .................. 192              Cruise control ............................... 206
   (Speedshift) CL 55 AMG and                                   Charcoal filter ............................... 193        Distronic* ..................................... 209
   CL 65 AMG...................................        174      Rear window defroster.................. 194                Active Body Control (ABC) ............ 221
   Manual shift program CL 55 AMG                               Deactivating the climate                                   Parktronic system*
   and CL 65 AMG............................           176      control system .............................. 195          (Parking assist) ............................. 225
   Emergency operation                                          Air conditioning............................. 195      Loading .............................................. 230
   (Limp Home Mode) ......................             178      Residual heat and ventilation........ 196                  Roof rack* .................................... 230
Good visibility ....................................   179      Ventilated storage compartment .. 196                      Loading instructions ..................... 231
   Headlamp cleaning system ..........                 179      Rear passenger compartment                                 Cargo tie-down hooks................... 231
   Rear view mirrors.........................          179      adjustable air vents....................... 197        Useful features................................... 232
   Electrically folding exterior                             Power windows .................................. 198          Sun visor....................................... 232
   rear view mirrors..........................         181      Opening and closing the power                              Storage compartments ................. 233
   Windshield wipers ........................          182      windows........................................ 198        Ashtrays........................................ 239
   Sun visors ....................................     183      Synchronizing the power                                    Cigarette lighter............................ 240
   Rear window sunshade* ..............                184      windows........................................ 200        Heated steering wheel* ................ 241
                                                                Summer opening feature .............. 201                  Telephone* ................................... 242
                                                                Convenience closing feature......... 201                   Tele Aid......................................... 243
                                                                                                                           Garage door opener...................... 251
                                                                                                                           Infrared reflecting windshield ....... 256
Contents



                                                                At the gas station ..............................       270      DOT, Tire Identification
Operation .........................................       257       Refueling ......................................    270      Number (TIN) ...............................       304
The first 1000 miles (1500 km) .........                  258       Check regularly and before                                   Maximum tire load .......................          305
Driving instructions............................          259       a long trip.....................................    271      Maximum tire inflation pressure ..                 306
    Drive sensibly – save fuel .............              259   Engine compartment .........................            273      Uniform Tire Quality Grading
    Drinking and driving .....................            259       Hood ............................................   273      Standards (U.S. vehicles) .............            306
    Pedals ..........................................     259       Engine oil .....................................    274      Tire ply material ...........................      308
    Power assistance .........................            259       Transmission fluid level ................           279      Tire and loading terminology........               309
    Brakes ..........................................     260       Active Body Control (ABC)                                    Rotating tires ...............................     312
    Driving off.....................................      262       fluid level......................................   279   Winter driving ....................................   313
    Parking .........................................     262       Coolant level ................................      279      Winter tires ..................................    313
    Tires .............................................   263       Battery .........................................   281      Block heater (Canada only) ..........              314
    Hydroplaning ................................         263       Windshield washer system and                                 Snow chains.................................       314
    Tire traction..................................       264       headlamp cleaning system...........                 282   Maintenance......................................     315
    Tire speed rating ..........................          264   Tires and wheels................................        283      Clearing the maintenance
    Winter driving instructions ...........               265       Important guidelines ....................           283      service indicator ..........................       315
    Standing water .............................          266       Tire care and maintenance...........                284      Maintenance service term
    Passenger compartment ..............                  267       Direction of rotation.....................          286      exceeded .....................................     316
    Driving abroad..............................          267       Loading the vehicle ......................          286      Calling up the maintenance
    Control and operation of radio                                  Recommended tire inflation                                   service indicator ..........................       316
    transmitters..................................        267       pressure.......................................     292      Resetting the maintenance
    Catalytic converter .......................           268       Checking tire inflation pressure ...                294      service indicator ..........................       316
    Emission control...........................           268       Tire labeling..................................     299   Vehicle care.......................................   317
    Coolant temperature ....................              269       Load identification .......................         303      Cleaning and care of vehicle ........              317
                                                                                                                                                                      Contents



                                                              Replacing wiper blades....................... 379
Practical hints .................................       325       Removing wiper blades ................. 379                Technical data .................................. 397
What to do if …?.................................       326       Installing wiper blades .................. 380             Parts service ...................................... 398
   Lamps in instrument cluster ........                 326   Flat tire............................................... 381   Warranty coverage ............................. 399
   Lamp in center console................               334       Preparing the vehicle .................... 381                Loss of Service and Warranty
   Vehicle status messages                                        Mounting the spare wheel ............ 381                     Information Booklet ...................... 399
   in the multifunction display..........               335   Battery................................................ 386    Identification labels ............................ 400
Where will I find...? ............................      365       Disconnecting the battery............. 387                 Layout of poly-V-belt drive.................. 401
   First aid kit...................................     365       Removing the battery.................... 387                  CL 500.......................................... 401
   Vehicle jack, vehicle tool kit,                                Charging and reinstalling                                     CL 55 AMG ................................... 401
   luggage bowl, spare wheel ...........                365       the battery .................................... 387          CL 600 and CL 65 AMG ................ 401
Unlocking/locking in an emergency..                     367       Reconnecting the battery.............. 388                 Engine ................................................ 402
   Unlocking the vehicle...................             367   Jump starting...................................... 389        Rims and Tires.................................... 404
   Locking the vehicle ......................           368   Towing the vehicle.............................. 391              Same size tires ............................. 405
   Fuel filler flap ...............................     369       Installing towing eye bolt .............. 393                 Mixed size tires............................. 407
Opening/closing in an emergency.....                    370   Fuses.................................................. 394       Spare wheel.................................. 408
   Tilt/sliding sunroof ......................          370       Aids for replacing fuses ................ 394              Electrical system ................................ 409
Replacing SmartKey batteries ...........                371       Fuse boxes in passenger                                    Main Dimensions and weights............ 410
   SmartKey .....................................       371       compartment ................................ 395              Main Dimensions .......................... 410
   SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* ......                     372       Fuse boxes in engine                                          Weights......................................... 410
Replacing bulbs .................................       373       compartment ................................ 396
   Bulbs ............................................   374
   Replacing bulbs for front lamps ...                  376
   Replacing bulbs for rear lamps.....                  377
Contents



Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. .........           411
   Capacities ....................................    411
   Engine oils....................................    413
   Engine oil additives ......................        413
   Air conditioning refrigerant ..........            413
   Brake fluid ....................................   414
   Premium unleaded gasoline .........                414
   Fuel requirements ........................         414
   Gasoline additives ........................        415
   Coolants.......................................    415
   Windshield and headlamp
   washer system .............................        418


Technical terms ............................... 419


Index ................................................. 425
                                                                                                                           Introduction
                                                                                                                   Product information
   Product information
Please observe the following in your own           We are unable to make an assessment for         Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts as well as
best interest:                                     other products and therefore cannot be          conversion parts and accessories ap-
                                                   held responsible for them, even if in indi-     proved by us are available at your autho-
We recommend using genuine
                                                   vidual cases an official approval or authori-   rized Mercedes-Benz Center where you will
Mercedes-Benz parts as well as conversion
                                                   zation by governmental or other agencies        receive comprehensive information, also
parts and accessories explicitly approved
                                                   should exist. Use of such parts and acces-      on permissible technical modifications,
by us for your vehicle model.
                                                   sories could adversely affect the safety,       and where proper installation will be per-
We have tested these parts to determine            performance or reliability of your vehicle.     formed.
their reliability, safety and special suitabili-   Please do not use them.
ty for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.




                                                                                                                                           9
Introduction
Operator’s Manual


This Operator’s Manual contains a great         We continuously strive to improve our          Service and warranty information
deal of useful information. We urge you to      product, and ask for your understanding
read it carefully and familiarize yourself      that we reserve the right to make changes      The Service and Warranty Information
with the vehicle before driving.                in design and equipment. Therefore, infor-     Booklet contains detailed information
                                                mation, illustrations and descriptions in      about the warranties covering your
For your own safety and longer service life
                                                this Operator’s Manual might differ from       Mercedes-Benz, including:
of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the in-
                                                your vehicle.                                     New Car Limited Warranty
structions and warnings contained in this
manual. Ignoring them could result in dam-      Optional equipment is also described in           Emission System Warranty
age to the vehicle or personal injury to you    this manual, including operating instruc-
or others. Vehicle damage caused by fail-       tions wherever necessary. Since they are          Emission Performance Warranty
ure to follow instructions is not covered by    special-order items, the descriptions and         California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.             illustrations herein may vary slightly from       Vermont Emission Control System
                                                the actual equipment of your vehicle.             Warranty
Your vehicle may have some or all of the
equipment described in this manual.             If there are any equipment details that are       (California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Therefore, you may find explanations for        not shown or described in this Operator’s         Vermont only)
optional equipment not installed in your        Manual, your authorized Mercedes-Benz             State Warranty Enforcement Laws
vehicle. If you have any questions about        Center will be glad to inform you of correct      (Lemon Laws)
the operation of any equipment, your au-        care and operating procedures.The Opera-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be           tor’s Manual and Maintenance Booklet are
glad to demonstrate the proper proce-           important documents and should be kept
dures.                                          with the vehicle.




10
                                                                                                                              Introduction
                                                                                                                        Operator’s Manual


Important notice for California retail              (1) the same substantial defect or mal-          (3) the vehicle is out of service by reason
buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz                     function results in a condition that is          of repair of the same or different sub-
automobiles                                             likely to cause death or serious bodily          stantial defects or malfunctions for a
                                                        injury if the vehicle is driven, that de-        cumulative total of more than
Under California law you may be entitled to             fect or malfunction has been subject to          30 calender days.
a replacement of your vehicle or a refund               repair two or more times, and you have
                                                                                                     Written notification should be sent to us,
of the purchase price or lease price, if                directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA,
                                                                                                     not a dealer, at Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC,
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its au-                   LLC in writing of the need for its repair,
                                                                                                     Customer Assistance Center,
thorized repair or service facilities fail to fix
                                                    (2) the same substantial defect or mal-          One Mercedes Drive, Montvale,
one or more substantial defects or mal-
                                                        function of a less serious nature than       NJ 07645-0350.
functions in the vehicle that are covered by
                                                        category (1) has been subject to repair
its express warranty after a reasonable
                                                        four or more times and you have direct-
number of repair attempts. During the pe-
                                                        ly notified us in writing of the need for
riod of 18 months from original delivery of
                                                        its repair, or
the vehicle or the accumulation of
18 000 miles (approx. 29 000 km) on the
odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs
first, a reasonable number of repair at-
tempts is presumed for a retail buyer or
lessee if one or more of the following oc-
curs:




                                                                                                                                             11
Introduction
Operator’s Manual


Maintenance                                  Roadside Assistance                          Change of address or ownership

The Maintenance Booklet describes all the    The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance        If you change your address, be sure to
necessary maintenance work which should      Program provides factory trained technical   send in the “Change of Address Notice”
be performed at regular intervals.           help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to   found in the Service and Warranty Informa-
                                             the toll-free Roadside Assistance number     tion Booklet, or simply call the
Always have the Maintenance Booklet with
                                                                                          Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
you when you take the vehicle to your au-    1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA)
                                                                                          Center (in the USA) at
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center for ser-       1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)
                                                                                          1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Ser-
vice. The service advisor will record each
                                             will be answered by Mercedes-Benz            vice (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. It is in
service in the booklet for you.
                                             Customer Assistance Representatives          your own interest that we can contact you
                                             24 hours a day, 365 days a year.             should the need arise.
                                             For additional information refer to the      If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all
                                             Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro-       literature with the vehicle to make it avail-
                                             gram brochure in your vehicle literature     able to the next operator.
                                             portfolio.
                                                                                          If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to
                                                                                          send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used
                                                                                          Car” found in the Service and Warranty In-
                                                                                          formation Booklet, or call the
                                                                                          Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
                                                                                          ter (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes,
                                                                                          or Customer Service (in Canada) at
                                                                                          1-800-387-0100.




12
                                                                                                Introduction
                                                                                            Operator’s Manual


Operating your vehicle outside the USA        Certain Mercedes-Benz models are avail-
or Canada                                     able for delivery in Europe under our Euro-
                                              pean Delivery Program. For details, consult
If you plan to operate your vehicle in for-   your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or
eign countries, please be aware that:         write to:
   service facilities or replacement parts    In the USA:
   may not be readily available,
                                              Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
   unleaded gasoline for vehicles with cat-   European Delivery Department
   alytic converters may not be available;    One Mercedes Drive
   the use of leaded fuels will damage the    Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
   catalysts,
                                              In Canada:
   gasoline may have a considerably low-
                                              Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
   er octane rating, and improper fuel can
                                              European Delivery Department
   cause engine damage.
                                              98 Vanderhoof Avenue
                                              Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9




                                                                                                          13
Introduction
Where to find it


This Operator’s Manual is designed to pro-
vide comprehensive support information          Controls in detail                               Technical data
for you, the vehicle operator. For you to       Here you will find detailed information          All important technical data for your vehi-
find information quickly each section has       about the equipment installed in your vehi-      cle can be found in this section.
its own reference color:                        cle. This section expands on the “Getting
                                                started” section and also describes techni-
                                                cal innovations. If you are already familiar     Indexes
At a glance                                     with the basic functions of your vehicle,        The glossary provides explanations of the
Here you will find an overview of all the       this section will be of particular interest to   most important technical terms.
controls that can be operated from the          you.
driver’s seat.                                                                                   The table of contents and the index are de-
                                                                                                 signed to help you find information quickly
                                                Operation                                        and easily.
Getting started                                 Here you will find all the information you       The following publications are part of your
Here you will find all the information you      need for the proper operation of your vehi-      vehicle documentation:
need for your first drive. You should read      cle.                                                this Operator’s Manual
this section first if this is your first
Mercedes-Benz vehicle or if you are rent-                                                           the Maintenance Booklet
ing or borrowing this vehicle.                  Practical hints                                  Separate operating instructions will be
                                                This section provides fast assistance for        provided as required depending on the
                                                dealing with problems you may encounter.         equipment options installed in your vehi-
Safety and Security                                                                              cle.
Here you will find descriptions of the safety
features of your vehicle.



14
                                                                                                                        Introduction
                                                                                                                               Symbols
    Symbols
The following symbols are found in this                                                            This symbol points to instructions for
Operator’s Manual:                             Warning!                             G              you to follow.
*      Optional equipment is identified        Warning notices draw your attention to haz-         A number of these symbols appearing
       with an asterisk. Since standard        ards that may endanger your health or life,         in succession indicates a multiple-step
       equipment varies between models,        or the health or life of others.                    procedure.
       the descriptions and illustrations in
                                                                                                  Page    This symbol tells you where to
       this manual may differ slightly from
                                                 !                                                        look for further information on a
       the actual equipment of your vehi-
                                                                                                          topic.
       cle.                                      Highlights hazards that may result in
                                                 damage to your vehicle.                                  This continuation symbol marks
                                                                                                          an interrupted procedure which
                                                                                                          will be continued on the next
                                                 i
                                                                                                          page.
                                                 Helpful hints or further information you
                                                 may find useful.                            ->           In the glossary of technical
                                                                                                          terms, this symbol is used to in-
                                                                                                          dicate cross-references to term
                                                                                                          definitions.
                                                                                             DISPLAY      Words appearing in the multi-
                                                                                                          function display are printed in
                                                                                                          the type shown here.




                                                                                                                                       15
Introduction
Operating safety


                                                                                                  Proper use of the vehicle
 Warning!                              G        Warning!                                 G
                                                                                                  Proper use of the vehicle requires that you
 Work improperly carried out on electronic      Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody         are familiar with the following information
 components and associated software could       or tires/wheels, for example when running         and rules:
 cause them to cease functioning. Because       over an obstacle, road debris or a pothole,
                                                                                                     the safety precautions in this manual
 the vehicle’s electronic components are in-    may cause serious damage and impair the
 terconnected, any modifications made may       operating safety of your vehicle. If you feel a      the “Technical data” section in this
 produce an undesired effect on other sys-      sudden significant vibration or ride distur-         manual
 tems. Electronic malfunctions could seri-      bance, or you suspect that damage to your            traffic rules and regulations
 ously impair the operating safety of your      vehicle has occurred, you should turn on
 vehicle.                                       your hazard warning flashers, carefully slow         motor vehicle laws and safety stan-
                                                down, and drive with caution to an area              dards
 See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
 for repairs or modifications to electronic     which is a safe distance from the road.
 components.                                    Inspect the vehicle underbody and                  Warning!                                G
 Other improper work or modifications on the    tires/wheels for possible damage. If the ve-
                                                hicle appears unsafe, have it towed to the         Various warning labels are attached to your
 vehicle could also have a negative impact on
                                                nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center            vehicle. These warning labels are intended
 the operating safety of the vehicle.
                                                or other qualified maintenance or repair fa-       to make you and others aware of various
 Some safety systems only function while the    cility for further inspection or repairs.          risks. You should not remove any of these
 engine is running. You should therefore nev-                                                      warning labels unless explicitly instructed to
 er turn off the engine while driving.                                                             do so by information on the label itself. Re-
                                                                                                   moval of any of these labels may cause you
                                                                                                   and others to be unaware of certain risks
                                                                                                   which may result in an accident and/or per-
                                                                                                   sonal injury.


16
                                                                                                                   Introduction
                                                                                                  Problems with your vehicle
  Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to
immediately contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If the matter is
not handled to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Center management, or if necessary contact us
at one of the following addresses:
In the USA:
Customer Assistance Center
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario, M4G 4C9




                                                                                                                                 17
Introduction
Reporting safety defects


For the USA only:
The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
“National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966.”

Reporting safety defects

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer,
or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (or 366-0123 in Washington, D.C. area) or
write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor ve-
hicle safety from the Hotline.




18
                                                                                                                    Introduction
                                                                                                          Vehicle data recording
   Vehicle data recording
Information regarding electronic
recording devices

(Including notice pursuant to California Code § 9951)
Please note that your vehicle is equipped with devices that can record vehicle systems data and, if equipped with the Tele Aid system,
may transmit some data in certain accidents.
This information helps, for example, to diagnose vehicle systems after a collision and to continuously improve vehicle safety.
DaimlerChrysler may access the information and share it with others
   for safety research or vehicle diagnosis purposes
   with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee
   in response to an official request by law enforcement or other government agency
   for use in dispute resolution involving DaimlerChrysler, its affiliates or sales/service organization and/or
   as otherwise required or permitted by law.
Please check the Tele Aid subscription service agreement for details regarding the information that may be recorded or transmitted
via that system.




                                                                                                                                  19
20
               At a glance
                    Cockpit
         Instrument cluster
Multifunction steering wheel
             Center console
     Overhead control panel
         Door control panel




                         21
At a glance
Cockpit




22
                                                                                                       At a glance
                                                                                                            Cockpit


    Item                     Page       Item                         Page         Item                          Page
1 Combination switch                6 Lever for voice control sys-            f Steering wheel adjustment         42
       Turn signals            53     tem*, see separate operat-                stalk
                                      ing instructions                            Heated steering wheel*         241
       Windshield wipers       54
                                    7 Front Parktronic* warning        227    g Parking brake pedal               50
       High beam              129     indicator for right
2 Cruise control lever        213     front area                              h Hood lock release                273

       Cruise control         206   8 Overhead control panel            29    j Parking brake release             50

       Distronic*             209   9 Glove box lock                   233    k Door control panel                30

3 Instrument cluster           24   a Glove box lid release            233    l Exterior lamp switch             125

4 Multifunction steering       26   b Glove box                        233    m Headlamp washer button           179
  wheel                             c Center console                 27, 28   n Front Parktronic* warning        227
5 Steering wheel gearshift    176                                               indicator for left front area
                                    d Starter switch                    34
  control (CL 55 AMG and
  CL 65 AMG only)                   e Horn




                                                                                                                  23
At a glance
Instrument cluster




24
                                                                                                        At a glance
                                                                                               Instrument cluster


    Item                            Page      Item                       Page       Item                        Page
1 Coolant temperature gauge          135   6 Right display with:                a Outside temperature            135
2 Fuel gauge with fuel tank          329      < Seat belt telltale        331     indicator
  reserve warning lamp                        A High beam headlamp        326   b Left display with:
3 L Left turn signal                  53        indicator lamp                      1 Supplemental               333
    indicator lamp                            - Antilock Brake             52         restraint system
    K Right turn signal               53        System (ABS)                          indicator lamp
      indicator lamp                            indicator lamp                      ; Brake warning lamp,        327
4 Speedometer with:                        7 J       Reset button         134         USA only

    v Electronic Stability           331   8 Display with:                          3 Brake warning lamp,        327
      Program (ESP)                                                                   Canada only
                                                 Gear selector lever      167
      warning lamp                               position                           ? Engine malfunction         328
    l Distance warning               330                                              indicator lamp,
                                                 Program mode             167         USA only
      lamp
                                                 Digital clock                      ± Engine malfunction         328
    Vehicles without Distronic*:                 (see COMAND operating                indicator lamp,
    Warning lamp without func-                   instructions)                        Canada only
    tion. It illuminates when the
                                           9 Multifunction display                  H Tire inflation pres-       294
    ignition is on. It should go
                                             with:                                    sure warning lamp
    out when the engine is run-
    ning.                                        Trip odometer            137   c Knob for instrument cluster    134
5 Tachometer                         136         Main odometer            137     illumination



                                                                                                                 25
At a glance
Multifunction steering wheel


                                   Item                     Page      Item                     Page
                               1 Multifunction display       137   4 Menu systems:              138
                                   Operating control         138     Press button
                                   system                             è for next menu
                               2 Selecting the submenu or    138      ÿ for previous menu
                                 setting the volume:
                                                                   5 Moving within a menu:      138
                                 Press button
                                                                     Press button
                                   æ up/to increase
                                                                      j for next display
                                   ç down/to decrease
                                                                      k for previous display
                               3 Telephone*:                 147
                                 Press button
                                   s to take a call
                                     to dial a call
                                   t to end a call
                                     to reject an in-
                                     coming call




26
                                                                                  At a glance
                                                                               Center console
  Center console
Upper part             Item                          Page       Item                      Page
                   1 Switch for rear window           184   7 Central unlocking switch     111
                     sunshade                               8 Electronic Stability Pro-     84
                   2 Parktronic* deactivation         225     gram (ESP) control switch
                     button                                 9 Rear head restraints,        115
                   3 Active Body Control (ABC)        221     switch for folding down
                     button                                 a Tow-away alarm switch         87
                   4 Level control button             222   b COMAND system, see sep-
                   5 Central locking switch           111     arate operating instruc-
                       Anti-theft alarm system in-     85     tions
                       dicator lamp                         c Automatic climate control    185
                   6 Hazard warning flasher           130
                     on/off switch




                                                                                            27
At a glance
Center console


Lower part           Item                       Page
                 1 KEYLESS-GO* start/stop         35
                   button
                 2 Gear selector lever for        49
                   automatic transmission
                 3 Front passenger front          74
                   air bag off indicator lamp
                 4 Thumbwheel for setting        217
                   distance in Distronic*
                 5 Distance warning func-        217
                   tion* on/off button
                 6 Program mode selector for     172
                   automatic transmission
                 7 Cover of compartment
                   with:
                        Ashtray                  239
                        Lighter                  240




28
                                                                          At a glance
                                                                Overhead control panel
Overhead control panel
                             Item                        Page
                         1 Left reading lamp on/off       132
                         2 Rear interior lighting         132
                           on/off
                         3 Right reading lamp on/off      132
                         4 Interior lighting control      131
                         5 Tilt/sliding sunroof           203
                         6 Hands-free microphone for      243
                           Tele Aid (emergency call
                           system), telephone*, and
                           voice control system* (see
                           separate operating instruc-
                           tions)
                         7 Rear view mirror                43
                         8 Garage door opener             251
                         9 Tele Aid (emergency call       243
                           system) button




                                                                                   29
At a glance
Door control panel


                         Item                       Page       Item                       Page
                     1 Door handle                   100   5 Exterior mirror adjustment     43,
                     2 Memory function (for stor-    122                                   179
                       ing seat, exterior mirror           6 Switches for opening/clos-    198
                       and steering wheel set-               ing front door windows
                       tings)                              7 Override switch for rear       78
                     3 Seat heating                  119     passenger compartment
                         Seat ventilation*           121   8 Switches for opening/clos-    198
                     4 Seat adjustment                37     ing rear windows
                                                           9 Remote trunk lid switch       102




30
 Getting started
         Unlocking
         Adjusting
            Driving
Parking and locking




                31
Getting started
Unlocking


The“Getting started” section provides an        Unlocking with the SmartKey
overview of the vehicle’s most basic func-                                                     Warning!                              G
tions. First-time Mercedes-Benz owners
should pay special attention to the infor-                                                     When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
mation given here.                                                                             SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
                                                                                               with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
If you are already familiar with the basic                                                     children unattended in the vehicle, or with
functions described here, the “Controls in                                                     access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsuper-
detail” section will provide you with further                                                  vised use of vehicle equipment may cause
information. The corresponding page refer-                                                     an accident and/or serious personal injury.
ences are located at the end of each seg-
ment.
                                                                                                 Press unlock button Πon the
                                                SmartKey with remote control
                                                                                                 SmartKey.
                                                1 ‹ Lock button
                                                2 Š Opening button for trunk                     All turn signal lamps flash once. The ve-
                                                3 ΠUnlock button                                hicle unlocks. The locking knobs in the
                                                4 Â Panic button ( page 79)                      doors move up. The anti-theft alarm
                                                                                                 system is disarmed.
                                                   i                                             Get in the vehicle and insert the
                                                   Opening a door causes the windows on          SmartKey in the starter switch.
                                                   that side of the car to open slightly.
                                                                                              For more information, see “SmartKey”
                                                   They will return to the up position when
                                                                                              ( page 90).
                                                   the door is closed.




32
                                                                                                                   Getting started
                                                                                                                            Unlocking


Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO*                                                                       Grasp the door handle.
                                              Warning!                               G           All turn signal lamps flash once. The ve-
With KEYLESS-GO you can open and start
                                              When leaving the vehicle, always take the          hicle unlocks. The locking knobs in the
your vehicle without using the buttons on
                                              SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you and             doors move up. The anti-theft alarm
the SmartKey.
                                              lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-      system is disarmed.
   i                                          tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
                                                                                                 i
   To unlock the vehicle, the SmartKey        unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi-
                                                                                                 If the vehicle has been parked for more
   with KEYLESS-GO must be outside the        cle equipment may cause an accident
                                                                                                 than 72 hours, you must pull the out-
   vehicle, no further than approx. 3 feet    and/or serious personal injury.
                                                                                                 side door handle in order to activate
   (1 meter) away from the door.
                                                                                                 the KEYLESS-GO function.

   i                                                                                             Get in the vehicle.
   Opening a door causes the windows on
   that side of the car to open slightly.                                                     For more information, see “SmartKey with
   They will return to the up position when                                                   KEYLESS-GO*” ( page 94).
   the door is closed.




                                                                                                                                      33
Getting started
Unlocking


Starter switch positions                          0 For removing SmartKey                       i
                                                  1 Power supply to some electrical con-        When you switch on the ignition, the in-
                                                    sumers, such as seat adjustment             dicator and warning lamps (except high
 Warning!                                G        2 Ignition (power supply for all electrical   beam headlamp indicator lamp and
                                                    consumers) and driving position.            turn signal indicator lamps unless acti-
 When leaving the vehicle, always remove the        All lamps (except high beam headlamp        vated) in the instrument cluster come
 SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*              indicator lamp and turn signal indicator    on. This indicates that the respective
 from the starter switch, take it with you, and     lamps unless activated) in the instru-      systems are operational. The indicator
 lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-      ment cluster come on. If a lamp in the      and warning lamps (except high beam
 tended in the vehicle, or with access to an        instrument cluster fails to come on         headlamp indicator lamp and turn sig-
 unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi-        when the ignition is switched on, have      nal indicator lamps unless activated)
 cle equipment may cause an accident                it checked and replaced if necessary. If    should go out when the engine is run-
 and/or serious personal injury.                    a lamp in the instrument cluster re-        ning.
                                                    mains on after starting the engine or
SmartKey                                            comes on while driving, refer to “Lamps
                                                    in instrument cluster” ( page 326).         i
                                                  3 Starting position                           The SmartKey can only be removed
                                                                                                from the starter switch with the gear
                                                                                                selector lever in position P.




Starter switch

34
                                                                                                               Getting started
                                                                                                                       Unlocking


   !                                         SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
   If the SmartKey cannot be turned in the   Pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop but-
   starter switch, the battery may not be    ton on the gear selector lever corresponds
   sufficiently charged.                     to turning the SmartKey to the various
       Check the battery and charge it if    starter switch positions.
       necessary ( page 386).                If you firmly depress the brake pedal dur-
       Get a jump start ( page 389).         ing pressing KEYLESS-GO start/stop but-
                                             ton, the engine starts automatically.
   To prevent accelerated battery dis-
   charge or a completely discharged bat-       i                                         KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
   tery, always remove the SmartKey from        The function of the SmartKey overrules
   the starter switch when the engine is                                                  1 USA only
                                                the KEYLESS-GO function.
   not in operation.                                                                      2 Canada only
                                                                                          The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
For information on starting the engine us-                                                located in the vehicle.
ing the SmartKey, see “Starting with the                                                     Make sure the gear selector lever is set
SmartKey” ( page 48).                                                                        to P.
                                                                                             Do not depress the brake pedal.




                                                                                                                                 35
Getting started
Unlocking


Position 0                                     Ignition (or position 2)                         i
Before you press the KEYLESS-GO                   Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop                   When you switch on the ignition, the in-
start/stop button 1, the vehicle’s                button 1 twice.                               dicator and warning lamps (except high
on-board electronics have status 0 (as with                                                     beam headlamp indicator lamp and
                                                  All lamps (except high beam headlamp
SmartKey removed).                                                                              turn signal indicator lamps unless acti-
                                                  indicator lamp and turn signal indicator
                                                                                                vated) in the instrument cluster come
                                                  lamps unless activated) in the instru-
Position 1                                                                                      on. This indicates that the respective
                                                  ment cluster come on. If a lamp in the
                                                                                                systems are operational. The indicator
   Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop                    instrument cluster fails to come on
                                                                                                and warning lamps (except high beam
   button 1 once.                                 when the ignition is switched on, have
                                                                                                headlamp indicator lamp and turn sig-
   This supplies power to some electrical         it checked and replaced if necessary. If
                                                                                                nal indicator lamps unless activated)
   consumers, such as seat adjustment.            a lamp in the instrument cluster re-
                                                                                                should go out when the engine is run-
                                                  mains on after starting the engine or
                                                                                                ning.
   i                                              comes on while driving, refer to “Lamps
   If you now press the KEYLESS-GO                in instrument cluster” ( page 326).
                                                                                             For information on starting the engine us-
   start/stop button
                                                  i                                          ing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button,
       once again, the ignition (position 2)      If you now press the KEYLESS-GO            see “Starting with KEYLESS-GO*”
       is switched on                             start/stop button once, the power sup-     ( page 49).
       twice, the power supply is again           ply is again switched off.
       switched off




36
                                                                                                                           Getting started
                                                                                                                                      Adjusting
  Adjusting

 Warning!                                 G        belts are properly positioned on the body.
                                                                                                    Warning!                                 G
                                                   Your seat must be adjusted so that you can
 All seat, head restraint, steering wheel, and     correctly fasten your seat belt ( page 45).      Children 12 years old and under must never
 rear view mirror adjustments, as well as fas-     Never place hands under the seat or near         ride in the front seat, except in a
 tening of seat belts, must be done before         any moving parts while a seat is being ad-       Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM
 the vehicle is put into motion.                   justed.                                          compatible child seat, which operates with
                                                                                                    the BabySmartTM system installed in the ve-
Seats                                                                                               hicle to deactivate the passenger front
                                                   Warning!                                G        air bag when it is properly installed. Other-
                                                                                                    wise they will be struck by the air bag when
 Warning!                                 G        When leaving the vehicle, always remove the      it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious
                                                   SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*            or fatal injury will result.
 Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving.    from the starter switch, take it with you, and   According to accident statistics, children
 Adjusting the seat while driving could cause      lock the vehicle.                                are safer when properly restrained in the
 the driver to lose control of the vehicle.                                                         rear seating positions than in the front seat-
                                                   Even with the SmartKey or SmartKey with
 Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat      KEYLESS-GO* removed from the starter             ing positions. Infants and small children
 back in an excessively reclined position as       switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*          must ride in the back seats and be seated in
 this can be dangerous. You could slide un-        removed from the vehicle, the power seats        an appropriate infant or child restraint sys-
 der the seat belt in a collision. If you slide    can be operated when the respective door is      tem, which is properly secured with the ve-
 under it, the belt would apply force at the ab-   open. Therefore, do not leave children unat-     hicle's seat belt and top tether strap, or
 domen or neck. That could cause serious or        tended in the vehicle, or with access to an      secured via lower anchors and top tether
 fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat        unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi-      strap, fully in accordance with the child seat
 belts provide the best restraint when the         cle equipment may cause an accident              manufacturer’s instructions.
 wearer is in a nearly upright position and        and/or serious personal injury.



                                                                                                                                                 37
Getting started
Adjusting


                                                        Switch on ignition ( page 34).              Seat cushion tilt
 A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
 significantly increased if the child restraints   or                                                  Press the switch up or down in the di-
 are not properly secured in the vehicle and                                                           rection of arrow 3 until your upper
                                                        Open the respective door.
 the child is not properly secured in the child                                                        legs are lightly supported.
 restraint.
                                                   Seat fore and aft adjustment
                                                                                                    Seat cushion depth
Seat adjustment                                         Press the switch forward or backward
                                                        in the direction of arrow 5.                   Press the switch forward or backward
The seat adjustment switches are located                                                               in the direction of arrow 4 until your
in each door.                                           Adjust seat to a comfortable seating           legs are supported comfortably.
                                                        position that still allows you to reach
                                                        the accelerator/brake pedal safely.         Seat backrest tilt
                                                        The position should be as far to the rear
                                                                                                       Press the switch forward or backward
                                                        as possible, consistent with ability to
                                                                                                       in the direction of arrow 6 until your
                                                        properly operate controls.
                                                                                                       arms are slightly angled when holding
                                                        i                                              the steering wheel.
                                                        When moving the seat, be sure that
                                                        there are no items in the footwell or be-   Seat height
                                                        hind the seats. Otherwise you could            Press the switch up or down in the di-
                                                        damage the seats.                              rection of arrow 2.
1 Head restraint height
2 Seat height                                           The memory function ( page 122) lets
3 Seat cushion tilt                                     you store the setting for the seat posi-
4 Seat cushion depth                                    tion together with the settings for the
5 Seat fore and aft adjustment                          steering wheel and the exterior rear
6 Seat backrest tilt                                    view mirrors.

38
                                                                                                                    Getting started
                                                                                                                             Adjusting


Head restraint height                             Head restraint tilt                            i
   Press the switch up or down in the di-                                                        The feature below is deactivated at the
   rection of arrow 1.                                                                           factory for U.S. vehicles. If you wish to
                                                                                                 have it activated, contact an authorized
                                                                                                 Mercedes-Benz Center.
 Warning!                                G
                                                                                                 The front passenger seat head restraint
 For your protection, drive only with properly                                                   automatically lowers after a few sec-
 positioned head restraints.                                                                     onds when the front passenger seat is
 Adjust head restraint so that the center of                                                     not occupied. This improves the
 the head restraint supports the back of the                                                     driver's outward view as well as the for-
 head at eye level. This will reduce the poten-   Manually adjust the angle of the head re-      ward view from the rear passenger
 tial for injury to the head and neck in the      straint.                                       compartment.
 event of an accident or similar situation.          Push or pull on the lower edge of the       When the front passenger seat is occu-
 Do not drive the vehicle without the seat           head restraint cushion.                     pied again, the front passenger head
 head restraints. Head restraints are intend-                                                    restraint returns to the last set position
 ed to help reduce injuries during an acci-          i                                           within a few seconds.
 dent.                                               Adjust the head restraint in such a way     If the front passenger seat was moved
                                                     that it is as close to the head as possi-   fore or aft while not being occupied,
                                                     ble.                                        the front passenger seat head restraint
   i
                                                                                                 returns to a position that corresponds
   Adjust the head restraint in such a way
                                                  For more information, see “Seats”              best with the seat's axial position when
   that it is as close to the head as possi-
                                                  ( page 112).                                   the seat is occupied again.
   ble.




                                                                                                                                       39
Getting started
Adjusting


Folding front seat backrest forward         Folding backrests back
                                               Lift release lever 1 and fold backrest
                                                                                           Warning!                              G
                                               back.                                       Always ensure that no one can become
                                               The seat and head restraint return to       trapped or injured when the seat is moving.
                                               their previous positions.                   In case potential danger exists, the proce-
                                                                                           dure can be interrupted by moving the seat
                                               i                                           adjustment switch ( page 38) in the door
                                               To interrupt the procedure, activate the    control panel or by moving the release lever
                                               seat adjustment switch ( page 38) or        again.
                                               move the release lever again.
1 Release lever
                                               !
Folding backrest forward                       When moving the seat, make sure
   Lift release lever 1 and fold the seat      there are no items in the footwell or be-
   backrest forward.                           hind the seats. Otherwise you could
                                               damage the seats.
   The seat will automatically slide for-
   ward and the head restraint will move
   down.




40
                                                                                                                      Getting started
                                                                                                                               Adjusting


                                                                                                    !
Warning!                                 G        Keep the area around head restraints clear
                                                  of articles (e.g. clothing) to not obstruct the   The automatic seat slide is provided
                                                  folding operation of the head restraints.         with a safety feature.
The seat belts provide protection only with
the backrest locked in place and, therefore,      The warning message is no longer displayed        The automatic process is interrupted, if
must be locked in place with the vehicle in       as soon as the backrest is locked in place. If    the backrest of the sliding seat is
motion. Do not drive the vehicle when the         both backrests are locked in place and the        pushed against an occupant or object.
backrest is not locked in place. If the warn-     warning message is still displayed, have the      The seat will slide forward and stop.
ing message                                       system checked at an authorized                   Investigate and correct the cause of in-
SEAT BACKREST, RIGHT                              Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.                 terruption.
LOCK!                                             When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
                                                                                                    Now use memory button ( page 123)
or                                                SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
                                                                                                    or seat adjustment switch ( page 38)
                                                  from the starter switch, take it with you, and
SEAT BACKREST, LEFT                                                                                 to bring seat into desired position.
                                                  lock the vehicle.
LOCK!                                                                                               When folding the backrest forward
                                                  The power seats can also be operated with
is displayed in the multifunction display,                                                          from a reclined position, and then fold-
                                                  the driver’s or passenger door open. Do not
then the respective backrest is not engaged                                                         ing it back, the backrest stops in a
                                                  leave children unattended in the vehicle or
in its lock. Carefully slow down, and drive                                                         more upright position for the safety of
                                                  with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsu-
with caution to an area which is in a safe dis-                                                     any rear-seat passenger. Adjust the
                                                  pervised use of vehicle equipment may
tance from the roadway. Always provide suf-                                                         backrest until your arms are slightly an-
                                                  cause an accident and/or serious personal
ficient room behind the backrest and fold                                                           gled when holding the steering
                                                  injury.
the backrest all the way back until it locks in                                                     wheel ( page 38).
place.                                            Never place hands under seat or near any
                                                  moving parts during a seat adjustment pro-
                                                  cedure.



                                                                                                                                         41
Getting started
Adjusting


Steering wheel                                    Steering wheel adjustment                      Adjusting steering column in or out
                                                  The stalk for steering wheel adjustment is        Move stalk forward or back in the direc-
                                                  located on the steering column (lower left).      tion of arrow 1 until a comfortable
 Warning!                                G                                                          steering wheel position is reached with
                                                                                                    your arms slightly bent at the elbow.
 Do not adjust the steering wheel while driv-
 ing. Adjusting the steering wheel while driv-
                                                                                                 Adjusting steering column up or down
 ing could cause the driver to lose control of
 the vehicle.                                                                                       Move stalk up or down in the direction
 When leaving the vehicle, always remove the                                                        of arrow 2.
 SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*                                                              Make sure your legs can move freely
 from the starter switch, take it with you, and                                                     and all the displays (incl. malfunction
 lock the vehicle.                                                                                  and indicator lamps) on the instrument
 Even with the SmartKey or SmartKey with          1 Adjusting steering column, in or out            cluster are clearly visible.
 KEYLESS-GO* removed from the starter             2 Adjusting steering column, up or down
 switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
                                                                                                    i
                                                       Switch on ignition ( page 34).               The memory function ( page 122) lets
 removed from the vehicle, the steering
 wheel adjustment feature can be operated         or                                                you store settings for the steering
 when the driver’s door is open. Therefore,                                                         wheel together with the settings for the
                                                       Open the driver’s door.                      exterior rear view mirrors and the seat
 do not leave children unattended in the ve-
 hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.                                                      position.
 Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
 cause an accident and/or serious personal                                                       For more information, see “Heated steer-
 injury.                                                                                         ing wheel*” ( page 241).



42
                                                                                                                       Getting started
                                                                                                                                 Adjusting


Mirrors                                             Interior rear view mirror                   Exterior rear view mirror
                                                       Manually adjust the interior rear view
Adjust the interior and exterior rear view
mirrors before driving so that you have a
                                                       mirror.                                   Warning!                               G
good view of the road and traffic condi-            For more information, see “Rear view mir-
                                                                                                 Exercise care when using the passenger
tions.                                              rors” ( page 179).
                                                                                                 side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
                                                                                                 surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
 Warning!                                 G                                                      for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
                                                                                                 are closer than they appear. Check your in-
 In the case of an accident, liquid electrolyte                                                  terior rear view mirror or glance over your
 may escape the mirror housing if the mirror                                                     shoulder before changing lanes.
 glass breaks.
 Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not al-
 low the liquid to come into contact with
 eyes, skin, clothing, or the respiratory sys-
 tem. In case it does, immediately flush af-
 fected area with water, and seek medical
 help if necessary.


   !
   Electrolyte drops coming into contact
   with the vehicle paint finish can only be
   completely removed while in their liq-
   uid state and by applying plenty of wa-
   ter.

                                                                                                                                            43
Getting started
Adjusting


The buttons are located on the driver’s     Switch on ignition ( page 34).               i
door.                                                                                    The memory function ( page 122) lets
                                            Press button 1 for the left mirror or
                                            button 2 for the right mirror.               you store the setting for the exterior
                                                                                         rear view mirrors together with the set-
                                            Push adjustment button 3 up, down,
                                                                                         ting for the steering wheel and the seat
                                            left or right according to the desired
                                                                                         position.
                                            setting.
                                                                                         At low ambient temperatures, the mir-
                                            !                                            rors will be heated automatically.
                                            For information on how to reposition
                                            the exterior mirror housing when it was   For more information, see “Folding exteri-
                                            forcibly pushed forward (hit from the     or rear view mirrors in and out
1 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror   rear) or forcibly pushed rearward (hit    automatically” ( page 181).
  button                                    from the front), see “Folding exterior
2 Passenger-side exterior rear view mir-    rear view mirrors in and out manually”
  ror button                                ( page 181).
3 Adjustment button




44
                                                                                                                                Getting started
                                                                                                                                               Driving
 Driving
                                                 Fastening the seat belts
Warning!                                G                                                                In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
                                                                                                         death is lessened if you are wearing your
Do not lay any objects in the driver’s foot-      Warning!                                  G            seat belt. The air bags can only provide the
                                                                                                         protection they were designed to afford if
well. Be careful that floor mats or carpets in
the driver’s footwell leave sufficient clear-                                                            the occupants are using their seat belts
                                                  Always fasten your seat belt before driving
ance for the pedals.                                                                                     ( page 62).
                                                  off. Always make sure your passengers are
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers        properly restrained, even those sitting in the
                                                  rear and pregnant women.
the objects could get caught between or un-                                                              Warning!                                 G
derneath the pedals. You could then no            Failure to wear and properly fasten and po-
longer brake or accelerate.                       sition your seat belt greatly increases your           Children 12 years old and under must never
                                                  risk of injuries and their likely severity in an       ride in the front seat, except in a
                                                  accident. You and your passengers should               Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM1
                                                  always wear seat belts.                                compatible child seat, which operates with
                                                  If you are ever in an accident, your injuries          the BabySmartTM system installed in the ve-
                                                  can be considerably more severe without                hicle to deactivate the passenger front
                                                  your seat belt properly buckled. Without               air bag when it is properly installed. Other-
                                                  your seat belt buckled, you are much more              wise they will be struck by the air bag when
                                                  likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be        it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious
                                                  ejected from it. You can be seriously injured          or fatal injury will result.
                                                  or killed.                                         1
                                                                                                         BabySmart TM is a trademark of Siemens Automo-
                                                                                                         tive Corp.




                                                                                                                                                      45
Getting started
Driving


 According to accident statistics, children
 are safer when properly restrained in the
                                                   Warning!                                 G         Warning!                                 G
 rear seating positions than in the front seat-    Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat       Never let more people ride in the vehicle
 ing positions. Infants and small children         backrest in an excessively reclined position       than there are seat belts available. Be sure
 must ride in back seats and be seated in an       as this can be dangerous. You could slide          everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly re-
 appropriate infant or child restraint system,     under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide   strained with a separate seat belt. Never use
 which is properly secured with the vehicle’s      under it, the belt would apply force at the ab-    a seat belt for more than one person at a
 seat belt and top tether strap, or secured via    domen or neck. That could cause serious or         time.
 lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in      even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and
 accordance with the child seat manufactur-        seat belt provide the best restraint when the
 er's instructions.                                wearer is in a nearly upright position and the     Warning!                                 G
 A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is    belt is properly positioned on the body.
 significantly increased if the child restraints                                                      Read and observe the additional warning no-
 are not properly secured in the vehicle and                                                          tices printed in the “Safety and Security”
 the child is not properly secured in the child                                                       section ( page 66).
 restraint.




46
                                                                                                                 Getting started
                                                                                                                               Driving


                                             Proper use of seat belts                        Check your seat belt during travel to
                                                                                             make sure that it is properly posi-
                                                Do not twist the belt when fastening.
                                                                                             tioned.
                                                Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder
                                                                                             Make sure the seat belt is always fitted
                                                portion is located as close as possible
                                                                                             snugly. Take special care of this when
                                                to the middle of the shoulder (it should
                                                                                             wearing loose clothing.
                                                not touch the neck). Never pass the
                                                shoulder portion of the belt under your
                                                arm.                                       Warning!                                G
                                                Position the lap belt as low as possible
1 Release button                                                                           Do not pass belts over sharp edges. They
                                                on your hips (over hip joint) and not
2 Buckle                                                                                   could tear.
                                                across the abdomen.
3 Latch plate                                                                              Do not allow the belt to get caught in the
                                                Place the seat backrest in a nearly up-
  With a smooth motion, pull the belt                                                      door or in the seat adjustment mechanism.
                                                right position.
  from the seat belt outlet.                                                               This could damage the belt.
                                                Never use a seat belt for more than one    Never attempt to make modifications to
  Place the shoulder portion of the belt        person at a time.
  across the top of your shoulder and the                                                  seat belts. This could impair the effective-
  lap portion across your hips.                 Do not fasten a seat belt around a per-    ness of the belts.
                                                son and another object at the same         Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
  Push latch plate 3 into buckle 2 until        time. When using a seat belt to secure     severely weaken them. In a crash, they may
  it clicks.                                    infant or toddler restraints or children   not be able to provide adequate protection.
  If necessary, tighten the lap portion to      in booster seats, always follow the
                                                                                           Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly
  a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion        child seat manufacturer's instructions.
                                                                                           stressed in an accident must be replaced.
  up.
                                                                                           Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
                                                                                           ter.


                                                                                                                                      47
Getting started
Driving


Starting the engine                              Automatic transmission                       Starting with the SmartKey
                                                                                                 Make sure the gear selector lever is set
                                                                                                 to P.
 Warning!                               G
                                                                                                 Do not depress accelerator.
 Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
                                                                                                 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
 your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
                                                                                                 to position 3 and hold until the engine
 monoxide, and inhaling it can cause
                                                                                                 starts ( page 34).
 unconsciousness and lead to death.
 Do not run the engine in confined areas                                                         i
 (such as a garage) which are not properly                                                       You can also use the “touch-start”
 ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas       Gearshift pattern for automatic                 function. Turn the SmartKey to
 fumes are entering the vehicle while driving,   transmission                                    position 3 and release it again immedi-
 have the cause determined and corrected          P Park position with gear selector lever       ately. The engine then starts automati-
 immediately. If you must drive under these         lock                                         cally.
 conditions, drive with at least one window       R Reverse gear
 fully open.                                      N Neutral                                      Depress the brake pedal.
                                                  D Drive position
                                                                                                 The gear selector lever lock is released.
                                                 For more information, see the “Controls in
                                                 detail” section ( page 166).                 For information on turning off the engine
                                                                                              with the SmartKey, see “Turning off with
                                                                                              the SmartKey” ( page 59).




48
                                                                                                                   Getting started
                                                                                                                               Driving


Starting with KEYLESS-GO*                        Depress the brake pedal during the             If you are starting the engine with
                                                 starting procedure. Do not depress ac-         KEYLESS-GO: Close any doors that
You can start your vehicle without the
                                                 celerator.                                     may be open to allow for better detec-
SmartKey in the starter switch using the
                                                                                                tion of the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button on the              The gear selector lever lock is released.
                                                                                                KEYLESS-GO.
gear selector lever.
                                                 Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop                    or:
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be             button 1 once.                                 Start the engine with the SmartKey as
located in the vehicle.                          The engine starts automatically if the         radio signals from another source may
                                                 SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is in the             be interfering with the SmartKey with
                                                 vehicle.                                       KEYLESS-GO.

                                              For information on turning off the engine         Repeat the starting procedure
                                              with KEYLESS-GO, see “Turning off the en-         ( page 48). Remember that extended
                                              gine with KEYLESS-GO*” ( page 59).                starting attempts can drain the battery.
                                                                                                Get a jump start ( page 389).
                                              Starting difficulties
                                                                                             If the engine does not start after several
                                              If the engine does not start as described,     starting attempts, there could be a mal-
                                              carry out the following steps:                 function in the engine electronics or in the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button                                                                 fuel supply system.
                                                 If you are starting the engine with the
1 USA only                                       SmartKey, turn SmartKey in starter             Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
2 Canada only                                    switch to position 0 and repeat starting       Center.
   Make sure the gear selector lever is set      procedure.
   to P.




                                                                                                                                     49
Getting started
Driving


Parking brake                                                                     Driving
                                 Warning!                                G           Depress the brake pedal.
                                 When leaving the vehicle, always remove the         Move gear selector lever in position D
                                 SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*               or R.
                                 from the starter switch, take it with you, and
                                 lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-
                                 tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
                                                                                   Warning!                                G
                                 unlocked vehicle. Children could release the
                                                                                   It is dangerous to shift the gear selector le-
                                 parking brake, which could result in an acci-
                                                                                   ver out of P or N if the engine speed is high-
                                 dent and/or serious injury.
                                                                                   er than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly
                                                                                   on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-
                                   Release the parking brake by pulling on         erate quickly forward or in reverse. You
                                   handle 2.                                       could lose control of the vehicle and hit
                                   The warning lamp ; (USA only) or                someone or something. Only shift into gear
                                   3 (Canada only) in the instrument               when the engine is idling normally and when
1 Parking brake pedal                                                              your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
2 Parking brake release handle     cluster goes out.




50
                                                                                                                    Getting started
                                                                                                                                Driving


                                                Once the vehicle is in motion, the                !
Warning!                               G        automatic central locking system engages          Simultaneously depressing the acceler-
                                                and the locking knobs drop down.                  ator pedal and applying the brake re-
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
                                                   !                                              duces engine performance and causes
in order to obtain braking action. This could
                                                                                                  premature brake and drivetrain wear.
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi-       If you hear a warning signal and a mes-
cle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not pre-      sage in the multifunction display ap-
vent this type of loss of control.                 pears when driving off, you have               i
                                                   forgotten to release the parking brake.        You can open a locked door from the
  !                                                                                               inside. Open doors only when condi-
                                                   Release the parking brake.
                                                                                                  tions are safe to do so.
  In order to avoid damaging the trans-
  mission,                                      After a cold start, the automatic transmis-       You can deactivate the automatic lock-
                                                sion shifts at a higher engine revolution.        ing using the control system
      wait for the gear selection process                                                         ( page 162).
      to complete before setting the vehi-      This allows the catalytic converter to reach
      cle in motion.                            its operating temperature faster.
                                                                                               For more information, see “Driving instruc-
      place the gear selector lever in             !                                           tions” ( page 259).
      position R only when the vehicle is          Do not run cold engine at high engine
      stopped.                                     speeds. Running a cold engine at high
                                                   engine speeds may shorten the service
  Release the brake pedal.                         life of the engine.
  Carefully depress the accelerator.




                                                                                                                                      51
Getting started
Driving


Switching on headlamps                         High beam                                     Push combination switch in direction of
                                                                                             arrow 1.
                                               The combination switch is located on the
Low beam headlamps                             left of the steering column.                  The high beam headlamps are switched
                                                                                             on.
The exterior lamp switch is located on the
                                                                                             The high beam headlamp
dashboard to the left of the steering wheel.
                                                                                             indicator A in the tachometer
                                                                                             comes on.
                                                                                          For more information, see “Lighting”
                                                                                          ( page 125).




                                               Combination switch
                                               1 High beam
Exterior lamp switch                           2 High beam flasher
1 Off
2 Low beam headlamps on
   Turn the switch to B.
   The green indicator lamp C in the
   exterior lamp switch comes on.
For more information, see “Exterior lamp
switch” ( page 125).


52
                                                                                                         Getting started
                                                                                                                      Driving


Turn signals                               Press the combination switch up 1 or      The combination switch resets automati-
                                           down 2.                                   cally after major steering wheel move-
The combination switch is located on the                                             ments.
                                           The corresponding turn signal indicator
left of the steering column.
                                           lamp L or K flashes in the in-               i
                                           strument cluster ( page 24).
                                                                                        To signal minor directional changes,
                                                                                        e.g. passing or changing lanes, move
                                                                                        combination switch to point of resis-
                                                                                        tance only and release. The turn signal
                                                                                        flashes three times.




Combination switch
1 Turn signals, right
2 Turn signals, left




                                                                                                                           53
Getting started
Driving


Windshield wipers                          Switching on windshield wipers                !
                                              Turn the combination switch to the de-     Do not leave windshield wipers in inter-
The combination switch is located on the                                                 mittent setting when vehicle is taken to
                                              sired position depending on the inten-
left of the steering column.                                                             an automatic car wash or during wind-
                                              sity of the rain.
                                                                                         shield cleaning. Wipers will operate in
                                              0 Windshield wipers off
                                                                                         the presence of water sprayed on the
                                              I   Intermittent wiping (interval depen-   windshield, and wipers may be dam-
                                                  dent on wetness of windshield)         aged as a result.
                                              II Normal wiper speed                      The switch should not be left in inter-
                                              III Fast wiper speed                       mittent setting as the wipers will wipe
                                                                                         the windshield once every time the en-
                                              i                                          gine is started. Dust that accumulates
                                              Intermittent wiping interval is depen-     on the windshield might scratch the
Combination switch                            dent on wetness of windshield. After       glass and/or damage the wiper blades
                                              the initial wipe, pauses between wipes     when wiping occurs on a dry wind-
1 Single wipe
                                              are automatically controlled by the rain   shield.
2 Switching on windshield wipers
                                              sensor.
   Switch on ignition ( page 34).




54
                                                                                                               Getting started
                                                                                                                            Driving


Intermittent wiping                             !                                            If windshield wipers fail to function at
   Set the wiper switch to position I.          If anything blocks the windshield wip-       all in switch position I,
                                                ers (leaves, snow, etc.), switch them off       set the combination switch to the
   i                                            immediately.                                    next highest wiper speed
   Intermittent wiping is interrupted when          For safety reasons,
   the vehicle is at a standstill and a front                                                   have the windshield wipers
   door is opened.                                       turn off the engine by turning         checked at the nearest authorized
                                                         the SmartKey to position 0 and         Mercedes-Benz Center
Single wipe                                              withdraw SmartKey from starter
                                                         switch
   Press the combination switch briefly in
   direction of arrow 1.                            or

   The windshield wipers wipe one time                   turn off the engine by pressing
   without washer fluid.                                 the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
                                                         button ( page 35) and open
Wiping with windshield washer fluid                      the driver’s door (with the driv-
                                                         er’s door open, starter switch is
   Press switch in the direction of                      in position 0, same as with
   arrow 1 past the resistance point.                    SmartKey removed from starter
   The windshield wiper operates with                    switch)
   washer fluid.                                    before attempting to remove any
For information on filling up the washer            blockage.
reservoir, see “Windshield washer system                 Remove blockage.
and headlamp cleaning system”
( page 282).                                             Turn the windshield wipers on
                                                         again.

                                                                                                                                  55
Getting started
Driving


Problems while driving                       The coolant temperature is above            In case of accident
                                             248°F (120°C)
                                                                                         If the vehicle is leaking gasoline:
The engine runs erratically and misfires     The coolant is too hot and is no longer
                                                                                            Do not start the engine under any cir-
                                             cooling the engine.
   An ignition cable may be damaged.                                                        cumstances.
                                                Stop the vehicle as soon as possible        Notify local fire and/or police authori-
   The engine electronics may not be op-
                                                and turn off the engine. Allow engine       ties.
   erating properly.
                                                and coolant to cool.
   Unburned gasoline may have entered                                                    If the extent of the damage cannot be de-
                                                Check the coolant level and add cool-
   the catalytic converter and damaged it.                                               termined:
                                                ant if necessary ( page 279).
   Give very little gas.                                                                    Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
                                                i                                           Center.
   Have the problem repaired by an au-
   thorized Mercedes-Benz Center as             Excessive coolant temperatures trigger   If no damage can be determined on the
   soon as possible.                            a warning message in the multifunction
                                                display ( page 345).                        major assemblies
                                                                                            fuel system
                                                                                            engine mount:
                                                                                            Start the engine in the usual manner.




56
                                                                                                                   Getting started
                                                                                                              Parking and locking
  Parking and locking
You have now completed your first drive.
You have properly stopped and parked             Warning!                                G        Turn the SmartKey to starter switch
                                                                                                  position 0 and remove, or press
your vehicle. End your drive as follows:                                                          KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button
                                                 Do not park this vehicle in areas where com-
                                                                                                  ( page 35).
                                                 bustible materials such as grass, hay or
 Warning!                               G        leaves can come into contact with the hot        Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with
                                                                                                  KEYLESS-GO* with you and lock vehicle
                                                 exhaust system, as these materials could be
 With the engine not running, there is no                                                         when leaving.
                                                 ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
 power assistance for the brake and the
 steering systems. In this case, it is impor-    To reduce the risk of personal injury as a re-
 tant to keep in mind that a considerably        sult of vehicle movement, before turning off
 higher degree of effort is necessary to brake   the engine and leaving the vehicle always:
 and steer the vehicle.                              Keep right foot on brake pedal.
                                                     Firmly depress parking brake pedal.
                                                     Move the gear selector lever to
                                                     position P.
                                                     Slowly release brake pedal.
                                                     When parked on an incline, turn front
                                                     wheels towards the road curb.




                                                                                                                                        57
Getting started
Parking and locking


Parking brake
                                             Warning!                                G        Warning!                                 G
                                             When leaving the vehicle, always remove the      Getting out of your vehicle with the gear se-
                                             SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*            lector lever not fully engaged in position P is
                                             from the starter switch, take it with you, and   dangerous. Also, when parked on an incline,
                                             lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-    position P alone may not prevent your vehi-
                                             tended in the vehicle, or with access to an      cle from moving, possibly hitting people or
                                             unlocked vehicle. Children could release the     objects.
                                             parking brake and/or move the gear selec-        Always set the parking brake in addition to
                                             tor lever from position P, either of which       shifting to position P ( page 48).
                                             could result in an accident and/or serious
                                             injury.                                          When parked on an incline, turn front wheels
                                                                                              towards the road curb.




1 Parking brake
2 Release handle
   Step firmly on parking brake 1.
   When the engine is running, the indica-
   tor lamp ; (USA only) or
   3 (Canada only) in the instrument
   cluster will be illuminated.




58
                                                                                                             Getting started
                                                                                                        Parking and locking


Switching off headlamps                         i                                         With the driver's door closed, the start-
                                                The SmartKey can only be removed          er switch is now in position 1. With the
   Turn the exterior lamp switch to M                                                     driver’s door opened, the starter switch
                                                from the starter switch with the gear
   ( page 52).                                                                            is set to position 0, same as SmartKey
                                                selector lever in position P.
For more information, see “Exterior lamp                                                  removed from starter switch
switch” ( page 125).                                                                      ( page 34).
                                                Press the seat belt release button
                                                ( page 47).                               Press the seat belt release button
Turning off the engine                                                                    ( page 47).
                                                Allow the retractor to completely re-
   Place the gear selector lever in             wind the seat belt by guiding the latch   Allow the retractor to completely re-
   position P.                                  plate.                                    wind the seat belt by guiding the latch
                                                                                          plate.
   i                                            i
                                                With the SmartKey removed and the         !
   Always set the parking brake in addi-
   tion to shifting to position P.              driver’s door open, a warning sounds if   If you hear a warning signal, you have
                                                the vehicle’s exterior lamps are not      either
   On slopes, turn the front wheels to-         switched off.
   wards the curb.                                                                            forgotten to turn off the lights be-
                                                                                              fore opening the driver’s door
                                             Turning off the engine with
Turning off with the SmartKey                                                                 or
                                             KEYLESS-GO*
   Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch                                                    tried to turn off the engine while the
                                                Place the gear selector lever in
   ( page 34) to position 0 and remove                                                        gear selector lever is not in P.
                                                position P.
   it.                                                                                    Turn off the lights or place the gear se-
                                                Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop but-
   The immobilizer is activated.                                                          lector lever in P.
                                                ton ( page 35) to shut off the engine.



                                                                                                                                59
Getting started
Parking and locking


Locking                                              i                                          Locking with KEYLESS-GO*
                                                     Opening a door causes the windows on
                                                     that side of the car to open slightly.
 Warning!                                G           They will return to the up position when
                                                     the door is closed.
 To prevent possible personal injury, always
 keep hands and fingers away from the door
 openings when closing the doors. Be espe-        Locking with the SmartKey
 cially careful when small children are              After exiting the vehicle press the lock
 around.                                             button ‹ on the SmartKey
 Before closing doors, make sure there is no         ( page 32).
 possibility of someone getting caught in a          All turn signal lamps flash three times.   1 Lock button on the outside door handle
 door during closing.                                The locking knobs on the doors move           After exiting the vehicle, press lock
                                                     down.                                         button 1 on the outside door handle
                                                  For more information, see “SmartKey”             or on the trunk lid ( page 99).
 Warning!                                G        ( page 90).                                      All turn signal lamps flash three times.
 When leaving the vehicle, always remove the                                                       The locking knobs on the doors move
 SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*                                                             down.
 from the starter switch, take it with you, and                                                 For more information, see “SmartKey with
 lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-                                                  KEYLESS-GO*” ( page 94).
 tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
 unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi-
 cle equipment may cause an accident
 and/or serious personal injury.



60
Safety and Security
      Occupant safety
          Panic alarm
Driving safety systems
    Anti-theft systems




                   61
Safety and Security
Occupant safety


In this section you will learn the most im-    The 1 indicator lamp in the instrument       The restraint systems are fully operational
portant facts about the restraint systems      cluster comes on                             if the 1 indicator lamp is not lit when
of the vehicle.                                                                             the engine is running.
                                                  for about four seconds when you turn
The restraint systems are:                        the SmartKey in the starter switch to     A malfunction in the system has been de-
                                                  position 1 or press the KEYLESS-GO*       tected if the 1 indicator lamp:
   Seat belts
                                                  start/stop button ( page 35) once. It
   Emergency tensioning device                                                                 fails to extinguish after approximately
                                                  then goes out briefly, comes on again
                                                                                               four seconds.
   Air bags                                       and remains lit until you start the en-
                                                  gine.                                        does not come on at all.
   Child seats
                                                  for about four seconds when you start        comes on after the engine was started
   Child seat recognition                         the engine by turning the SmartKey or        or while driving.
   Lower anchors and tethers for children         pressing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop       For safety reasons, we strongly recom-
   (LATCH)                                        button.                                   mend that you visit an authorized
As independent systems, their protective                                                    Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to
                                                  i                                         have the system checked.
effects work in conjunction with each oth-        The 1 indicator lamp remains lit if
er.                                               the SmartKey is turned to position 2      For more information, see “Practical hints”
                                                  and left there or the KEYLESS-GO*         ( page 333).
   i
                                                  start/stop button is pressed twice. The
   For information on infants and children
                                                  indicator lamp will go out when you
   traveling with you in the vehicle and re-
                                                  start the engine.
   straint systems for infants and chil-
   dren, see “Children in the vehicle”
   ( page 72).




62
                                                                                                                    Safety and Security
                                                                                                                            Occupant safety


                                               Air bags
Warning!                              G                                                              Warning!                                G
In the event that the 1 indicator lamp          Warning!                                   G         To reduce the risk of injury when the front
comes on during driving or does not come                                                             air bags inflate, it is very important for the
on at all, the SRS self-check has detected a    Air bags are designed to reduce the poten-           driver and front passenger to always be in a
malfunction. For your safety, we strongly       tial of injury and fatality in certain frontal im-   properly seated position and to wear your
recommend that you visit an authorized          pacts (front air bags), side impacts (side           seat belts.
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have        impact air bags and head protection window           For maximum protection in the event of a
the system checked; otherwise the SRS may       curtain air bags) or rollovers (head protec-         collision always be in normal seated position
not be activated when needed in an acci-        tion window curtain air bags). However, no           with your back against the seat backrest.
dent, which could result in serious or fatal    system available today can totally eliminate         Fasten your seat belt and make sure it is
injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and     injuries and fatalities.                             properly positioned on your body.
unnecessarily which could also result in
                                                The activation of the air bags temporarily re-       Since the air bag inflates with considerable
injury.
                                                leases a small amount of dust from the               speed and force, a proper seating and hands
In addition, improper repair work on the SRS    air bags. This dust, however, is neither inju-       on steering wheel position will help to keep
creates a risk of rendering the SRS inopera-    rious to your health, nor does it indicate a         you at a safe distance from the air bag. Oc-
tive or causing unintended air bag deploy-      fire in the vehicle. The dust might cause            cupants who are unbelted, out of position or
ment. Work on the SRS must therefore only       some temporary breathing difficulty for peo-         too close to the air bag can be seriously in-
be performed by qualified technicians. Con-     ple with asthma or other breathing trouble.          jured by an air bag as it inflates with great
tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.        To avoid this, you may wish to get out of the        force in the blink of an eye:
                                                vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. If you
                                                                                                         Sit properly belted in a nearly upright
                                                have any breathing difficulty but cannot get
                                                                                                         position with your back against the seat
                                                out of the vehicle after the air bag inflates,
                                                                                                         backrest.
                                                then get fresh air by opening a window or
                                                door.


                                                                                                                                                 63
Safety and Security
Occupant safety


     Adjust the driver seat as far as possible
     rearward, still permitting proper opera-
                                                     This could result in serious injuries or
                                                     death should the air bag be triggered.
                                                                                                   Warning!                                 G
     tion of vehicle controls. The distance          Always sit nearly upright, properly use       Accident research shows that the safest
     from the center of the driver’s breast-         the seat belts and appropriate size in-
     bone to the center of the air bag cover                                                       place for children in an automobile is in the
                                                     fant or child restraint system.               rear seat. Should you choose to place a child
     on the steering wheel must be at least
     ten in (25 cm) or more. You should be           Children 12 years old and under must          12 years old or under in the front passenger
     able to accomplish this by a combina-           never ride in the front seat, except in a     seat of your vehicle, you must properly use
     tion of adjustments to the seat and             Mercedes-Benz authorized                      a BabySmartTM child restraint which will
     steering wheel. If you have any prob-           BabySmartTM compatible child seat,            turn off the passenger front air bag.
     lems, please see an authorized                  which operates with the BabySmartTM           BabySmartTM will not, however, turn off any
     Mercedes-Benz Center.                           system installed in the vehicle to deacti-
                                                                                                   side impact air bag.
                                                     vate the passenger front air bag when it
     Do not lean with your head or chest                                                           It should be noted that with respect to both
                                                     is properly installed. Otherwise they will
     close to the steering wheel or dash-
                                                     be struck by the air bag when it inflates     front and rear side impact air bags there is a
     board.
                                                     in a crash. If this happens, serious or fa-   possibility for a side air bag related injury if
     Keep hands on the outside of steering           tal injury will result.                       occupants, especially children, are not prop-
     wheel rim. Placing hands and arms in-                                                         erly seated or restrained when next to a side
                                                 Failure to follow these instructions can re-
     side the rim can increase the risk and
                                                 sult in severe injuries to you or other occu-     air bag which needs to deploy rapidly in a
     potential severity of hand/arm injury
                                                 pants.                                            side impact in order to do its job.
     when driver front air bag inflates.
     Adjust the front passenger seat as far as   If you sell your vehicle, it is important that    To help avoid the possibility of injury, please
     possible rearward from the dashboard        you make the buyer aware of this safety in-       follow these guidelines:
     when the seat is occupied.                  formation. Be sure to give the buyer this Op-     (1) Occupants, especially children, should
     Occupants, especially children, should      erator's Manual.                                      never place their bodies or lean their
     never lean their heads in the area of the                                                         heads in the area of the door where the
     door where the side air bag inflates.                                                             side air bag inflates. This could result in


64
                                                                                                         Safety and Security
                                                                                                                 Occupant safety


    serious injuries or death should the side    i                                           We caution you not to rely on the pres-
    air bag be activated.                        Air bags are designed to activate only      ence of the air bags in order to avoid
                                                 in certain frontal (front air bags) im-     wearing your seat belt.
(2) Always sit nearly upright, properly use
                                                 pacts, side impacts (side impact and        Your vehicle was originally equipped
    the seat belts and use an appropriately
                                                 head protection window curtain              with air bags that are designed to acti-
    sized infant or child restraint system for
                                                 air bags) which exceed preset thresh-       vate in certain impacts exceeding a
    all children 12 years old or under.
                                                 olds and in certain rollovers (head pro-    preset threshold to reduce the poten-
(3) Always wear seat belts properly.             tection window curtain air bags). Only      tial and severity of injury. It is important
If you believe that, even with the use of        during these events will they provide       for your safety and that of your passen-
these guidelines, it would be safer for your     their supplemental protection.              gers that you replace deployed air bags
rear seat occupants to have the rear mount-      The driver and passengers should al-        and repair any malfunctioning air bags
ed side air bags deactivated, then deactiva-     ways wear their seat belts. Otherwise it    to make sure the vehicle will continue
tion can be accomplished upon your written       is not possible for air bags to provide     to provide supplemental crash protec-
request to do so at your authorized              their supplemental protection.              tion for occupants.
Mercedes-Benz Center at an additional cost.
                                                 In case of other types of impacts and
Please contact your local authorized
                                                 impacts below air bag deployment
Mercedes-Benz Center or call our Customer
                                                 thresholds, air bags will not be activat-
Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
                                                 ed. The driver and passenger will then
(1-800-367-6372) for details.
                                                 be protected to the extent possible by
                                                 a properly fastened seat belt. A proper-
                                                 ly fastened seat belt is also needed to
                                                 provide the best possible protection in
                                                 a rollover.




                                                                                                                                    65
Safety and Security
Occupant safety


Safety guidelines for the seat belt,
                                                cover, door trim panels, or door frame        Air bag system components will be hot
emergency tensioning device and                                                               after the air bag has inflated. Do not
                                                trims, and installation of additional elec-
air bag                                                                                       touch.
                                                trical/electronic equipment on or near
                                                SRS components and wiring. Keep area          In addition, improper repair work on the
 Warning!                               G       between air bags and occupants free           SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS
                                                from objects (e.g. packages, purses,          inoperative or causing unintended
     Damaged seat belts or belts that were      umbrellas, etc.).                             air bag deployment. Work on the SRS
     highly stressed in an accident must be                                                   must therefore only be performed by
                                                Do not pass belts over sharp edges.           qualified technicians. Contact an autho-
     replaced and their anchoring points
                                                They could tear.                              rized Mercedes-Benz Center.
     must also be checked. Use only belts in-
     stalled or supplied by an authorized       Do not make any modification that could       For your protection and the protection
     Mercedes-Benz Center.                      change the effectiveness of the belts.        of others, when scrapping the air bag
     Air bags and emergency tensioning de-      Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this       unit or emergency tensioning device,
     vices (ETDs) are designed to function on   may severely weaken them. In a crash          our safety instructions must be fol-
     a one-time only basis. An air bag or ETD   they may not be able to provide ade-          lowed. These instructions are available
     that was activated must be replaced.       quate protection.                             from your authorized Mercedes-Benz
                                                Do not hang items such as coat hangers        Center.
     No modifications of any kind may be
     made to any components or wiring of        from the coat hooks or handles over the       Given the considerable deployment
     the SRS. This includes changing or re-     door. These items may turn into projec-       speed and the textile structure of the
     moving any component or part of the        tiles and cause head and other injuries       air bags, there is the possibility of abra-
     SRS, the installation of additional trim   when curtain air bag is deployed.             sions or other injuries resulting from
     material, badges, etc. over the steering   Never place your feet on the instrument       air bag deployment.
     wheel hub, passenger front air bag         panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
                                                keep both feet on the floor in front of the
                                                seat.



66
                                                                                                          Safety and Security
                                                                                                                 Occupant safety


When you sell your vehicle we strongly       Driver and front passenger air bags are de-       !
urge you to give notice to the subsequent    ployed:                                           Do not place objects heavier than
owner that it is equipped with an SRS by                                                       20 lbs (9 kg) on the front passenger
                                                in the event of certain frontal impacts
alerting them to the applicable section in                                                     seat. This could cause the front or side
the Operator’s Manual.                          if impact exceeds a preset deployment
                                                                                               impact air bag on the front passenger
                                                threshold
                                                                                               side to deploy in a crash which exceeds
Front air bags                                  independently of the side impact               the system's deployment threshold.
                                                air bags
                                             The air bags will not deploy in impacts        Side impact air bags
                                             which do not exceed the system’s deploy-
                                             ment thresholds. You will then be protect-
                                             ed by the fastened seat belts.
                                             The passenger front air bag will only be de-
                                             ployed if:
                                                the front passenger seat is occupied
                                                the 58 indicator lamp in the
                                                lower part of the front center console is
                                                not lit ( page 74)
                                                                                            1 Side impact air bags
                                                the impact exceeds a preset deploy-
                                                ment threshold
1 Driver air bag
2 Passenger air bag




                                                                                                                                   67
Safety and Security
Occupant safety


The side impact air bags are deployed:       The side window curtain air bags are de-       Seat belts
                                             ployed:
   in impacts exceeding a preset deploy-
                                                                                            When the engine is started, the seat belt
   ment threshold                               in impacts exceeding a preset deploy-
                                                                                            telltale < illuminates to remind you and
                                                ment threshold
   on the impacted side of the vehicle                                                      your passengers to fasten your seat belts.
   independently of the front air bags          on the impacted side of the vehicle         If the driver’s seat belt is not fastened be-
                                                independently of the front air bags         fore the engine is started, the seat belt
The side impact air bags are not deployed                                                   telltale < illuminates and a warning
in impacts which do not exceed the sys-         in certain vehicle rollovers                chime sounds for approximately six sec-
tem’s deployment threshold.                                                                 onds when the engine is started.
                                             The side window curtain air bags are not
The front passenger side impact air bag      deployed in impacts which do not exceed        The use of seat belts and infant and child
will only deploy if the system senses that   the system’s deployment threshold.             restraint systems is required by law in all
the front passenger seat is occupied.        The window curtain air bags fill up the area   50 states, the District of Columbia, the
                                             between the A and C pillars (see arrows).      U.S. territories and all Canadian provinces.
Window curtain air bags                                                                     Even where this is not the case, all vehicle
                                                                                            occupants should have their seat belts fas-
                                                                                            tened whenever the vehicle is in motion.
                                                                                            For more information, see “Fastening the
                                                                                            seat belts” ( page 45).




1 Window curtain air bag

68
                                                                                                                    Safety and Security
                                                                                                                            Occupant safety


  i
  For information on infants and children
                                                   If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
                                                   can be considerably more severe without
                                                                                                     Warning!                                 G
  traveling with you in the vehicle and re-        your seat belt properly buckled. Without          Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
  straint systems for infants and chil-            your seat belt buckled, you are much more         backrest in an excessively reclined position
  dren, see “Children in the vehicle”              likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be   as this an be dangerous. You could slide un-
  ( page 72).                                      ejected from it. You can be seriously injured     der the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
                                                   or killed.                                        under it, the belt would apply force at the ab-
                                                   In the same crash, the possibility of injury or   domen or neck. That could cause serious or
Warning!                                  G        death is lessened if you are properly wearing     even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and
                                                   your seat belt. Air bags can only protect as      seat belt provide the best restraint when the
Always fasten your seat belt before driving
                                                   they are designed if the occupants are prop-      wearer is in a nearly upright position and the
off. Always make sure your passengers are
                                                   erly wearing their seat belts.                    belt is properly positioned on the body.
properly restrained, even those sitting in the
rear and pregnant women.
Failure to wear and properly fasten and po-                                                          Warning!                                 G
sition your seat belt greatly increases your
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an                                                     Never let more people ride in the vehicle
accident. You and your passengers should                                                             than there are seat belts available. Be sure
always wear seat belts.                                                                              everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly re-
                                                                                                     strained with a separate seat belt. Never use
                                                                                                     a seat belt for more than one person at a
                                                                                                     time.




                                                                                                                                                 69
Safety and Security
Occupant safety



 Warning!                               G        Warning!                                G        rollovers (window curtain air bags and
                                                                                                  ETD).
 Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly    USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY                          Never wear the shoulder belt under your
 stressed in an accident must be replaced                                                         arm, against your neck or off your shoul-
                                                    Seat belts can only work when used
 and their anchoring points must also be                                                          der. In a crash, your body would move
                                                    properly. Never wear seat belts in any
 checked.                                                                                         too far forward. That would increase the
                                                    other way than as described in this sec-
                                                                                                  chance of head and neck injuries. The
 Only use seat belts which have been ap-            tion, as that could result in serious inju-
                                                                                                  belt would also apply too much force to
 proved by Mercedes-Benz.                           ries in case of an accident.
                                                                                                  the ribs or abdomen, which could se-
                                                    Each occupant should wear their seat          verely injure internal organs such as
 Do not make any modifications to the seat
                                                    belt at all times, because seat belts help    your liver or spleen.
 belts. This can lead to unintended activation
                                                    reduce the likelihood of and potential
 or to failure.                                                                                   Never wear belts over rigid or breakable
                                                    severity of injuries in accidents, includ-
                                                                                                  objects in or on your clothing, such as
 Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may        ing rollovers. The integrated restraint
                                                                                                  eyeglasses, pens, keys, etc., as these
 severely weaken them. In a crash, they may         system includes SRS (driver air bag,
                                                                                                  might cause injuries.
 not be able to provide adequate protection.        passenger front air bag, side impact
                                                    air bags, head protection window cur-         Position the lap belt as low as possible
 Have all work carried out only by qualified        tain air bags for side windows), ETD          on your hips and not across the abdo-
 technicians. Contact an authorized                 (seat belt emergency tensioning device),      men. If the belt is positioned across your
 Mercedes-Benz Center.                              and front seat knee bolsters. The sys-        abdomen, it could cause serious injuries
                                                    tem is designed to enhance the protec-        in a crash.
                                                    tion offered to properly belted               Never use a seat belt for more than one
                                                    occupants in certain frontal (front           person at a time. Do not fasten a seat
                                                    air bags and ETD) and side (side impact,      belt around a person and another per-
                                                    window curtain air bags and ETD) im-          son or other objects.
                                                    pacts which exceed preset deployment
                                                    thresholds and in certain


70
                                                                                                                   Safety and Security
                                                                                                                          Occupant safety


                                                      in certain vehicle rollovers
     Belts should not be worn twisted. In a
     crash, you wouldn’t have the full width          if the restraint systems are operational
                                                                                                    Warning!                              G
     of the belt to manage impact forces. The         and functioning correctly, see 1 in-          An emergency tensioning device (ETD) that
     twisted belt against your body could             dicator lamp ( page 62).
     cause injuries.                                                                                was activated must be replaced.

     Pregnant women should also use a                 i                                             When disposing of the emergency tension-
     lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion          The ETDs for the front seats will only        ing device, our safety instructions must be
     should be positioned as low as possible          activate if the respective front seat belt    followed. These are available at your autho-
     on the hips to avoid any possible pres-          is fastened (latch plate properly insert-     rized Mercedes-Benz Center.
     sure on the abdomen.                             ed into buckle).
     Never place your feet on the instrument                                                          !
                                                      The ETDs for the rear outer seats will
     panel, dashboard or on the seat. Always
     keep both feet on the floor in front of the      activate with or without the respective         Do not place objects heavier than
     seat.                                            seat belt fastened.                             20 lbs (9 kg) on the front passenger
                                                                                                      seat. This could cause the front or side
                                                   In an impact, emergency tensioning devic-          impact air bag on the front passenger
Emergency tensioning device (ETD),
                                                   es remove slack from the belts in such a           side to deploy in a crash which exceeds
seat belt force limiter
                                                   way that the seat belts fit more snugly            the system's deployment threshold.
The seat belts for the front and rear outer        against the body. Belt force limiters reduce
seats are equipped with emergency ten-             the force exerted by the seat belts on oc-      Automatic comfort-fit feature seat belt
sioning devices and belt force limiters.           cupants during a crash.                         An automatic comfort-fit feature for front
The ETD is designed to activate in the fol-                                                        seats reduces the retracting force of the
lowing cases:                                                                                      seat belts when they are in normal use.
   in frontal or rear-end impacts exceed-
   ing a preset severity level


                                                                                                                                             71
Safety and Security
Occupant safety


Children in the vehicle                          Infant and child restraint systems                     i
                                                 Use only a BabySmartTM1 compatible child               For more information on child seats
If an infant or child is traveling with you in
                                                 restraint for the front passenger seat in              with mounting fittings for tether an-
the vehicle:
                                                 this vehicle.                                          chorages, see “Installation of infant
   Secure the child using an infant or child                                                            and child restraint systems”
                                                 We recommend all infants and children be
   restraint appropriate to the age and                                                                 ( page 76).
                                                 properly restrained at all times while the
   size of the child.
                                                 vehicle is in motion.                                  For information on LATCH-type child
   Make sure the infant or child is proper-                                                             seat mounts ( page 77).
                                                 All lap-shoulder belts except the driver’s
   ly secured by a belt at all times while
                                                 seat belt have special seat belt retractors
   the vehicle is in motion.
                                                 for secure fastening of child restraints.
Infant and child restraint seats and infor-                                                           Warning!                              G
                                                 To fasten a child restraint, follow child re-
mation on choosing an appropriate re-
                                                 straint instructions for mounting. Then pull         Never release the seat belt buckle while the
straint system can be obtained from any
                                                 the shoulder belt out completely and let it          vehicle is in motion, since the special seat
Mercedes-Benz Center.
                                                 retract. During seat belt retraction, a ratch-       belt retractor will be deactivated.
                                                 eting sound can be heard to indicate that
                                                 the special seat belt retractor is activated.
                                                                                                        !
                                                 The belt is now locked. Push down on child
                                                 restraint to take up any slack.                        The use of infant or child restraints is
                                                                                                        required by law in all 50 states, the Dis-
                                                 To deactivate, release seat belt buckle and            trict of Columbia, the U.S. territories
                                                 let seat belt retract completely. The seat             and all Canadian provinces.
                                                 belt can again be used in the usual man-
                                                 ner.                                                   Infants and small children should be
                                                                                                        seated in an appropriate infant or child
                                                 1   BabySmart TM is a trademark of Siemens Automo-     restraint system properly secured by
                                                     tive Corp.

72
                                                                                                                     Safety and Security
                                                                                                                            Occupant safety


a lap-shoulder belt or, if so equipped, a
child restraint lower anchorage system           Warning!                                  G         Infants and small children should never
                                                                                                     share a seat belt with another occupant.
that complies with U.S. Federal Motor                                                                During an accident, they could be crushed
                                                 Children 12 years old and under must never
Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225                                                                 between the occupant and seat belt.
                                                 ride in the front seat, except in a
and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
                                                 Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM1               Children too big for child restraint systems
Standards 213 and 210.2.
                                                 compatible child seat, which operates with          must ride in back seats using regular seat
A statement by the child restraint man-          BabySmartTM System installed in the vehicle         belts. Position shoulder belt across chest
ufacturer of compliance with this stan-          to deactivate the passenger front air bag           and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster
dard can be found on the instruction             when it is properly installed. Otherwise they       seat may be necessary to achieve proper
label on the restraint and in the instruc-       will be struck by the air bag when it inflates      belt positioning for children from 41 lbs until
tion manual provided with the restraint.         in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal in-   they reach a height where a lap/shoulder
When using any infant or child restraint         jury will result.                                   belt fits properly without a booster.
system, be sure to carefully read and            According to accident statistics, children          A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
follow all manufacturer’s instructions           are safer when properly restrained in the           significantly increased if the child restraints
for installation and use.                        rear seating positions than in the front seat-      are not properly secured in the vehicle and
Please read and observe warning labels           ing positions. Infants and small children           the child is not properly secured in the child
affixed to inside of vehicle and to infant       must ride in back seats and be seated in an         restraint.
or child restraints.                             appropriate infant or child restraint system,       When the child restraint is not in use, re-
                                                 which is properly secured with the vehicle’s        move it from the vehicle or secure it with the
                                                 seat belt and top tether strap, or secured via      seat belt to prevent the child restraint from
                                                 lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in        becoming a projectile in the event of an ac-
                                                 accordance with the child seat manufactur-          cident.
                                                 er’s instructions.
                                             1
                                                 BabySmart TM is a trademark of Siemens Automo-
                                                 tive Corp.

                                                                                                                                                 73
Safety and Security
Occupant safety


                                                    Special BabySmartTM compatible child           Self-test BabySmartTM2 without special
    Do not leave children unattended in the ve-
                                                    seats, designed for use with the               child seat installed
    hicle; even if the children are secured in a
                                                    Mercedes-Benz system and available at
    child restraint system. Unsupervised chil-                                                     After turning the SmartKey in the starter
                                                    any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center are
    dren in a child restraint system may use ve-                                                   switch to position 1 or 2 or pressing the
                                                    required for use with the BabySmartTM
    hicle equipment and cause an accident                                                          KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button
                                                    air bag deactivation system. With the spe-
    and/or serious personal injury.                                                                ( page 35) once or twice, the 58
                                                    cial child seat properly installed, the pas-
                                                                                                   indicator lamp comes on for approximately
                                                    senger front air bag will not deploy.
BabySmartTM1 air bag deactivation                                                                  six seconds and then goes out.
system                                              The 58 indicator lamp 1 located
                                                                                                   If the 58 indicator lamp should not
                                                    on the lower part of the front center con-
The 58 indicator lamp is located on                                                                come on or is continuously lit, the system
                                                    sole will be illuminated, except with the
the lower part of the center console.                                                              is not functioning. You must see an autho-
                                                    SmartKey removed or in starter switch
                                                                                                   rized Mercedes-Benz Center before seat-
                                                    position 0.
                                                                                                   ing any child on the front passenger seat.
                                                       i                                           For more information, see “Practical hints”
                                                       The system does not deactivate the          ( page 334).
                                                       side impact air bag and the emergency
                                                       tensioning device.




1 Indicator lamp

1   BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens Automo-                                                  2   BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens Automo-
    tive Corp.                                                                                         tive Corp.

74
                                                                                                                  Safety and Security
                                                                                                                         Occupant safety



Warning!                                 G        Warning!                               G        Warning!                                 G
The BabySmartTM air bag deactivation sys-         When using a BabySmartTM compatible             Do not place powered-on laptops, cell
tem will ONLY work with a special child seat      child seat on the front passenger seat, the     phones and like electronic devices on the
designed to operate with it. It will not work     passenger front air bag will not deploy only    front passenger seat. Signals from such de-
with child seats which are not BabySmartTM        if the 58 indicator lamp remains il-            vices may interfere with the BabySmartTM
compatible.                                       luminated.                                      system. Such signal interference may cause
Never place anything between seat cushion         Make sure to check the 58 indica-               the 58 indicator lamp not to come
and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces    tor lamp every time you use the special sys-    on during self-test or be continuously lit, in-
the effectiveness of the deactivation sys-        tem child seat. Should the 58                   dicating that the system is not functioning.
tem. The bottom of the child seat must            indicator lamp go out while the restraint is
make full contact with the passenger seat         installed, please check installation. If the
cushion. An incorrectly mounted child seat        58 indicator lamp remains out, do
could cause injuries to the child in case of an   not use the BabySmartTM restraint to trans-
accident, instead of protecting the child.        port children on the front passenger seat un-
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for        til the system has been repaired.
installation of special child seats.




                                                                                                                                              75
Safety and Security
Occupant safety


Installation of infant and child restraint   Head restraint must be positioned such          i
systems                                      that the top tether strap can pass freely       For safety, make sure the hook 2 has
                                             between the head restraint and the top of       attached to the ring 3 beyond the
This vehicle is equipped with tether an-
                                             seat back.                                      safety catch, as illustrated.
chorages for a top tether strap at each of
the rear seating positions.                  Make sure the tether strap is not twisted.
                                                                                          Once the top tether anchorage hook is at-
                                                                                          tached, the child restraint itself can be se-
                                                                                          cured. Tighten the top tether strap
                                                                                          according to the child restraint
                                                                                          manufacturer’s instructions.
                                                                                             Reinstall cover after removing the teth-
                                                                                             er strap.



1 Cover of top anchorage ring                2 Hook
   Remove cover 1 from anchorage ring.       3 Anchorage ring
                                                Securely fasten hook 2, which is part
   Store cover 1 in a convenient place
                                                of the tether strap, to anchorage
   (e.g. glove box).
                                                ring 3.
   Guide tether strap between head re-
   straint and top of seat back.




76
                                                                                                             Safety and Security
                                                                                                                    Occupant safety


Child seat anchors – LATCH type                                                                i
This vehicle is equipped with two LATCH                                                        The child seat must be firmly attached
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)                                                       in the right and left side anchor fittings.
type anchors (at each of the rear seats) for                                                   Non-LATCH type child seats may also
the installation of a LATCH child seat with                                                    be used and can be installed using the
the matching anchor fittings.                                                                  vehicle’s seat belt system. Install child
If you have not installed a child seat, the                                                    seat according to the manufacturer’s
LATCH mounting anchor fittings are cov-                                                        instructions.
ered with an upholstery blend.

                                                                                             Warning!                                 G
                                                                                             Children too big for child restraint systems
                                                                                             must ride in back seats using regular seat
                                               2 Indicates the position of the anchors       belts. Position shoulder belt across chest
                                               3 Anchors                                     and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster
                                                                                             seat may be necessary to achieve proper
                                                  Install child seat according to the man-
                                                                                             belt positioning for children from 41 lbs until
                                                  ufacturer’s instructions.
                                                                                             they reach a height where a lap/shoulder
1 Upholstery blend.                                                                          belt fits properly without a booster.

   Remove upholstery blend 1 and store                                                       Install child seat according to manufactur-
   it in the rear center armrest.                                                            er’s instructions.
                                                                                             The child seat must be firmly attached in the
                                                                                             right and left side anchors 3.



                                                                                                                                         77
Safety and Security
Occupant safety


                                                Blocking of rear window operation
 An incorrectly mounted child seat may come
 loose during an accident which could result
                                                                                               Warning!                                G
                                                The override switch is located on the driv-
 in serious injury or death to the child.                                                      Activate the override switch when children
                                                er’s door.
 Damaged or impact damaged child seats or                                                      are riding in the back seats of the vehicle.
 child seat mounting fittings must be re-                                                      The children may otherwise injure them-
 placed.                                                                                       selves, e.g. by becoming trapped in the win-
 Do not leave children unattended in the ve-                                                   dow opening.
 hicle, even if the children are secured in a                                                  When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
 child restraint system.                                                                       SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
                                                                                               from the starter switch, take it with you, and
                                                                                               lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-
                                                                                               tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
                                                                                               unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi-
                                                1 Override switch                              cle equipment may cause an accident
                                                                                               and/or serious personal injury.
                                                Activating override switch
                                                   Slide override switch 1 to the right.      Deactivating override switch
                                                   A dot becomes visible. The functions in       Slide override switch 1 to the left.
                                                   the rear are disabled.                        The functions in the rear are enabled
                                                   i                                             again.
                                                   Operation of the rear windows with the
                                                   switches located in the driver’s door is
                                                   still possible.


78
                                                                                                      Safety and Security
                                                                                                                  Panic alarm
     Panic alarm
An audible alarm and blinking exterior        i                                           i
lamps will operate for approximately          USA only:                                   Canada only:
2½ minutes.                                   This device complies with Part 15 of        This device complies with RSS-210 of
                                              the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to      Industry Canada. Operation is subject
                                              the following two conditions:               to the following two conditions:
                                                  This device may not cause harmful           This device may not cause interfer-
                                                  interference, and                           ence, and
                                                  this device must accept any inter-          this device must accept any inter-
                                                  ference received, including interfer-       ference received, including interfer-
                                                  ence that may cause undesired               ence that may cause undesired
                                                  operation.                                  operation of the device.
                                              Any unauthorized modification to this       Any unauthorized modification to this
1 Â button
                                              device could void the user’s authority      device could void the user’s authority
                                              to operate the equipment.                   to operate the equipment.
Activating

     Press and hold button 1 for at least
     one second.

Deactivating

     Press button 1 again.
or
     Insert SmartKey in the starter switch.


                                                                                                                               79
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems


In this section you will find information on                                                    ABS
the following driving safety systems:          Warning!                                G
   ABS (Antilock Brake System)                 The following factors increase the risk of ac-    Warning!                            G
   BAS (Brake Assist System)                   cidents:
                                                   Excessive speed, especially in turns          Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm,
   ESP (Electronic Stability Program)
                                                                                                 steady brake pedal pressure instead. Pump-
                                                   Wet and slippery road surfaces
   i                                                                                             ing the brake pedal defeats the purpose of
                                                   Following another vehicle too closely         the ABS and significantly reduces braking
   In winter operation, the maximum ef-
   fectiveness of the ABS, BAS, and the        The ABS, BAS and ESP cannot reduce this           effectiveness.
   ESP is only achieved with winter tires      risk.
   (M+S tires), or snow chains as re-          Always adjust your driving style to the pre-     The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulates
   quired.                                     vailing road and weather conditions.             the brake pressure so that the wheels do
                                                                                                not lock during braking. This allows you to
                                                                                                maintain the ability to steer your vehicle.
                                                                                                The ABS is functional above a speed of ap-
                                                                                                proximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent
                                                                                                of road surface conditions.
                                                                                                On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will re-
                                                                                                spond even to light brake pressure.




80
                                                                                                                   Safety and Security
                                                                                                                 Driving safety systems


The - indicator lamp in the instrument           Emergency brake maneuver                          BAS
cluster ( page 24) comes on when you
                                                    Keep continuous full pressure on the
switch on the ignition ( page 34). It goes                                                         The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in
                                                    brake pedal.
out when the engine is running.                                                                    emergency situations. If you apply the
                                                                                                   brakes very quickly, the BAS automatically
Braking                                           Warning!                                G        provides full brake boost, thereby poten-
                                                                                                   tially reducing the braking distance.
At the instant one of the wheels is about to      The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
lock up, a slight pulsation can be felt in the                                                        Apply continuous full braking pressure
                                                  physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
brake pedal, indicating that the ABS is in                                                            until the emergency braking situation is
                                                  it increase braking or steering efficiency be-
the regulating mode.                                                                                  over.
                                                  yond that afforded by the condition of the
   Keep firm and steady pressure on the           vehicle brakes and tires or the traction af-        The ABS will prevent the wheels from
   brake pedal while experiencing the pul-        forded. The ABS cannot prevent accidents,           locking.
   sation.                                        including those resulting from excessive         When you release the brake pedal, the
                                                  speed in turns, following another vehicle too    brakes function again as normal. The BAS
Continuous steady brake pedal pressure
                                                  closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, atten-    is then deactivated.
yields the advantages provided by the ABS,
                                                  tive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-
namely braking power and the ability to
                                                  dents. The capabilities of an ABS equipped
steer the vehicle.
                                                  vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-        Warning!                                G
The pulsating brake pedal can be an indica-       less or dangerous manner which could jeop-
tion of hazardous road conditions and             ardize the user’s safety or the safety of         If the BAS is malfunctioning, the brake sys-
functions as a reminder to take extra care        others.                                           tem is still functioning normally, but without
while driving.                                                                                      the additional brake boost available that
                                                                                                    BAS would normally provide in an emergen-
                                                 For more information, see “Practical hints”
                                                                                                    cy braking maneuver. Therefore, the braking
                                                 ( page 326).
                                                                                                    distance may increase.


                                                                                                                                               81
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems


                                                  ESP
 Warning!                                G                                                        Warning!                                  G
                                                  The Electronic Stability Program (ESP) is
 The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of       operational as soon as the engine is run-       Never switch off the ESP when you see the
 physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can      ning and monitors the vehicle's traction        ESP warning lamp v flashing in the in-
 it increase braking efficiency beyond that af-   (force of adhesive friction between the         strument cluster. In this case proceed as fol-
 forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes    tires and the road surface) and handling.       lows:
 and tires or the traction afforded. The BAS                                                          While driving off, apply as little throttle
                                                  The ESP recognizes when a wheel is spin-
 cannot prevent accidents, including those                                                            as possible.
                                                  ning or if the vehicle starts to skid. By ap-
 resulting from excessive speed in turns, fol-
                                                  plying brakes to the appropriate wheel and          While driving ease up on the accelera-
 lowing another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
                                                  by limiting the engine output, the ESP              tor.
 planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
                                                  works to stabilize the vehicle. The ESP is          Adapt your speed and driving style to
 driver can prevent accidents. The capabili-
                                                  especially useful while driving off and on          the prevailing road conditions.
 ties of a BAS equipped vehicle must never
                                                  wet or slippery road surfaces. The ESP also     Failure to observe these guidelines could
 be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
                                                  stabilizes the vehicle during braking ma-       cause the vehicle to skid.
 manner which could jeopardize the user’s
                                                  neuvers.
 safety or the safety of others.                                                                  The ESP cannot prevent accidents resulting
                                                  The ESP warning lamp v in the instru-           from excessive speed.
For more information, see the “Practical          ment cluster flashes when the ESP is en-
hints” ( page 326).                               gaged.
                                                  The ESP warning lamp v in the instru-
                                                  ment cluster comes on when you switch on
                                                  the ignition ( page 34). It goes out when
                                                  the engine is running.




82
                                                                                                               Safety and Security
                                                                                                             Driving safety systems


                                                    !                                          Switching off the ESP
Warning!                                G           Because of the ESP’s automatic opera-
The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of
                                                    tion, the engine and ignition must be       Warning!                                G
                                                    shut off (SmartKey in starter switch
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
                                                    position 0 or 1 or KEYLESS-GO               The ESP should not be switched off during
it increase the traction afforded. The ESP
                                                    start/stop button* in position 0 or 1)      normal driving other than in the circum-
cannot prevent accidents, including those
                                                    when                                        stances described below. Disabling of the
resulting from excessive speed in turns, or
                                                        the parking brake is being tested on    system will reduce vehicle stability in stan-
hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and
                                                        a brake test dynamometer                dard driving maneuvers.
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The ca-
pabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must              the vehicle is being towed with the
never be exploited in a reckless or danger-                                                    To improve the vehicle's traction, turn off
                                                        front/rear axle raised
ous manner which could jeopardize the us-                                                      the ESP in driving situations where it would
er’s safety or the safety of others.                Active braking action through the ESP      be advantageous to have the drive wheels
                                                    may otherwise seriously damage the         spin and thus cut into surfaces for better
                                                    brake system.                              grip such as:
  i
  Distronic* is switched off when ESP is                                                          starting out on slippery surfaces and in
                                                 For more information, see “Practical hints”      deep snow in conjunction with snow
  activated.                                     ( page 331).                                     chains

  i                                                                                               in sand or gravel
  The ESP will only function properly if                                                          i
  you use wheels of the recommended
                                                                                                  Distronic* cannot be activated when
  tire size ( page 404).
                                                                                                  the ESP has been deactivated.



                                                                                                                                           83
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems


When you switch off the ESP                  The switch is located on the upper part of
   the ESP does not stabilize the vehicle
                                             the center console.                           Warning!                              G
   the engine output is not limited, which                                                 When the ESP warning lamp v is illumi-
   allows the drive wheels to spin and                                                     nated continuously, the ESP is switched off.
   thus cut into surfaces for better grip                                                  Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail-
   the traction control will still brake a                                                 ing road conditions and to the non-operating
   spinning wheel                                                                          status of the ESP.

   the ESP continues to operate when you
   are braking                                                                               !
                                                                                             Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
   i                                                                                         extended period with the ESP switched
                                             1 ESP on/off
   When the ESP is switched off and one                                                      off. This may cause serious damage to
   or more drive wheels are spinning, the       Press ESP switch 1 until the ESP             the drivetrain which is not covered by
   ESP warning lamp v in the instru-            warning lamp v in the speedometer            the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
   ment cluster flashes. However, the ESP       comes on.
   will then not stabilize the vehicle.         The ESP is deactivated.                   Switching on the ESP
                                                                                             Press ESP switch 1.
                                                                                             The ESP warning lamp v in the in-
                                                                                             strument cluster goes out.
                                                                                             You are now again in normal driving
                                                                                             mode with the ESP switched on.




84
                                                                                                      Safety and Security
                                                                                                          Anti-theft systems
  Anti-theft systems
Immobilizer                               Deactivating                                 Anti-theft alarm system

The immobilizer prevents unauthorized     With the SmartKey                            Once the alarm system has been armed, a
persons from starting your vehicle.                                                    visual and audible alarm is triggered when
                                             Insert the SmartKey in the starter
                                                                                       someone opens:
                                             switch.
Activating
                                                                                          a door
                                             The immobilizer is deactivated.
With the SmartKey                                                                         the trunk
                                          With KEYLESS-GO*                                the hood
   Remove the SmartKey from the starter
   switch.                                   Start the engine by means of the          The alarm will stay on even if the activating
                                             start/stop button ( page 35) on the       element (a door, for example) is immedi-
   The immobilizer is activated.
                                             gear selector lever.                      ately closed.
With KEYLESS-GO*                             The immobilizer is deactivated.           The alarm system will also be triggered
   Turn off the engine by means of the                                                 when
                                             i
   start/stop button ( page 35) on the                                                    someone attempts to raise the vehicle
                                             In case the engine cannot be started
   gear selector lever.
                                             (yet the vehicle’s battery is charged),      the vehicle is opened with the
   Open the driver’s door.                   the system is not operational. Contact       mechanical key
   The immobilizer is activated.             an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
                                             or call                                      someone opens a door from the inside
                                             1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA), or          if the vehicle was locked from the out-
                                             1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).                  side with the SmartKey
                                                                                          someone opens the trunk lid with the
                                                                                          emergency release button



                                                                                                                                85
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems


   i                                          Lock your vehicle.                         Disarming the alarm system
   If the alarm stays on for more than        The turn signal lamps flash three times      Unlock your vehicle.
   30 seconds, a call to the Response         to indicate that the alarm system is ac-
                                                                                           The turn signal lamps flash once to in-
   Center is initiated automatically by the   tivated. The indicator lamp 1 flashes
                                                                                           dicate that the alarm system is deacti-
   by the Tele Aid system ( page 243)         to indicate that the alarm system is
                                                                                           vated.
   provided Tele Aid service was sub-         armed.
   scribed to and properly activated, and                                                  i
   that necessary cellular service and GPS    i
                                                                                           The alarm system will rearm automati-
   coverage are available.                    If the turn signal lamps does not flash      cally again after approximately 40 sec-
                                              three times one of the following ele-        onds if no door was opened.
Arming the alarm system                       ments may not be properly closed:
The indicator lamp located in the central         a door
locking switch in on the upper part of the        the trunk
front center console.
                                                  the hood
                                              Close the respective element and lock
                                              the vehicle again.




1 Indicator lamp

86
                                                                                                             Safety and Security
                                                                                                                 Anti-theft systems


Canceling the alarm                          Tow-away alarm                                   Arming tow-away alarm
To cancel the alarm:                                                                             Lock your vehicle.
                                             Once the tow-away alarm is armed, a visual
                                             and audible alarm will be triggered when            The tow-away alarm is automatically
With the SmartKey
                                             someone attempts to raise the vehicle.              armed after about 30 seconds.
     Insert the SmartKey in the starter
     switch.                                    i                                             Disarming tow-away alarm
                                                The tow-away protection alarm is trig-
or                                                                                            To prevent triggering the tow-away alarm,
                                                gered, for example, if the vehicle is lift-
                                                                                              switch off the tow-away alarm feature be-
     Press the Œ or ‹ button on the             ed on one side.
                                                                                              fore towing the vehicle, or when parking on
     SmartKey.
                                                If the alarm stays on for more than           a surface subject to movement, such as a
     The alarm is canceled.                     30 seconds, a call to the Response            ferry or auto train.
                                                Center is initiated automatically by the
With KEYLESS-GO*                                by the Tele Aid system ( page 243)
     Grasp the outside door handle.             provided Tele Aid service was sub-
                                                scribed to and properly activated, and
     The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must          that necessary cellular service and GPS
     be within 3 ft. (1 m) of the vehicle.      coverage are available.
or
     Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
     button ( page 35).
     The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must
     be inside the vehicle.
     The alarm is canceled.


                                                                                                                                     87
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems


The button is located on the upper part of      Press switch 2.
the front center console.
                                                Indicator lamp 1 in the switch comes
                                                on briefly.
                                                Exit and lock your vehicle with the
                                                SmartKey or (vehicles with
                                                KEYLESS-GO*) the lock button at each
                                                door handle.
                                             The tow-away alarm remains disarmed un-
                                             til you lock your vehicle again.


1 Indicator lamp
2 Tow-away alarm off switch
   Switch off the ignition and remove the
   SmartKey from the starter switch.

   i
   You cannot disarm the tow-away alarm
   if the ignition is switched on.




88
     Controls in detail
   Locking and unlocking
                    Seats
        Memory function
                 Lighting
       Instrument cluster
          Control system
  Automatic transmission
           Good visibility
Automatic climate control
          Power windows
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
         Driving systems
                  Loading
          Useful features




                      89
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking


In the “Controls in detail” section you will   For more information on locking and un-
find detailed information on how to oper-      locking, see “Getting started” ( page 32)
ate the equipment installed in your vehicle.   and ( page 60).
If you are already familiar with the basic
functions of your vehicle, this section will   SmartKey
be of particular interest to you.
                                               Your vehicle comes supplied with two
To quickly familiarize yourself with the ba-
                                               SmartKeys, each with remote control and
sic functions of the vehicle, refer to the
                                               a removable mechanical key.
“Getting started” section of this manual.
The corresponding page numbers are giv-        The locking tabs for the mechanical key
                                                                                               SmartKey with remote controls
en at the beginning of each segment.           portion of the two SmartKeys are a differ-
                                               ent color to help distinguish each              1 ‹ Lock button
                                               SmartKey unit.                                  2 Š Opening button for trunk
                                                                                               3 Locking tab for mechanical key
                                               The SmartKey provides an extended oper-
                                                                                               4 ΠUnlock button
                                               ating range. To prevent theft, however, it is
                                                                                               5 Battery check lamp
                                               advisable to only unlock the vehicle when
                                                                                               6 Â Panic button ( page 79)
                                               you are in close proximity to it.
                                               The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks:
                                                  the doors
                                                  the trunk
                                                  the fuel filler flap




90
                                                                                                           Controls in detail
                                                                                                      Locking and unlocking


                                                i                                           i
Warning!                               G        USA only:                                   Canada only:
                                                This device complies with Part 15 of        This device complies with RSS-210 of
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
                                                the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to      Industry Canada. Operation is subject
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
                                                the following two conditions:               to the following two conditions:
with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with         This device may not cause harmful           This device may not cause interfer-
access to an unlocked vehicle. It is possible       interference, and                           ence, and
for children to open a locked door from the
                                                    this device must accept any inter-          this device must accept any inter-
inside, which could result in an accident
                                                    ference received, including interfer-       ference received, including interfer-
and/or serious personal injury.
                                                    ence that may cause undesired               ence that may cause undesired
                                                    operation.                                  operation of the device.
  !                                             Any unauthorized modification to this       Any unauthorized modification to this
  To prevent possible malfunction, avoid        device could void the user’s authority      device could void the user’s authority
  exposing the SmartKey to high levels of       to operate the equipment.                   to operate the equipment.
  electromagnetic radiation.
                                                                                            i
                                                                                            You can also open ( page 201) and
                                                                                            close ( page 201) the power windows
                                                                                            and tilt/sliding sunroof using the
                                                                                            SmartKey.




                                                                                                                                 91
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking


Factory setting                              Global locking                                 Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
                                                                                            flap
                                                Press button ‹.
Global unlocking
                                                                                               Press button Πonce.
                                                All turn signal lamps flash three times.
   Press button Œ.
                                                The locking knobs in the doors move            All turn signal lamps flash once. The
   All turn signal lamps flash once. The        down. The anti-theft alarm system is           locking knob in the driver's door moves
   locking knobs in the doors move up.          armed.                                         up. The anti-theft alarm system is dis-
   The anti-theft alarm system is dis-                                                         armed.
   armed.                                    Selective setting
The vehicle will lock again automatically    If you frequently travel alone, you may wish   Global unlocking
and reactivate the anti-theft alarm system   to reprogram the SmartKey so that                 Press button Πtwice.
within approximately 40 seconds of un-       pressing Œ only unlocks the driver’s
                                                                                               All turn signal lamps flash once. The
locking if:                                  door and the fuel filler flap.
                                                                                               locking knobs in the doors move up.
   neither door nor trunk is opened             Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹                 The anti-theft alarm system is dis-
                                                simultaneously for about five seconds          armed.
   the SmartKey is not inserted in the
                                                until battery check lamp 5 flashes
   starter switch
                                                twice.                                      Global locking
   the central locking switch is not acti-
   vated                                        The SmartKey will then function as fol-        Press button ‹.
                                                lows:                                          All turn signal lamps flash three times.
                                                                                               The locking knobs in the doors move
                                                                                               down. The anti-theft alarm system is
                                                                                               armed.




92
                                                                                                             Controls in detail
                                                                                                        Locking and unlocking


Restoring to factory setting                    If the SmartKey is malfunctioning, con-    Unlocking and opening the trunk
   Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹               tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-      You can unlock and open the trunk lid sep-
   simultaneously for about six seconds         ter.                                       arately.
   until battery check lamp 5 flashes
                                             Checking the batteries                        A minimum height clearance of 6.3 ft
   twice.
                                                                                           (1.90 m) is required to open the trunk lid.
                                                Press button ‹ or Œ.
   !                                                                                          Press and hold button Š until trunk
   If you can no longer lock or unlock the      Battery check lamp 5 comes on brief-          unlocks and begins to open.
   vehicle with the SmartKey, then either       ly to indicate that the SmartKey batter-
   the batteries in the SmartKey are dis-       ies are in order.                             !
   charged, the SmartKey is malfunction-                                                      The trunk lid swings open upwards au-
                                                !                                             tomatically. Always make sure that
   ing or the vehicle battery is drained.
                                                If battery check lamp 5 does not              there is sufficient overhead clearance.
       Check the batteries in the               comes on briefly during check, then the
       SmartKey and replace them if nec-        SmartKey batteries are discharged.            Vehicles with trunk lid opening/closing
       essary ( page 371).                                                                    system*: To stop the opening proce-
                                                Replace the batteries ( page 371).            dure, press button Š. The trunk lid
       Use the mechanical key to unlock
                                                You can obtain the required batteries         stops moving.
       the driver’s door ( page 367) and
                                                at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
       the trunk ( page 368).
                                                ter.
       Use the mechanical key to lock the
       driver’s door ( page 367).
                                                i
       Have the vehicle battery and the         If the batteries are checked within sig-
       battery connections checked              nal range of the vehicle, pressing the
       ( page 386).                             button ‹ or Œ will lock or unlock
                                                the vehicle accordingly.

                                                                                                                                   93
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking


Loss of SmartKey or mechanical key           SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
If you lose a SmartKey or mechanical key,
                                             Vehicles equipped with KEYLESS-GO come
you should do the following:
                                             with two SmartKeys with KEYLESS-GO,
   Have the SmartKey deactivated by an       each with remote control and a removable
   authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.          mechanical key.
   Report the loss of the SmartKey or the    The locking tabs for the mechanical key
   mechanical key immediately to your        portion of the two SmartKeys with
   car insurance company.                    KEYLESS-GO are a different color to help
   If necessary, have the mechanical lock    distinguish each SmartKey with
                                             KEYLESS-GO unit.                             SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
   replaced.
                                             The KEYLESS-GO function is integrated        1 ‹ Lock button
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center                                                      2 Š Opening button for trunk
will be glad to supply you with a replace-   into the SmartKey. On these vehicles, the
                                             validity of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO     3 Locking tab for mechanical key
ment.                                                                                     4 ΠUnlock button
                                             is checked every time you grasp an outside
                                             door handle.                                 5 Battery check lamp
                                                                                          6 Â Panic button ( page 79)
                                             If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is valid,
                                             your vehicle unlocks:                           i
                                                the doors                                    When the passenger outside door han-
                                                                                             dle is grasped, the vehicle is centrally
                                                the trunk                                    unlocked.
                                                the fuel filler flap




94
                                                                                                           Controls in detail
                                                                                                      Locking and unlocking


                                                i                                           i
Warning!                               G        USA only:                                   Canada only:
                                                This device complies with Part 15 of        This device complies with RSS-210 of
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
                                                the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to      Industry Canada. Operation is subject
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you and
                                                the following two conditions:               to the following two conditions:
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an         This device may not cause harmful           This device may not cause interfer-
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi-         interference, and                           ence, and
cle equipment may cause an accident
                                                    this device must accept any inter-          this device must accept any inter-
and/or serious personal injury.
                                                    ference received, including interfer-       ference received, including interfer-
                                                    ence that may cause undesired               ence that may cause undesired
  !                                                 operation.                                  operation of the device.
  To prevent possible malfunction, avoid        Any unauthorized modification to this       Any unauthorized modification to this
  exposing the SmartKey with                    device could void the user’s authority      device could void the user’s authority
  KEYLESS-GO to high levels of electro-         to operate the equipment.                   to operate the equipment.
  magnetic radiation.
                                                                                            i
                                                                                            You can also open ( page 201) and
                                                                                            close ( page 201) the power windows
                                                                                            and tilt/sliding sunroof using the
                                                                                            SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO.




                                                                                                                                 95
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking


Important notes on using KEYLESS-GO        To lock or unlock the vehicle, the         If you have started the engine with the
                                           SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be           KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
  You can also use the SmartKey with
                                           located outside the vehicle within ap-     ( page 35), you can only turn it off
  KEYLESS-GO like a normal
                                           proximately 3 ft. (1 m) of a door or the   again with this button, even if you have
  SmartKey ( page 90).
                                           trunk lid.                                 put the SmartKey in the starter switch
  You can combine KEYLESS-GO func-                                                    in the meantime.
                                           In order to start the engine with the
  tions with normal SmartKey functions
                                           SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO:                  This does not apply if, after starting, the
  (e.g. unlocking with KEYLESS-GO and
                                                                                      gear selector lever is still in position P
  locking with the ‹ button).                 The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
                                                                                      and the SmartKey is then inserted in
  Always carry the SmartKey with              must be located in the vehicle.
                                                                                      the starter switch. The SmartKey will
  KEYLESS-GO with you.                        All doors must be closed.               then have priority over the
  Never store the SmartKey with               The brake pedal must be firmly de-      KEYLESS-GO function and the vehicle’s
  KEYLESS-GO together with:                   pressed. Do not depress the accel-      electrical system will operate accord-
                                              erator.                                 ing to the position of the SmartKey in
     Electronic items such as a cellular                                              the starter switch, even stopping the
     phone or another SmartKey with                                                   engine.
     KEYLESS-GO
                                                                                      If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is
     Metallic objects such as coins or                                                positioned farther away from the vehi-
     metal foil                                                                       cle, the system may no longer recog-
  Doing so could impair the function of                                               nize the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO.
  the KEYLESS-GO system.                                                              The vehicle then cannot be locked or
                                                                                      the engine started via the KEYLESS-GO
                                                                                      system.




96
                                                                                                           Controls in detail
                                                                                                      Locking and unlocking


If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is re-      Factory setting                                 i
moved from the vehicle while the igni-                                                      The vehicle could inadvertently be un-
tion is switched on (e.g. if passenger      Global unlocking                                locked if the SmartKey with
exits the vehicle with the SmartKey                                                         KEYLESS-GO is within 3 ft. (1 m) of the
                                               Grasp the outside door handle.
with KEYLESS-GO), the message                                                               vehicle and:
                                               All turn signal lamps flash once. The
KEY                                                                                             the outside door handle is splashed
                                               locking knob in the doors move up. The
NOT RECOGNIZED                                                                                  with water, or
                                               anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.
will appear in the multifunction display                                                        you attempt to clean the outside
while driving off.                             i
                                                                                                door handle.
                                               If the vehicle has been parked for more
Find the SmartKey or change its
                                               than 72 hours, you must pull the out-
present location immediately                                                             Global locking
                                               side door handle in order to activate
(e.g. place it on the front passenger
                                               the KEYLESS-GO function.                     Press lock button at outside door han-
seat or insert it in shirt pocket).
                                                                                            dle ( page 60) or trunk lid
Remember that the engine can be             The vehicle will lock again automatically       ( page 99).
started by anyone with a SmartKey           and reactivate the anti-theft alarm system      All turn signal lamps flash three times.
with KEYLESS-GO that is left inside the     within approximately 40 seconds of un-          The locking knobs in the doors move
vehicle. If you leave the SmartKey with     locking if:                                     down. The anti-theft alarm system is
KEYLESS-GO behind when exiting and
                                               neither door nor trunk is opened             armed.
locking the vehicle, the message
KEY                                            the central locking switch is not acti-
STILL IN VEHICLE                               vated.

will appear in the multifunction display.



                                                                                                                                97
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking


Selective setting                              Global unlocking                              Restoring to factory setting
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish      Grasp the outside door handle on the          Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
to reprogram the SmartKey with                    passenger side.                               simultaneously for about six seconds
KEYLESS-GO so when you, grasp the driv-                                                         until battery check lamp 5 flashes
                                                  All turn signal lamps flash once. The
er’s outside door handle only the driver’s                                                      twice.
                                                  locking knobs in the doors move up.
door and the fuel filler flap unlocks.
                                                  The anti-theft alarm system is dis-           !
   Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹                 armed.
                                                                                                If you cannot lock or unlock the vehicle
   simultaneously for about six seconds
                                                                                                with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO,
   until battery check lamp 5 flashes          Global locking
                                                                                                then the battery of the SmartKey with
   twice.                                         Press lock button at outside door han-        KEYLESS-GO is discharged, the
   The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO will              dle ( page 60).                               SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is mal-
   then function as follows:                                                                    functioning or the vehicle battery is
                                                  All turn signal lamps flash three times.
                                                  The locking knobs in the doors move           drained.
Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
                                                  down. The anti-theft alarm system is              Check the battery of the SmartKey
flap
                                                  armed.                                            with KEYLESS-GO and replace them
   Grasp the driver’s outside door handle.                                                          if necessary ( page 371).
                                                  i
   All turn signal lamps flash once. The                                                            Use the mechanical key to unlock
                                                  You can also lock the vehicle using the
   locking knob in the driver's door moves                                                          the driver’s door ( page 367) and
                                                  lock button at trunk lid ( page 99) or,
   up. The anti-theft alarm system is dis-                                                          the trunk ( page 368).
                                                  vehicles with trunk lid opening/closing
   armed.
                                                  system*, KEYLESS-GO locking/closing               Use the mechanical key to lock the
                                                  switch ( page 107).                               driver’s door ( page 367).




98
                                                                                                             Controls in detail
                                                                                                        Locking and unlocking


       Have the vehicle battery and the        i
       battery connections checked             If the battery is checked within signal
       ( page 386).                            range of the vehicle, pressing the
   If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is          button ‹ or Œ will lock or unlock
   malfunctioning, contact an authorized       the vehicle accordingly.
   Mercedes-Benz Center.
                                            Global locking using the lock button at
Checking the battery                        trunk lid
   Press button ‹ or Œ.                        i
                                                                                           1 Vehicle lock button
   Battery check lamp 5 comes on brief-        To prevent a possible inadvertent lock-
   ly to indicate that the SmartKey with       out, the trunk will open automatically if      Press vehicle lock button 1.
   KEYLESS-GO battery is in order.             a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is recog-           All turn signal lamps flash three times.
                                               nized inside the vehicle or in the trunk.      The locking knobs in the doors move
   !
                                                                                              down. The anti-theft alarm system is
   If battery check lamp 5 does not
                                                                                              armed.
   come on briefly during check, the
   SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO battery is                                                        i
   discharged.                                                                                You can also lock the vehicle using the
   Replace the battery ( page 371).                                                           lock button at outside door handle
                                                                                              ( page 60) or, vehicles with trunk lid
   You can obtain the required battery at
                                                                                              opening/closing system*,
   any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
                                                                                              KEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch
                                                                                              ( page 107).



                                                                                                                                  99
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking


Unlocking and opening the trunk               Loss of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
You can unlock and open the trunk sepa-       If you lose your SmartKey with
rately.                                       KEYLESS-GO or mechanical key you
                                              should do the following:
A minimum height clearance of 6.3 ft
(1.90 m) is required to open the trunk lid.      Have the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
   Press and hold button Š until trunk           deactivated by an authorized
   unlocks and begins to open.                   Mercedes-Benz Center.
                                                 Report the loss of the SmartKey with
   !                                             KEYLESS-GO or the mechanical key im-
   The trunk lid swings open upwards au-         mediately to your car insurance com-      1 Locking knob
   tomatically. Always make sure that            pany.                                     2 Inside door handle
   there is sufficient overhead clearance.                                                    Pull on door handle 2.
                                                 Have the mechanical lock replaced if
   Vehicles with trunk lid opening/closing       necessary.                                   If door was locked, locking knob 1 will
   system*: To stop the opening proce-                                                        move up.
                                              Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
   dure, press button Š. The trunk lid
                                              will be glad to supply you with a replace-
   stops moving.                                                                              i
                                              ment.
                                                                                              If you open a door, the side windows on
                                              Opening the doors from the inside               that side of the vehicle will lower slight-
                                                                                              ly. The windows close again when you
                                              You can open a locked door from the in-         close the door.
                                              side. Open door only when conditions are
                                              safe to do so.




100
                                                                                                        Controls in detail
                                                                                                   Locking and unlocking


i                                           Opening the trunk                             !
If the vehicle has previously been                                                        The trunk lid swings open upwards au-
locked from the outside with the            Opening the trunk from the outside            tomatically. Always make sure that
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*, opening a                                                        there is sufficient overhead clearance.
                                            A minimum height clearance of 6.3 ft
door from the inside will trigger the an-                                                 Vehicles with trunk lid opening/closing
                                            (1.90 m) is required to open the trunk lid.
ti-theft alarm system.                                                                    system*: To stop the opening proce-
                                            The trunk lid lock button is located in the   dure, press button Š on the
To cancel the alarm, do one of the fol-
                                            rear license plate recess.                    SmartKey or SmartKey with
lowing:
                                                                                          KEYLESS-GO*.
    Insert the SmartKey in the starter
    switch.
                                                                                          i
    Press button Œ or ‹ on the
    SmartKey.                                                                             The trunk can also be opened using
                                                                                          button Š on the SmartKey or
In vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:                                                             SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* or from
    Grasp the outside door handle.                                                        its inside in an emergency, see “Trunk
                                                                                          lid emergency release” ( page 109).
    The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
    must be within 3 ft. (1 m) of the ve-
    hicle.                                  1 Trunk lid lock

    Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop        In vehicles without KEYLESS-GO*: The ve-
    button ( page 35).                      hicle must be unlocked.

    The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO               Press trunk lid lock 1.
    must be inside the vehicle.                The trunk lid opens.



                                                                                                                           101
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking


Opening the trunk from the inside             !                                         Limiting opening height of trunk lid*
You can open the trunk from the inside if     The trunk lid swings open upwards au-     Vehicles with trunk lid opening/closing
the vehicle is stationary.                    tomatically. Always make sure that        system*:
                                              there is sufficient overhead clearance.
A minimum height clearance of 6.3 ft                                                    The trunk lid opening height can be limited
(1.90 m) is required to open the trunk lid.   Vehicles with trunk lid opening/closing   when transporting goods on a roof rack
                                              system*: To stop the opening proce-       (e.g. presence of an MB sport luggage con-
The switch is located on the driver’s door.
                                              dure, press or pull remote trunk lid      tainer*). When activated, the trunk lid
                                              switch 2.                                 opens to approximately the height of the
                                                                                        roof edge.
                                              i                                            Activate the limiting opening height of
                                              The trunk can also be opened using           trunk lid using the control system
                                              button Š on the SmartKey or                  ( page 163).
                                              SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* or from
                                              its inside in an emergency, see “Trunk
                                              lid emergency release” ( page 109).

1 Indicator lamp
2 Remote trunk lid switch
   Pull remote trunk lid switch 2 until
   trunk begins to open.
   The trunk lid opens. The indicator
   lamp 1 comes on and remains lit until
   the trunk is closed.


102
                                                                                                                Controls in detail
                                                                                                          Locking and unlocking


Closing the trunk
                                             Warning!                               G         Warning!                              G
Closing the trunk from the inside auto-      Maintain sight of trunk area while operating     Only drive with the trunk closed as, among
matically*                                   door mounted switch. Monitor the closing         other dangers such as visibility blockage,
In vehicles with trunk lid opening/closing   procedure carefully to make sure no one is       exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interi-
system* you can close the trunk from the     in danger of being injured.                      or.
inside using the remote trunk lid switch.    To interrupt the closing procedure, release
   Press remote trunk lid switch             the door mounted remote trunk lid switch.       If the trunk lid comes into contact with an
   ( page 102) until the indicator lamp in   Even with the SmartKey or the SmartKey          object while closing (e.g. luggage that has
   the switch goes out and trunk lid is      with KEYLESS-GO* removed from the start-        been piled too high) in the upper motion
   closed.                                   er switch or the SmartKey with                  sequence, the closing procedure is
                                             KEYLESS-GO* removed from the vehicle,           stopped and the trunk reopens slightly.
To interrupt the closing procedure:
                                             the remote trunk lid switch can be operated.
   Release remote trunk lid switch.          Therefore, do not leave children unattended
                                             in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
   i
                                             vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equip-
   You can also close the trunk by hand      ment may cause an accident and/or serious
   ( page 104).                              personal injury.




                                                                                                                                     103
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking


Closing the trunk from the outside                                                            i
manually                                       Warning!                              G        Do not place the SmartKey in the open
                                                                                              trunk. You may lock yourself out.
                                               To prevent possible personal injury, always
                                               keep hands and fingers away from the trunk     Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: To pre-
                                               lid opening when closing the trunk. Be espe-   vent a possible inadvertent lockout, the
                                               cially careful when small children are         trunk lid will open automatically if a
                                               around.                                        SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is recog-
                                               When leaving the vehicle, always remove the    nized inside the vehicle or in the trunk.
                                               SmartKey or the SmartKey with
                                               KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take      i
                                               it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not      If the vehicle was previously centrally
1 Handle                                       leave children unattended in the vehicle, or   locked, the trunk will lock automatical-
                                               with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsu-      ly after closing it. The turn signals flash
   Lower trunk lid by pulling firmly on
                                               pervised use of vehicle equipment may          three times to confirm locking.
   handle 1.
                                               cause an accident and/or serious personal
   Push the trunk lid closed from the out-     injury.
   side with hands placed flat on trunk lid.
The power closing assist automatically en-
sures that the lid is pulled closed com-       Warning!                              G
pletely ( page 110).
                                               Only drive with the trunk closed as, among
                                               other dangers such as visibility blockage,
                                               exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interi-
                                               or.



104
                                                                                                                Controls in detail
                                                                                                           Locking and unlocking


Closing the trunk from the outside                 Press trunk lid closing switch 1 brief-
(vehicles without KEYLESS-GO*)                     ly.                                        Warning!                               G
In vehicles with trunk lid opening/closing         The trunk lid closes.                      Monitor the closing procedure carefully to
system* you can close the trunk separate-                                                     make sure no one is in danger of being in-
ly from the outside using the trunk lid clos-      i
                                                                                              jured. To prevent possible personal injury,
ing switch.                                        You can also close the trunk by hand
                                                                                              always keep hands and fingers away from
                                                   ( page 104).
                                                                                              the trunk opening when closing the trunk.
                                                                                              Be especially careful when small children
                                                If the trunk lid comes into contact with an   are around. To stop the closing procedure,
                                                object while closing (e.g. luggage that has   do one of the following:
                                                been piled too high), the closing procedure
                                                                                                 press trunk lid closing switch 1
                                                is stopped and the trunk reopens slightly.
                                                                                                 press the Š button on the SmartKey
                                                                                                 press the remote trunk lid switch (on the
                                                                                                 driver’s door)
                                                                                              Even with the SmartKey removed from the
1 Trunk lid closing switch                                                                    starter switch, the trunk lid closing switch
                                                                                              can be operated. Therefore, do not leave
                                                                                              children unattended in the vehicle, or with
                                                                                              access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsuper-
                                                                                              vised use of vehicle equipment may cause
                                                                                              an accident and/or serious personal injury.




                                                                                                                                      105
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking


                                                 Closing the trunk from the outside                 i
 Warning!                              G         (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*)                        You can also close the trunk by hand
                                                 In vehicles with trunk lid opening/closing         ( page 104).
 Only drive with the trunk closed as, among
 other dangers such as visibility blockage,      system* you can close the trunk separate-
 exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interi-     ly from the outside using the trunk lid clos-   If the trunk lid comes into contact with an
 or.                                             ing switch.                                     object while closing (e.g. luggage that has
                                                                                                 been piled too high), the closing procedure
                                                                                                 is stopped and the trunk reopens slightly.
   i
   Do not place the SmartKey in the open                                                            i
   trunk. You may lock yourself out.                                                                To prevent a possible inadvertent lock-
                                                                                                    out, the trunk lid will open automatical-
   i                                                                                                ly if a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is
                                                                                                    recognized inside the vehicle or in the
   If the vehicle was previously centrally
                                                                                                    trunk.
   locked, the trunk will lock automatical-
   ly after closing it. The turn signals flash
   three times to confirm locking.               1 Trunk lid closing switch
                                                    Make sure you have the SmartKey with
                                                    KEYLESS-GO with you.
                                                    Press trunk lid closing switch 1 brief-
                                                    ly.
                                                    The trunk lid closes.




106
                                                                                                                  Controls in detail
                                                                                                             Locking and unlocking


                                                                                                Closing the trunk and locking the vehi-
Warning!                               G        Warning!                              G         cle from the outside (vehicles with
                                                                                                KEYLESS-GO*)
Monitor the closing procedure carefully to      Only drive with the trunk closed as, among
make sure no one is in danger of being in-      other dangers such as visibility blockage,      In vehicles with trunk lid opening/closing
jured. To prevent possible personal injury,     exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interi-     system* and KEYLESS-GO, you can close
always keep hands and fingers away from         or.                                             the trunk lid and lock the vehicle simulta-
the trunk opening when closing the trunk.                                                       neously from the outside using the
Be especially careful when small children                                                       KEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch.
                                                  i
are around. To stop the closing procedure,
do one of the following:                          If the vehicle was previously centrally
                                                  locked, the trunk will lock automatical-
    press trunk lid closing switch 1              ly after closing it. The turn signals flash
    press the Š button on the SmartKey            three times to confirm locking.
    with KEYLESS-GO
    press the remote trunk lid switch (on the
    driver’s door)
Even with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
removed from the vehicle, the trunk lid clos-
ing switch can be operated. Therefore, do                                                       1 KEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch
not leave children unattended in the vehicle,                                                      Make sure you have the SmartKey with
or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsu-                                                       KEYLESS-GO with you.
pervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.



                                                                                                                                      107
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking


   Press switch 1 briefly.
   The vehicle is locked and the trunk lid
                                               Warning!                               G        Warning!                              G
   closes automatically. The turn signals      Monitor the closing procedure carefully to      Only drive with the trunk closed as, among
   flash three times to confirm locking.       make sure no one is in danger of being in-      other dangers such as visibility blockage,
   The locking knobs in the doors move         jured. To prevent possible personal injury,     exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interi-
   down. The anti-theft alarm system is        always keep hands and fingers away from         or.
   activated.                                  the trunk opening when closing the trunk.
                                               Be especially careful when small children
   i
                                               are around. To stop the closing procedure,
   You can also close the trunk by hand
                                               do one of the following:
   ( page 104).
                                                   press KEYLESS-GO locking/closing
                                                   switch 1
If the trunk lid comes into contact with an
object while closing (e.g. luggage that has        press the Š button on the SmartKey
been piled too high), the closing procedure        with KEYLESS-GO
is stopped and the trunk reopens slightly.         press the remote trunk lid switch (on the
                                                   driver’s door)
   i                                           Even with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
   To prevent a possible inadvertent lock-     removed from the vehicle, the KEYLESS-GO
   out, the trunk lid will open automatical-   locking/closing switch can be operated.
   ly if a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is         Therefore, do not leave children unattended
   recognized inside the vehicle or in the     in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
   trunk.                                      vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equip-
                                               ment may cause an accident and/or serious
                                               personal injury.


108
                                                                                                         Controls in detail
                                                                                                    Locking and unlocking


Trunk lid emergency release                  i                                            i
                                             The emergency release button unlocks         If the emergency release button is
The emergency release button is located
                                             and opens the trunk while the vehicle is     pressed and the vehicle was centrally
on the inside of the trunk lid.
                                             standing still or in motion.                 locked, the exterior lamps will flash and
                                                                                          the alarm will sound as the trunk lid
                                          Illumination of the emergency release but-      opens:
                                          ton:                                            To cancel the alarm, do one of the fol-
                                             The button will flash for 30 minutes af-     lowing:
                                             ter opening the trunk.                           Insert the SmartKey in the starter
                                             The button will flash for 60 minutes af-         switch.
                                             ter closing the trunk.                           Press button Œ or ‹ on the
                                                                                              SmartKey.
                                             i
1 Emergency release button                   The emergency release button does            In vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
   Briefly press emergency release           not open the trunk lid if the vehicle bat-       Grasp the outside door handle.
   button 1.                                 tery is discharged or disconnected.
                                                                                              The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
   The trunk unlocks and the trunk lid                                                        must be within 3 ft. (1 m) of the ve-
   opens.                                                                                     hicle.
                                                                                              Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
                                                                                              button ( page 35).
                                                                                              The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
                                                                                              must be inside the vehicle.



                                                                                                                             109
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking


Power closing assist for doors and               Power closing assist for doors                  Automatic central locking
trunk lid
                                                    Press the doors gently past the initial
                                                                                                 The doors and the trunk automatically lock
                                                    engage position into the lock.
It is not necessary to slam the door or                                                          when the ignition is switched on and the
trunk lid closed. A pneumatic power-as-             The doors close automatically.               wheels are turning at speeds of approxi-
sisted mechanism draws doors and trunk                                                           mately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more.
lid closed quietly and automatically once
door and trunk lid has been latched. When
                                                  Warning!                              G        You can open a locked door from the in-
                                                                                                 side. Open door only when conditions are
the pneumatic power-assisted mechanism            Only drive with the doors closed. Otherwise,   safe to do so.
has stopped, doors and/or trunk can be            one or more of the doors could open while
re-opened.                                        the vehicle is in motion, putting you and/or      i
                                                  others at risk.                                   The doors unlock automatically after an
 Warning!                               G                                                           accident if the force of the impact ex-
                                                 Power closing assist for trunk lid                 ceeds a preset threshold. The vehicle
 To prevent possible personal injury, always                                                        locks automatically when the ignition is
 keep hands and fingers away from the door          Press the trunk lid gently into its lock.       switched on and the wheels are turning
 or trunk opening when closing a door or the        The trunk closes automatically.                 at vehicle speeds of approximately
 trunk lid. Be especially careful when small                                                        9 mph (15 km/h) or more. You could
                                                                                                    therefore lock yourself out when the
 children are around.
                                                  Warning!                              G           vehicle
 In case of danger, pull the inside or outside
 door handle, or press the trunk lid lock.        Only drive with the trunk closed as, among            is pushed or towed
 To prevent personal injury, never actuate        other dangers such as visibility blockage,            is on a test stand
 the closing assist mechanism by tampering        exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interi-
 with the door or trunk lid latch.                or.
                                                                                                 You can deactivate the automatic locking
                                                                                                 using the control system ( page 162).

110
                                                                                                            Controls in detail
                                                                                                       Locking and unlocking


Locking and unlocking from the inside           The switches are located on the upper part   i
                                                of the front center console.                 You can open a locked door from the
You can lock or unlock the doors and the
                                                                                             inside. Open door only when conditions
trunk from inside using the central locking
                                                                                             are safe to do so.
or unlocking switch. This can be useful, for
example, if you want to lock the vehicle be-                                                 If the vehicle was previously centrally
fore starting to drive.                                                                      locked with the SmartKey or the with
                                                                                             KEYLESS-GO*, it will not unlock using
The fuel filler flap cannot be locked or un-
                                                                                             the central unlocking switch 2.
locked with the central locking or unlock-
ing switch, respectively.                                                                    If the vehicle was previously locked
                                                                                             with the central locking switch 1:
 Warning!                              G        Central locking/unlocking switches
                                                                                                 While in the global remote control
                                                                                                 mode, the vehicle is unlocked com-
 When leaving the vehicle, always remove the    1 Central locking switch                         pletely when a door is opened from
 SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*          2 Central unlocking switch                       the inside.
 from the starter switch, take it with you,                                                      While in the selective remote con-
 take the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with        Locking
                                                                                                 trol mode, only the door opened
 you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave chil-      Press central locking switch 1.               from inside is unlocked.
 dren unattended in the vehicle, or with ac-
                                                   If both doors are closed, the vehicle
 cess to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised
                                                   locks.
 use of vehicle equipment may cause an ac-
 cident and/or serious personal injury.
                                                Unlocking
                                                   Press central unlocking switch 2.
                                                   The vehicle unlocks.

                                                                                                                               111
Controls in detail
Seats


For more information on seat adjustment,                                                        When exiting the vehicle, with the easy-en-
see “Adjusting” ( page 37).                     Warning!                               G        try/exit feature activated and depending
                                                                                                on your selection, the steering wheel tilts
Easy-entry/exit feature                         You must make sure no one can become            upwards and/or the driver’s seat moves a
                                                trapped or injured by the moving steering       few inches to the rear when you:
This feature allows for easier entry into and   wheel and driver’s seat when the easy-en-
                                                try/exit feature is activated.                     remove the SmartKey from the starter
exit from the vehicle.
                                                                                                   switch,
The easy-entry/exit feature can be activat-     To cancel seat/steering wheel movement,
                                                do one of the following:                           or
ed or deactivated in the CONVENIENCE sub-
menu of the control system ( page 164).             Press seat adjustment switch                   open the driver’s door with the
                                                    ( page 38).                                    SmartKey in starter switch position 0
                                                    Move steering column stalk                     or 1 or the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
                                                    ( page 42).                                    button ( page 35) in position 1.
                                                    Press one of the memory position but-
                                                    tons ( page 123).
                                                Do not leave children unattended in the ve-
                                                hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
                                                Children could open the driver’s door and
                                                unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
                                                feature, which could result in an accident
                                                and/or serious personal injury.




112
                                                                                                            Controls in detail
                                                                                                                               Seats


i                                            When entering the vehicle, with the             i
If the current position for the steering     easy-entry/exit feature activated, the          For safety reasons, the driver’s seat will
wheel is in the uppermost tilt position,     steering wheel or, depending on your se-        not return to its last set position with
the steering wheel will no longer be         lection, the steering wheel and driver’s        the easy-entry/exit feature activated if
able to move upward when the                 seat will return to their last set memory po-   the system recognizes the last set posi-
easy-entry/exit feature is activated.        sition or a factory-set maximum forward         tion as an extreme forward position. In-
                                             position when you:                              stead, the driver’s seat will remain at or
If the current seat position falls into a
factory-set position range and the sys-         close the driver’s door with the ignition    move to a factory-set maximum for-
tem recognizes the current seat posi-           switched on                                  ward position. To again fully return the
tion to be rearward enough for easy                                                          driver’s seat to your last set position or
                                                insert the SmartKey into the starter
entry and exit, the driver’s seat will not                                                   to memory position, adjust the seat to
                                                switch or press the KEYLESS-GO*
move to the rear when the easy-entry/                                                        the desired position or press and hold
                                                start/stop button ( page 35) once
exit feature is activated.                                                                   the respective memory position button
                                                with the driver’s door closed.
                                                                                             ( page 123).




                                                                                                                                 113
Controls in detail
Seats


Removing and installing front seat                Front seat head restraints            Removing front seat head restraints
head restraints
                                                                                           Press switch 1 upwards and hold until
                                                                                           the head restraint is fully extended.
For information on head restraint adjust-
ment, see “Seats” ( page 37).                                                              Pull out head restraint.

                                                                                        Installing front seat head restraints
 Warning!                                G
                                                                                           Press switch 1 upwards and hold for
 For your protection, drive only with properly                                             about five seconds.
 positioned head restraints.
                                                                                           Push the head restraint down until it
 Adjust head restraint so that the center of                                               engages.
                                                  1 Head restraint height switch
 the head restraint supports the back of the
                                                                                           Adjust head restraint to desired posi-
 head at eye level. This will reduce the poten-        Switch on ignition ( page 34).
                                                                                           tion ( page 38).
 tial for injury to the head and neck in the      or
 event of an accident or similar situation.
                                                       Open the respective door.
 Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
 head restraints. Head restraints are intend-
 ed to help reduce injuries during an acci-
 dent.


   i
   Tilt the seat backrest to the rear for
   easier removal and installation of the
   head restraints.


114
                                                                                                                 Controls in detail
                                                                                                                                    Seats


Rear seat head restraints                      Switch on ignition ( page 34).                  Placing head restraints upright
                                               Press switch 1 in the front center con-
   i                                           sole briefly.
   The rear head restraints cannot be re-
                                               The rear head restraints will fold back-
   moved.
                                               ward.

Folding head restraints back
                                             Warning!                                 G
The rear seat head restraints and the rear
seat power head restraints* can be folded    For safety reasons, always drive with the
backward for increased visibility.           rear head restraints in the upright position
The switch is located on the upper part of   when the rear seats are occupied.                    Pull the rear head restraint upright until
the front center console.                                                                         it locks into position.
                                             Keep the area around head restraints clear
                                             of articles (e.g. clothing) to not obstruct the      !
                                             folding operation of the head restraints.
                                                                                                  Make sure the head restraints engage
                                                                                                  when placing them upright manually.
                                                                                                  Otherwise, their protective function
                                                                                                  cannot be ensured.




1 Switch in the front center console



                                                                                                                                      115
Controls in detail
Seats


Placing power head restraints* upright       Folding back and placing upright power           Push upper half 1 of switch.
                                             head restraints* with the switch in the
   Switch on ignition ( page 34).                                                             The rear power head restraints will fold
                                             rear center console
                                                                                              upright.
   Press switch 1 in the front center con-
                                             You can fold the rear power head restraints
   sole and hold.                                                                             Push lower half 2 of switch.
                                             backward or upright using the head re-
   The rear head restraints will fold up-    straint folding switch in the rear center        The rear power head restraints will fold
   right.                                    console.                                         backward.

                                                                                            Warning!                                 G
                                                                                            For safety reasons, always drive with the
                                                                                            rear head restraints in the upright position
                                                                                            when the rear seats are occupied.
                                                                                            Keep the area around head restraints clear
                                                                                            of articles (e.g. clothing) to not obstruct the
                                                                                            folding operation of the head restraints.

                                             1 Fold rear head restraint up
                                             2 Fold rear head restraint down               Head restraint tilt

                                                Switch on ignition ( page 34).             You can adjust the angle manually by pull-
                                                                                           ing or pushing the head restraints by hand.




116
                                                                                                              Controls in detail
                                                                                                                                Seats


Lumbar support                               Multicontour backrest*

You can adjust the contour of the seat’s     The multicontour backrest has inflatable
lumbar support to best support your spine.   air cushions built into the seat backrest to
                                             provide additional lumbar and side sup-
The thumbwheels for the driver’s and front
                                             port.
passenger’s seat are located on the outer
side of the seat.                            The seat backrest cushion height and cur-
                                             vature can be continuously varied with
                                             switches on the right side of the seat after
                                             turning the SmartKey in the starter switch
                                             to position 2 or pressing the KEYLESS-GO*      1 Shoulder region support
                                             start/stop button ( page 35) twice.            2 Side bolster adjustment
                                                                                            3 Massage function (PULSE)
                                                                                            4 Lumbar region support
                                                                                               Switch on ignition ( page 34).

                                                                                            Shoulder region support
1 Thumbwheel                                                                                   Press æ or ç on switch 1.
   Switch on ignition ( page 34).                                                              The air cushion inflates or deflates.
   Set the lumbar support between 0
   and 5.




                                                                                                                                  117
Controls in detail
Seats


Lumbar region support                        Side bolsters adjustment                     Massage function (PULSE)
  Press k or j on rocker                        Adjust the side bolsters so that they     You can reduce muscle tension during long
  switch 4.                                     provide good lateral support using        trips by periodically using the massage
                                                switch 2.                                 function.
  This selects the air cushion you wish to
  adjust.                                       i                                            Press button 3.
  Press æ or ç on rocker                        When the engine is turned off, the last      The indicator lamp on button 3 comes
  switch 4.                                     cushion setting is retained in memory,       on. The air cushions in the lumbar re-
                                                and the cushion is automatically ad-         gion inflate and deflate rhythmically.
  The air cushion inflates or deflates.
                                                justed to this setting when the engine
                                                is restarted.                                i
                                                                                             The massage function switches off au-
                                                                                             tomatically after approximately eight
                                                                                             minutes. The indicator lamp extinguish-
                                                                                             es.




118
                                                                                                          Controls in detail
                                                                                                                           Seats


Seat heating                               Switching off seat heating                   Switching off rapid seat heating
                                              Press switch 1 again.                        Press switch 2 again.
Vehicles without seat ventilation*
                                              i                                            !
The switch is located on the door.                                                         If one or both of the lamps on the seat
                                              The seat heating will be automatically
                                              switched off after approximately             heater switch are flashing, there is in-
                                              30 minutes.                                  sufficient voltage available since too
                                                                                           many electrical consumers are turned
                                           Switching on rapid seat heating                 on. The seat heating switches off auto-
                                                                                           matically.
                                              Press switch 2.
                                                                                           The seat heater will switch back on
                                              Both red indicator lamps above the           again automatically as soon as suffi-
                                              switch come on.                              cient voltage is available.
                                              i
1 Normal heating                              The system switches over to normal
2 Rapid heating                               heating mode after approximately
   Switch on ignition ( page 34).             five minutes. Only the right-hand indi-
                                              cator lamp remains lit.
Switching on seat heating
   Press switch 1.
   A red indicator lamp above the switch
   comes on.




                                                                                                                             119
Controls in detail
Seats


Vehicles with seat ventilation*                 Switch on ignition ( page 34).              i
The switch is located on the door. The red                                                  The system switches over to normal
                                             Switching on seat heating                      heating mode after approximately
indicator lamps on the switch show the
heating level selected:                         Press switch 1 twice.                       five minutes. Only the right-hand indi-
                                                                                            cator lamp remains lit.
                                                A red indicator lamp above the switch
Level
                                                comes on.
off      No indicator lamp on                                                            Switching off rapid seat heating
1        One indicator lamp on               Switching off seat heating                     Press switch 1 twice.
2        Two indicator lamps on                 Press switch 1 again.                       !
                                                i                                           If one or both of the lamps on the seat
                                                The seat heating will be automatically      heating switch are flashing, there is in-
                                                switched off after approximately            sufficient voltage available since too
                                                30 minutes.                                 many electrical consumers are turned
                                                                                            on. The seat heating switches off auto-
                                                                                            matically.
                                             Switching on rapid seat heating
                                                                                            The seat heating will switch back on
                                                Press switch 1 once.
                                                                                            again automatically as soon as suffi-
                                                Both indicator lamps above the switch       cient voltage is available.
                                                come on.
1 Seat heating switch




120
                                                                                                         Controls in detail
                                                                                                                            Seats


Seat ventilation*                                                                      Switching off seat ventilation
                                                                                          Press switch 1 repeatedly until all in-
The switch is located on the door. Seat
                                                                                          dicator lamps go out.
ventilation can be activated manually with
the SmartKey in starter switch position 1                                                 i
or 2. The driver’s seat ventilation can be
                                                                                          The seat ventilation for the driver’s seat
activated automatically by the summer
                                                                                          is automatically set to the highest level
opening feature ( page 201).
                                                                                          if activated via summer opening fea-
The blue indicator lamps on the switch                                                    ture ( page 201).
show the ventilation level selected:
                                             1 Seat ventilation switch
                                                                                          !
Level                                           Switch on ignition ( page 34).            If one or all of the lamps on the seat
3       Three indicator lamps on                                                          ventilation switch are flashing, there is
2       Two indicator lamps on               Switching on seat ventilation                insufficient voltage due to too many
                                                Press switch 1.                           electrical consumers being switched
1       One indicator lamp on
                                                                                          on. The seat ventilation switches off au-
off     No indicator lamp on                    Three blue indicator lamps above the
                                                                                          tomatically.
                                                switch come on.
                                                                                          The seat ventilation will switch back on
                                                Continue pressing switch 1 until the
                                                                                          again automatically as soon as suffi-
                                                desired seat ventilation level is
                                                                                          cient voltage is available.
                                                reached.




                                                                                                                              121
Controls in detail
Memory function


  !                                           You can store up to three different settings   The following settings are not key-depen-
  Prior to operating the vehicle, the driv-   per SmartKey or SmartKey with                  dent. They are stored when using the but-
  er should check and adjust the seat         KEYLESS-GO*.                                   tons on the passenger door:
  height, seat position fore and aft, and     The following settings are saved for each         Front passenger seat, backrest and
  seat backrest angle if necessary, to en-    stored position the driver's door:                head restraint position, and settings for
  sure adequate control, reach and com-                                                         multicontour seat*
                                                 Driver’s seat and seat backrest posi-
  fort. The head restraint should also be
                                                 tion
  adjusted for proper height. See also the
  section on air bags ( page 63) for             Settings for multicontour seat*              Warning!                               G
  proper seat positioning.                       Steering wheel position                      Do not activate the memory function while
  In addition, adjust the steering wheel to      Exterior rear view mirror position           driving. Activating the memory function
  ensure adequate control, reach, opera-                                                      while driving could cause the driver to lose
  tion and comfort. Both the inside and          Automatic climate control                    control of the vehicle.
  outside rear view mirrors should be ad-     These key-dependent memory settings
  justed for adequate rear vision.            can be deactivated if desired. For informa-
  Fasten seat belts. Infants and small        tion on key-dependent memory settings,
  children should be seated in a properly     see “Setting key-dependency”
  secured restraint system that complies      ( page 163).
  with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
  Standards 213 and 225 and Canadian
  Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213
  and 210.2.




122
                                                                                                            Controls in detail
                                                                                                              Memory function


The memory button and stored position      Storing positions into memory                 Recalling positions from memory
switch are located on the door.
                                              Adjust the seats, steering wheel and          Press and hold one of the position
                                              exterior mirrors to the desired position      buttons 1 until the seat, steering
                                              ( page 37).                                   wheel and exterior mirrors have fully
                                                                                            moved to the stored positions.
                                              Press memory button 2.
                                              Release memory button 2 and push              i
                                              one of the position buttons 1 within          Releasing the button immediately
                                              three seconds.                                stops movement to the stored posi-
                                              All the settings are stored with the se-      tions.
                                              lected position.
1 Stored position button
2 Memory button                                                                           Warning!                              G
     Switch on ignition ( page 34).                                                       Do not operate the power seats using the
or                                                                                        memory button if the seat backrest is in an
                                                                                          extremely reclined position. Doing so could
     Open the respective door and insert                                                  cause damage to front or rear seats.
     the SmartKey in the starter switch.
                                                                                          First move seat backrest to an upright posi-
                                                                                          tion.




                                                                                                                                 123
Controls in detail
Memory function


Storing exterior rear view mirror park-       The buttons are located on the driver’s    Stop the vehicle.
ing position                                  door.
                                                                                         Switch on ignition ( page 34).
For easier parking, you can adjust the pas-                                              Press button 1.
senger-side exterior rear view mirror so                                                 The passenger-side exterior rear view
that you can see the right rear wheel as                                                 mirror is selected.
soon as you engage reverse gear R.
                                                                                         Adjust the passenger-side exterior rear
For information on activating the parking                                                view mirror with button 2 so that you
position, see “Setting parking position for                                              see the rear wheel and the road curb.
exterior rear view mirror” ( page 165).
                                                                                         Press memory button M.
   i                                                                                     Within three seconds, press bottom of
   You can store a parking position for the   1 Passenger-side exterior rear view mir-   adjustment button 2 on ƒ.
   passenger-side exterior rear view mir-       ror button
   ror for each SmartKey or SmartKey          2 Adjustment button                        The parking position is stored if the
   with KEYLESS-GO*.                          M Memory button                            mirror does not move.

                                                                                         i
                                                                                         If the mirror does move, repeat the
                                                                                         above steps. After the setting is stored,
                                                                                         you can move the mirror again.




124
                                                                                                              Controls in detail
                                                                                                                            Lighting
  Lighting
For information on how to switch on the       Exterior lamp switch                           M Off
headlamps and use the turn signals, see
                                                                                                   Daytime running lamp mode
“Switching on headlamps” ( page 52)           The exterior lamp switch is located on the
                                                                                                   ( page 159)
and “Turn signals” ( page 53).                dashboard to the left of the steering wheel.
                                                                                             U Automatic headlamp mode
   i
                                                                                                   Daytime running lamp mode
   If you drive in countries where vehicles                                                        ( page 159)
   drive on the other side of the road than
   the country in which the vehicle is reg-                                                  C Parking lamps (also side marker
   istered, you must have the headlamps                                                            lamps, tail lamps, license plate
   modified for symmetrical low beams.                                                             lamps, instrument panel lamps)
   Relevant information can be obtained                                                      B Low beam headlamps (or high
   at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-                                                           beam headlamps when the combi-
   ter.                                                                                            nation switch is pushed forward)
                                                                                                   and parking lamps.
                                                                                             ˆ Standing lamps, right (turn left one
                                                                                                   stop)
                                                                                             ‚ Standing lamps, left (turn left two
                                                                                                   stops)
                                                                                             C Indicator lamp for parking lamps
                                                                                             ‡ Indicator lamp for front fog lamps
                                                                                             † Indicator lamp for rear fog lamp



                                                                                                                                 125
Controls in detail
Lighting


   i                                         Automatic headlamp mode
                                                                                             In low ambient lighting conditions, only
   With the SmartKey removed from the        The following lamps switch on and off au-       switch from position U to B with the
   starter switch or the engine turned off   tomatically depending on the brightness of      vehicle at a standstill. Switching from U
   with KEYLESS-GO* and the driver’s         the ambient light:                              to B will briefly switch off the head-
   door open, a warning sounds if the                                                        lamps. Doing so while driving in low ambient
                                                Low beam headlamps
   parking lamps or low beam headlamps                                                       lighting conditions may result in an acci-
   are switched on.                             Tail and parking lamps                       dent.
   The message TURN OFF LIGHTS                  License plate lamps                          The automatic headlamp feature is only an
   appears in the multifunction display.        Side marker lamps.                           aid to the driver. The driver is responsible for
                                                                                             the operation of the vehicle's lights at all
Manual headlamp mode                                                                         times.
                                              Warning!                              G
The low beam headlamps and parking
lamps can be switched on and off with the     If the exterior lamp switch is set to U,         i
exterior lamp switch. For exterior lamp                                                        The front fog lamps and rear fog lamp
                                                  the headlamps may switch off unexpect-
switch, see ( page 125).                                                                       cannot be switched on manually with
                                                  edly when the system senses bright am-
                                                  bient light, for example light from          exterior lamp switch in position U.
                                                  oncoming traffic.                            To activate the fog lamps, turn exterior
                                                                                               lamp switch to position B and pull
                                                  the headlamps will not be automatically
                                                                                               the exterior lamp switch to first or sec-
                                                  switched on under foggy conditions.
                                                                                               ond stop ( page 128).
                                              To minimize risk to you and to others, acti-
                                              vate headlamps by turning exterior lamp
                                              switch to B when driving or when traffic
                                              and/or ambient lighting conditions require
                                              you to do so.


126
                                                                                                             Controls in detail
                                                                                                                           Lighting


  Turn the exterior lamp switch to U.        For nighttime driving you should turn the     USA only
                                             exterior lamp switch to position B to
  With the SmartKey in starter switch po-                                                  By default, the daytime running lamp mode
                                             permit activation of the high beam head-
  sition 1 or the KEYLESS-GO*                                                              is deactivated. Activate the daytime run-
                                             lamps.
  start/stop button pressed once, only                                                     ning lamp mode using the control system,
  the parking lamps will switch on and off                                                 see “Setting daytime running lamp mode
                                             Canada only
  automatically.                                                                           (USA only)” ( page 159).
                                             The daytime running lamp mode is manda-
  When the engine is running, the low                                                      When the engine is running, and you turn
                                             tory and therefore in a constant
  beam headlamps, the tail and parking                                                     the exterior lamp switch to position C
                                             mode.When the engine is running, and you
  lamps, the license plate lamps, and the                                                  or B, the manual headlamp mode has
                                             shift from a driving position to position N
  side marker lamps will switch on and                                                     priority over the daytime running lamp
                                             or P, the low beam headlamps will switch
  off automatically.                                                                       mode.
                                             off with a three-minute delay.
                                                                                           The corresponding exterior lamps switch
Daytime running lamp mode                    When the engine is running, and you           on ( page 373).
  Turn exterior lamp switch to                  turn the exterior lamp switch to
  position M or U.                              position C, the parking lamps              Locator lighting and night security illu-
                                                switch on additionally.                    mination
  When the engine is running, the low
  beam headlamps are switched on. In            turn the exterior lamp switch to           Locator lighting and night security illumi-
  low ambient light conditions, the fol-        position B, the manual headlamp            nation are described in the control system
  lowing lamps will switch on additional-       mode has priority over the daytime run-    section under “Setting locator lighting”
  ly:                                           ning lamp mode.                            ( page 160) and “Setting night security il-
                                                                                           lumination” ( page 160).
     tail and parking lamps                     The corresponding exterior lamps
     license plate lamps                        switch on ( page 373).

     side marker lamps


                                                                                                                                127
Controls in detail
Lighting


Switching on fog lamps                             i                                          Switching on rear fog lamp (driver’s side
                                                   Fog lamps cannot be switched on with       only)
 Warning!                              G           exterior lamp switch in position U.           Switch on the front fog lamps
                                                   For switching on the fog lamps, turn ex-      ( page 128).
 In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions,      terior lamp switch to position B first.
                                                                                                 Pull out exterior lamp switch to second
 only switch from position U to B with
                                                                                                 stop.
 the vehicle at a standstill. Switching from    Switching on front fog lamps
 U to B will briefly switch off the head-                                                        The rear fog lamps are switched on.
                                                   Switch on the low beam headlamps
 lamps. Doing so while driving in low ambient                                                    The yellow indicator lamp † in the
                                                   ( page 52).
 lighting conditions may result in an acci-                                                      lamp switch comes on ( page 125).
 dent.                                             Pull out exterior lamp switch to first
                                                   stop.                                         Push n the exterior lamp switch to first
                                                                                                 stop.
   i                                               The front fog lamps are switched on.
                                                                                                 The rear fog lamps are switched off.
   Fog lamps will operate with the parking         The green indicator lamp ‡ in the
   lamps and/or the low beam headlamps             lamp switch comes on ( page 125).             The green indicator lamp ‡ in the
   on. Fog lamps should only be used in                                                          lamp switch goes out ( page 125).
   conjunction with low beam headlamps.            Push in the exterior lamp switch.
                                                                                                 The front fog lamps remain lit.
   Consult your State or Province Motor            The front fog lamps are switched off.
   Vehicle Regulations regarding permis-
                                                   The green indicator lamp ‡ in the
   sible lamp operation.
                                                   lamp switch goes out ( page 125).




128
                                                                                                         Controls in detail
                                                                                                                        Lighting


Combination switch                         High beam                                    High beam flasher
                                             Turn exterior lamp switch to                  Pull the combination switch briefly in
The combination switch is located on the
                                             position B or to U                            direction 2.
left side of the steering column.
                                             ( page 125).
                                             Push the combination switch in direc-
                                             tion of arrow 1 to switch on the high
                                             beam.
                                             The high beam indicator A on the
                                             instrument cluster comes on
                                             ( page 24).
                                             Pull the combination switch in direction
                                             of arrow 1 to its original position to
1 High beam                                  switch off the high beam.
2 High beam flasher                          The high beam indicator A on the
                                             instrument cluster goes out.




                                                                                                                             129
Controls in detail
Lighting


Hazard warning flasher                        Switching on the hazard warning                  Switching off the hazard warning
                                              flasher                                          flasher
The hazard warning flasher can be
                                                 Press hazard warning flasher switch.             Press hazard warning flasher switch
switched on at all times, even with the
                                                                                                  again.
SmartKey removed from the starter switch         All turn signals will flash.
or with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*                                                             i
removed from the vehicle.                        i
                                                 With the hazard warning flasher acti-            If the hazard warning flasher was acti-
The hazard warning flasher switches on au-                                                        vated automatically, also press hazard
                                                 vated and the combination switch set
tomatically when an airbag deploys.                                                               warning flasher switch 1 to switch off
                                                 for either left or right turn, only the re-
The hazard warning flasher switch is locat-      spective left or right turn signals will         the hazard warning flasher.
ed on the upper part of the front center         operate when the SmartKey in the
console.                                         starter switch is in position 1 or 2 or
                                                 the KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button
                                                 ( page 35) is pressed once or twice.




1 Hazard warning flasher switch




130
                                                                                                             Controls in detail
                                                                                                                           Lighting


Interior lighting                            Automatic control                              Deactivating
                                                                                               Press the ñ symbol on rocker
The controls are located in the overhead     Activating
                                                                                               switch 4.
control panel.
                                                Press rocker switch 4 to the center
                                                                                               The interior lighting remains switched
                                                position.
                                                                                               off in darkness, even when you:
                                                The interior lighting switches on in              unlock the vehicle
                                                darkness when you:
                                                                                                  remove the SmartKey from the
                                                    unlock the vehicle
                                                                                                  starter switch
                                                    remove the SmartKey from the
                                                                                                  open a door
                                                    starter switch
                                                                                                  open the trunk
                                                    open a door
                                                    open the trunk
1 Left reading lamp on/off
2 Rear interior lamps on/off                 The interior lighting switches off automati-
3 Right reading lamp on/off                  cally following an adjustable time delay.
4 Rocker switch for automatic                For more information, see “Setting interior
  control on/off                             lighting delayed shut-off” ( page 161).
   i                                            i
   Leaving an interior light switch in the      If the door remains open, the interior
   ON position for extended periods of          lighting switches off automatically after
   time with the engine turned off could        approximately five minutes.
   result in a discharged battery.



                                                                                                                                131
Controls in detail
Lighting


Manual control                                  Rear interior lighting                     Reading lamps
                                                   Press switch 2 on the ò symbol.         The reading lamps are located in the over-
Front interior lighting
                                                                                           head control panel.
                                                   The rear compartment lighting switch-
   Press the ð symbol on rocker
                                                   es on.                                     Press reading lamp switch 1 or 3 to
   switch 4.
                                                   Press switch 2 on the ò symbol             switch on the desired reading lamp.
   The front interior lighting switches on.        again.                                     Press reading lamp switch 1 or 3
   Press the ñ symbol on rocker                                                               again to switch off the respective read-
                                                   The rear compartment lighting switch-
   switch 4 again.                                                                            ing lamp.
                                                   es off.
   The front interior lighting switches off.
   The automatic control function is acti-
   vated.

   i
   The setting selected for the interior
   lighting is used for the trunk lighting as
   well.
   If the trunk lid remains open, the trunk
   lighting switches off automatically after
   approximately ten minutes.




132
                                                                                                                   Controls in detail
                                                                                                                                   Lighting


Courtesy lighting                                Door entry lamps                               Trunk lighting

For better orientation in the dark, courtesy     For better orientation in the dark, the cor-   The trunk lighting switches on if the trunk
lamps will illuminate the interior of your ve-   responding door entry lamps will switch on     lid is opened.
hicle as follows:                                in darkness when you open a door and the
                                                                                                If you leave the trunk open for an extended
                                                 automatic control is activated.
With parking lamps switched on:                                                                 period of time, the trunk lighting will switch
                                                 The door entry lamps switch off when the       off automatically after approximately
   the door handles
                                                 corresponding door is closed.                  ten minutes.
   the driver and passenger footwells
With the SmartKey in the starter switch
                                                    i
position 1:                                         If you turn the SmartKey in the starter
                                                    switch to position 0 and switch off the
   the door handles                                 exterior headlamps, the door entry
   the center console                               lamps will remain lit for approximately
                                                    five minutes.
   i
   If you turn the SmartKey in the starter
   switch to position 0 and switch off the
   exterior headlamps, the door handle
   lamps will remain lit for approximately
   five minutes.




                                                                                                                                        133
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster


A full view illustration of the instrument   Instrument cluster illumination                  Press knob 1.
cluster can be found in the “At a glance”                                                     The knob will pop out.
section of this manual ( page 24).
                                                                                           To brighten illumination
                                                                                              Turn knob 1 in the instrument cluster
                                                                                              clockwise.
                                                                                              The instrument cluster illumination will
                                                                                              brighten.

                                                                                           To dim illumination

                                             1 Knob for adjusting instrument cluster          Turn knob 1 in the instrument cluster
                                               illumination                                   counterclockwise.
1 Reset button J
                                             Use knob 1 to adjust the illumination            The instrument cluster illumination will
The instrument cluster is activated when                                                      dim.
                                             brightness for the instrument cluster.
you:
   open a door                                  i
                                                The instrument cluster illumination is
   turn on the ignition
                                                dimmed or brightened automatically to
   press the reset button J 1                   suit ambient light conditions.
   switch on the exterior lamps                 The instrument cluster illumination will
You can change the instrument cluster set-      also be adjusted automatically when
tings in the Instrument cluster submenu of      you switch on the vehicle’s exterior
the control system ( page 157).                 lamps.


134
                                                                                                               Controls in detail
                                                                                                               Instrument cluster


Coolant temperature gauge                         i                                           Trip odometer
                                                  Excessive coolant temperature triggers
                                                                                                Make sure you are viewing the trip
                                                  a warning in the multifunction display
 Warning!                              G          ( page 345).
                                                                                                odometer display.
                                                                                                If it is not displayed, press the è or
    Driving when your engine is badly over-
                                               During severe operating conditions,              ÿ button on the multifunction
    heated can cause some fluids which
    may have leaked into the engine com-       e.g. stop-and-go traffic, the coolant tem-       steering wheel repeatedly until the trip
    partment to catch fire. You could be se-   perature may rise close to 248° F (120°C),       odometer appears ( page 137).
    riously burned.                            i.e. close to the red zone of the coolant        Press and hold reset button J in the
    Steam from an overheated engine can        temperature gauge.                               instrument cluster ( page 134) until
    cause serious burns and can occur just     The engine should not be operated with           the trip odometer is reset.
    by opening the hood. Stay away from        the coolant temperature above 248° F
    the engine if you see or hear steam com-
                                               (120°C), i.e. in the red zone of the coolant
    ing from it.
                                               temperature gauge. Doing so may cause
 Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle   serious engine damage which is not cov-
 and do not stand near the vehicle until the   ered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited War-
 engine has cooled down.                       ranty.




                                                                                                                                  135
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster


Tachometer                                    Outside temperature indicator                      ature can only be verified by comparison to
                                                                                                 a thermometer placed next to the sensor,
The red marking on the tachometer de-                                                            not by comparison to external displays
notes excessive engine speed.                  Warning!                                 G        (e.g. bank signs, etc.).
   !                                                                                             When moving the vehicle into colder ambi-
                                               The outside temperature indicator is not de-
   Avoid driving at excessive engine                                                             ent temperatures (e.g. when leaving your
                                               signed to serve as an ice-warning device and
   speeds, as it may result in serious en-                                                       garage), you will notice a delay before the
                                               is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
   gine damage that is not covered by the                                                        lower temperature is displayed.
                                               Indicated temperatures just above the freez-
   Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.             ing point do not guarantee that the road sur-     A delay also occurs when ambient temper-
                                               face is free of ice. The road may still be icy,   atures rise. This prevents inaccurate tem-
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply    especially in wooded areas or on bridges.         perature indications caused by heat
is interrupted if the engine is operated                                                         radiated from the engine during idling or
within the red marking.                                                                          slow driving.
                                              The outside temperature is displayed in
                                              the instrument cluster ( page 24). For in-         Clock
CL 55 AMG and CL 65 AMG
                                              formation on how to select the unit of the
The tachometer of the CL 55 AMG and           displayed temperature, i.e. degrees                The time is indicated in the instrument
CL 65 AMG does not have a red marking         Celsius (°C) or degrees Fahrenheit (°F),           cluster in the tachometer display.
denoting excessive engine speed.              see “Selecting temperature display mode”
                                              ( page 157).                                       You can adjust the clock using the
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply                                                      COMAND system. Refer to separate
is interrupted if the engine is operated at   The temperature sensor is located in the           COMAND operating instructions.
an excessive engine speed.                    front bumper area. Due to its location, the
                                              sensor can be affected by road or engine
                                              heat during idling or slow driving. There-
                                              fore, the accuracy of the displayed temper-


136
                                                                                                              Controls in detail
                                                                                                                  Control system
  Control system
The control system is activated as soon as                                                    Multifunction display
the SmartKey in the starter switch is         Warning!                               G
turned to position 1 or as soon as the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button                  A driver’s attention to the road and traffic
( page 35) is in position 1. The control      conditions must always be his/her primary
system enables you to:                        focus when driving.

   call up information about your vehicle     For your safety and the safety of others, se-
                                              lecting features through the multifunction
   change vehicle settings                    steering wheel should only be done by the       1 Trip odometer
For example, you can use the control sys-     driver when traffic and road conditions per-    2 Main odometer
tem to find out when your vehicle is next     mit it to be done safely.
due for service, to set the language for      Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
messages in the instrument cluster dis-       (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
play, and much more.                          covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate-
                                              ly 14 m) every second.
   i
   The displays for the audio systems (ra-
                                             The control system relays information to
   dio, CD player) will appear in English,
                                             the multifunction display.
   regardless of the language selected.




                                                                                                                            137
Controls in detail
Control system


Multifunction steering wheel                  1 Multifunction display in the speed-
                                                ometer
The displays in the multifunction display
and the settings in the control system are        Operating the control system
controlled by the buttons on the multifunc-   2 Selecting the submenu or setting
tion steering wheel.                            the volume
                                                  æ up/to increase
                                                  ç down/to decrease
                                              3 Telephone*
                                                  s to take a call
                                                  t to end a call
                                              4 Menu systems
                                                  è for next menu
                                                  ÿ for previous menu
                                              5 Moving within a menu
                                                  j for next display
                                                  k for previous display




138
                                                                                                                Controls in detail
                                                                                                                    Control system


Pressing any of the buttons on the multi-      It is helpful to think of the menus, and the   In the SETTINGS menu, instead of functions
function steering wheel will alter what is     functions within each menu, as being ar-       you will find a number of submenus for
shown in the multifunction display.            ranged in a circular pattern.                  calling up and changing settings. For in-
                                                                                              structions on using these submenus, see
The information available in the multifunc-       If you press button è or ÿ
                                                                                              “Settings menu” ( page 154).
tion display is arranged in menus, each           repeatedly, you will pass through each
containing a number of functions or sub-          menu one after the other.                   The number of menus available in the sys-
menus.                                                                                        tem depends on which optional equipment
                                                  If you press button j or k
                                                                                              is installed in your vehicle.
The individual functions are then found           repeatedly, you will pass through each
within the relevant menu (radio or CD op-         function display, one after the other, in   The menus are described on the following
erations under AUDIO, for example). These         the current menu.                           pages.
functions serve to call up relevant informa-
tion or to customize the settings for your
vehicle.




                                                                                                                                  139
Controls in detail
Control system


Menus                This is what you will see when you scroll   The table on the next page provides an
                     through the menus.                          overview of the individual menus.




140
                                                                                                                             Controls in detail
                                                                                                                                 Control system


Menus, submenus and functions

                    Menu 1           Menu 2          Menu 3        Menu 4        Menu 5         Menu 6            Menu 7              Menu 8
                    Standard dis- AUDIO              Telephone* NAVI             Distronic*     Trip computer Vehicle status Settings
                    play                                                                                      message memory
                    ( page 142)      ( page 142)     ( page 147) ( page 149) ( page 150) ( page 151)              ( page 153)         ( page 154)
                    Call up mainte- Select radio     Load phone    Activate      Call up set-   Fuel consump-     Call up vehicle mal- Reset to fac-
                    nance service station            book          route guid-   tings          tion statistics   function, warning tory settings
                    display                                        ance                         after start       and system status
                                                                                                                  messages stored in
                                                                                                                  memory
Commands/submenus




                    Check tire in-   Select satellite Search for                                Fuel consump-                         Instrument
                    flation pres-    radio station* name in                                     tion statistics                       cluster
                    sure*            (USA only)       phone book                                since the last                        submenu
                                                                                                reset
                    Check engine     Select CD       Select                                     Call up range                         Lighting
                    oil level        track           number last                                                                      submenu
                                                     dialed
                    Digital speed-   Select MP3-CD                                                                                    Vehicle
                    ometer           track                                                                                            submenu
                                                                                                                                      Convenience
                                                                                                                                      submenu



                                                                                                                                                 141
Controls in detail
Control system


  i                                        Standard display menu                        AUDIO menu
  The headings used in the menus table
                                           You can select the functions in the stan-    The functions in the AUDIO menu operate
  are designed to facilitate navigation
                                           dard display menu with button j              the audio equipment which you currently
  within the system and are not neces-
                                           or k.                                        have turned on.
  sarily identical to those shown in the
  control system displays.                 The following functions are available:       If no audio equipment is currently turned
                                                                                        on, the message AUDIO OFF is shown in the
  The first function displayed in each     Function                       Page
                                                                                        multifunction display.
  menu will automatically show you
                                           Call up maintenance service 316
  which part of the system you are in.                                                  The following functions are available:
                                           display
                                           Check tire inflation pres-     294           Function                       Page
                                           sure*                                        Select radio station           143
                                           Check engine oil level         275           Select satellite radio* station 143
                                           Call up digital speedometer    142           (USA only)
                                                                                        Select CD track                144
                                           Display digital speedometer                  Select MP3-CD track            144
                                              Press the j or k button repeat-
                                              edly until you see the digital speedom-
                                              eter appear in the multifunction
                                              display.
                                              The current vehicle speed is shown in
                                              the multifunction display.




142
                                                                                                             Controls in detail
                                                                                                                  Control system


Select radio station                          Select satellite radio* station                 i
                                              (USA only)                                      Additional optional satellite radio
   Turn on the radio. Refer to the separate
   COMAND operating instructions.             The satellite radio is treated as a radio ap-   equipment and a subscription to satel-
                                              plication.                                      lite radio service provider are required
   Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
                                                                                              for satellite radio operation. Contact an
   until you see the currently tuned sta-        Select satellite radio with the corre-
                                                                                              authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
   tion in the multifunction display.            sponding key on the COMAND control
                                                                                              details and availability for your vehicle.
                                                 panel (SAT).
                                                                                              For more information, refer to separate
                                                 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
                                                                                              COMAND operating instructions.
                                                 until you see the currently tuned sta-
                                                 tion in the multifunction display.


1 Waveband
2 Station frequency
   Press button j or k repeatedly
   until the desired station is found.
                                              1 SAT mode and preset number
   i                                          2 Channel name or number
   You can only store new stations using
                                                 Press button k or j repeatedly
   the corresponding feature on the radio.
                                                 until the desired channel is found.
   Refer to separate COMAND operating
   instructions.
   You can also operate the radio in the
   usual manner.

                                                                                                                                  143
Controls in detail
Control system


Select CD track                              i                                      Select MP3-CD track
   Turn on COMAND and select CD. Refer       CD changer: To select a CD from the       Turn on COMAND and select MP3-CD.
   to separate COMAND operating in-          magazine, press a number on the           Refer to separate COMAND operating
   structions.                               COMAND system key pad located in          instructions.
                                             the center dashboard.
   Press button è or ÿ repeatedly                                                      Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
   until the settings for the CD currently                                             until the settings for the MP3-CD cur-
   being played appear in the multifunc-     Press button j or k repeatedly            rently being played in the multifunction
   tion display.                             until the desired track is selected.      display.




1 Current CD,                                                                       1 Current track
  for CD changer ( page 145)
                                                                                       Press button j or k repeatedly
2 Current track
                                                                                       until the desired track is selected.




144
                                                                                                            Controls in detail
                                                                                                                 Control system


CD changer operating mode                    Clean CDs from time to time with a com-          !
                                             mercially available cleaning cloth. No sol-      Your CD drive has been designed to
                                             vents, anti-static sprays, etc. should be        play CDs which correspond to the IEC
General notes
                                             used for cleaning. Replace the CD in its         60908 standard.
Should excessively high temperatures oc-     case after use. Protect CDs from heat and
cur while in CD mode, CD TEMP HIGH will      direct sunlight.                                 If you insert thicker data carriers,
appear on the multifunction display and                                                       e.g. ones that have data on both sides
muting will take place. The unit will then                                                    (one side with DVD data, the other side
switch back to the last operating mode                                                        with audio data), they cannot be eject-
used until the temperature has decreased                                                      ed and will damage the drive.
to a safe operating level.
                                             Only use CDs, which bear the label shown      For information on operating the CD
Should excessively low temperatures oc-
                                             and that conform to the compact disc dig-     changer, refer to separate COMAND oper-
cur while in CD mode, CD TEMP LOW will ap-
                                             ital audio standard (IEC 60908).              ating instructions.
pear on the multifunction display, but the
CD will continue to play.                    Use of CDs which do not meet this stan-
Handle CDs carefully to prevent interfer-    dard may cause damage to the CD chang-
ence during playback. Avoid fingerprints     er. Do not play single-CDs (80 mm) with an
and dust on CDs. Do not write on CDs or      adapter.
apply any label or other material to them.
Only use original CDs. Using copied CDs
may create problems during playback.




                                                                                                                               145
Controls in detail
Control system


                                                  Loading/unloading the CD magazine           Remove the magazine and completely
 Warning!                                G        The CD changer is located behind the cov-
                                                                                              pull out the CD tray.

 The CD changer is a Class 1 laser product.       er on the left hand side in the trunk.      Place the CD in the recess of the tray,
 There is a danger of invisible laser radiation                                               label side up.
                                                     Remove the CD changer cover.
 if the cover is opened or damaged.                                                           Push the tray into the magazine in the
                                                     Slide the CD changer door to the right
 Do not remove the cover. The CD changer                                                      direction shown by the arrow.
                                                     and press the eject button 3.
 does not contain any parts which can be ser-
 viced by the user. For safety reasons, have         The magazine is ejected.                 i
 any service work which may be necessary                                                      CDs which have been inserted improp-
 performed only by qualified personnel.                                                       erly or are unreadable will not be
                                                                                              played.
Operational readiness of CD changer
                                                                                              Push the magazine into the CD changer
If a CD changer has been installed in the
                                                                                              in the direction shown by the arrow and
system, it can be operated from the
                                                                                              close the CD changer door.
COMAND system key pad located in the
center dashboard. A loaded magazine
must be installed for CD playing.
                                                  1 CD
                                                  2 CD changer
                                                  3 CD tray
                                                  4 CD magazine




146
                                                                                                                       Controls in detail
                                                                                                                            Control system


TEL menu*                                                                                            Which messages will appear in the multi-
                                                   Never operate radio transmitters equipped
                                                                                                     function display field depends on whether
                                                   with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-
                                                                                                     your telephone is switched on or off:
 Warning!                                G         out being connected to an external antenna)
                                                   from inside the vehicle while the engine is          If the telephone is off, the message in
                                                   running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-           the multifunction display is: TEL OFF.
 A driver’s attention to the road and traffic
                                                   tion of the vehicle’s electronic system, pos-
 conditions must always be his/her primary                                                              If the telephone is on:
                                                   sibly resulting in an accident and/or
 focus when driving. For your safety and the
                                                   personal injury.                                     The telephone will then search for a
 safety of others, we recommend that you
                                                                                                        network. During this time the multi-
 pull over to a safe location and stop before
                                                  You can use the functions in the TEL menu             function display reads NO SERVICE.
 making or taking a telephone call. If you
 choose to use the telephone while driving,       to operate your telephone, provided it is             As soon as the telephone has found a
 please use the hands-free device and only        connected to a hands-free system and                  network, READY is indicated in the mul-
 use the telephone when weather, road and         switched on.                                          tifunction display.
 traffic conditions permit.                          Switch on the telephone and COMAND.
 Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from         Press button è or ÿ on the
 using a cellular telephone while driving a ve-      steering wheel repeatedly until you see
 hicle.                                              the TEL menu in the multifunction dis-
 Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph         play.
 (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
 covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate-                                                        The standby message indicates that your
 ly 14 m) every second.                                                                              telephone is ready for use and you can op-
                                                                                                     erate it using the control system.




                                                                                                                                          147
Controls in detail
Control system


The following functions are available:            i                                           can take up to 60 seconds. In the mul-
                                                  If you do not wish to accept a call,        tifunction display you will see the mes-
Function                        Page                                                          sage PLEASE WAIT!.
                                                  press button t.
Answering a call                148
                                                                                              When the message PLEASE WAIT! dis-
Ending a call                   148            Ending a call                                  appears, the phone book has been
Dialing a number from the       148                                                           loaded.
                                                  Press button t.
phone book                                                                                    Press button j or k repeatedly
                                                  You have ended the call. In the multi-
Redialing                       149                                                           until the desired name appears in the
                                                  function display you will again see the
                                                                                              multifunction display.
                                                  standby message.
Answering a call                                                                              The stored names are displayed in as-
When your telephone is ready to receive        Dialing a number from the phone book           cending or descending alphabetical or-
calls, you can answer a call at any time. In                                                  der.
                                               If your telephone is ready to receive calls,
the multifunction display you will then see    you may select and dial a number from the
the message:
                                                                                              i
                                               phone book at any time.
                                                                                              If you press and hold j or k for
                                                  Press button ÿ or è repeatedly              longer than one second, the system
                                                  until you see the TEL menu in the mul-      scrolls rapidly through the list of names
                                                  tifunction display.                         until you release the button again.
                                                  Press button j or k.                        Cancel the quick search mode by
                                                  The control system reads the phone          pressing t.
   Press button s.                                book which is stored in the telephone.
   You have answered the call. In the mul-        The transmission depends on the num-
   tifunction display you see the length of       ber of entries in the phone book and
   the call positioned above the number.

148
                                                                                                          Controls in detail
                                                                                                               Control system


Press button s.                           Redialing                                     NAVI menu
The system dials the selected phone       The control system stores the most recent-
                                                                                        In the NAVI menu, you will see the naviga-
number.                                   ly dialed phone numbers. This eliminates
                                                                                        tion system’s status.
                                          the need to search through your entire
   If the connection is successful, the
                                          phone book.                                      Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
   name of the party you called and
                                                                                           until you see the message NAVI in the
   the duration of the call will appear      Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
                                                                                           multifunction display.
   in the multifunction display.             until you see the TEL menu in the mul-
                                             tifunction display.                           If the navigation system is switched off,
                                                                                           the message NAVI OFF is shown in the
                                             Press button s.
                                                                                           multifunction display.
                                             In the multifunction display you see the
                                                                                           If the navigation system is on and no
                                             first number in the redial memory.
                                                                                           destination has been entered, you will
                                             Press button j or k repeatedly                see the current direction in which the
   If no connection is made, the con-        until the desired name appears in the         vehicle is moving and the names of
   trol system stores the dialed num-        multifunction display.                        streets in the multifunction display.
   ber in the redial memory.                                                            Please refer to separate COMAND operat-
                                             i
                                                                                        ing instructions on how to activate the
                                             If you do not want to use the telephone,
                                                                                        route guidance system.
                                             press button t.

                                             Press button s.
                                             The control system dials the selected
                                             phone number.



                                                                                                                              149
Controls in detail
Control system


Distronic* menu                               Distronic deactivated                        Distronic activated
                                              When Distronic is deactivated you will see   When you activate Distronic, you will see
Use the Distronic menu to display the
                                              the standard display.                        the set speed for about five seconds in the
current settings for your Distronic system.
                                                                                           Distronic display. The following display
What information is shown in the multi-
                                                                                           then appears:
function display depends on whether the
Distronic system is active or inactive.
Please refer to the “Driving systems” sec-
tion of this manual ( page 209) for in-
structions on how to activate Distronic.
                                              1 Vehicle ahead, if detected
   Press button è or ÿ repeatedly             2 Actual distance to vehicle ahead
   until you see one of the following two     3 Preset distance threshold to vehicle       1 Distronic activated
   pictures in the multifunction display.       ahead
                                              4 Symbol for activated distance warning
                                                function
                                              5 Your vehicle




150
                                                                                                               Controls in detail
                                                                                                                    Control system


Trip computer menu                             Fuel consumption statistics after start       Incorporating statistics from the previ-
                                                                                             ous journey in the consumption statis-
                                                  Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
Use the trip computer menu to call up sta-                                                   tics
                                                  until you see the first function of the
tistical data on your vehicle. The following
                                                  Trip computer menu.                        When you restart the engine, the
information is available:
                                                                                             AFTER START display flashes for:
                                                  Press button j or k repeatedly
Function                           Page           until you see this message in the multi-      a distance of approximately 1.25 miles
Fuel consumption statistics after 151             function display: AFTER START.                (two kilometers)
start
                                                  i                                             or
Fuel consumption statistics        152
                                                  Each time you call up the trip comput-        a duration of two minutes
since last reset
                                                  er, the last function used appears as      During this period, the data from the previ-
Resetting fuel consumption sta- 152               the first display.
tistics                                                                                      ous journey can be incorporated as fol-
                                                                                             lows:
Call up range (distance to empty) 152
                                                                                                Press the reset button J in the instru-
                                                                                                ment cluster ( page 134).
                                                                                                The statistics will be incorporated.

                                                                                                i
                                                                                                If you do not press the reset button J,
                                               1 Distance driven since start                    the consumption statistics will be reset
                                               2 Time elapsed since start                       to 0.
                                               3 Average fuel consumption since start
                                               4 Average speed since start



                                                                                                                                   151
Controls in detail
Control system


Fuel consumption since last reset             Resetting fuel consumption statistics        Call up range (distance to empty)
   Press button è or ÿ repeatedly                Press button è or ÿ repeatedly               Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
   until you see the first function of the       until you see the first function of the      until you see the first function of the
   Trip computer menu.                           trip computer menu.                          Trip computer menu.
   Press button j or k repeatedly                Press button j or k repeatedly               Press button j or k repeatedly
   until you see this message in the multi-      until you see the reading that you want      until you see this message in the multi-
   function display: AFTER RESET.                to reset in the multifunction display.       function display: RANGE.
                                                 Press and hold the reset button J            In the multifunction display you will see
                                                 ( page 134) until the value is reset to      the calculated range based on the cur-
                                                 0.                                           rent fuel tank level.




1 Distance driven since last reset
2 Time elapsed since last reset
3 Average fuel consumption since last re-
  set
4 Average speed since last reset




152
                                                                                                                Controls in detail
                                                                                                                     Control system


Vehicle status message memory menu                 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly               Press button k or j.
                                                   until the vehicle status message mem-
                                                                                                The stored messages will now be dis-
Use the vehicle status message memory              ory appears in the multifunction dis-
                                                                                                played in the order in which the mal-
menu to scan malfunction and warning               play.
                                                                                                functions have occurred. See the
messages that may be stored in the sys-
                                                                                                “Practical hints” section for malfunc-
tem. Such messages appear in the multi-         No vehicle status messages
                                                                                                tion and warning messages
function display and are based on
                                                If no conditions are recorded in the memo-      ( page 335).
conditions or system status the vehicle’s
                                                ry, the message in the multifunction dis-
system has recorded.                                                                         Should the vehicle’s system record any
                                                play is:
                                                                                             conditions while driving, the number of
                                                NO MESSAGES
                                                                                             messages will reappear in the multifunc-
 Warning!                              G                                                     tion display when the SmartKey in the
                                                Vehicle status messages have been re-
 Malfunction and warning messages are only
                                                                                             starter switch is turned to position 0 or re-
                                                corded
 indicated for certain systems and are inten-
                                                                                             moved from the starter switch. If you press
 tionally not very detailed. The malfunction
                                                If conditions have occurred causing status   the reset button J in the instrument clus-
 and warning messages are simply a remind-
                                                messages to be recorded, the number of       ter ( page 134), the next message will be
 er with respect to the operation of certain
                                                messages appears in the multifunction dis-   displayed immediately.
 systems and do not replace the owner’s
                                                play:
                                                                                                i
 and/or driver’s responsibility to maintain
                                                                                                The vehicle status message memory
 the vehicle’s operating safety by having all
                                                                                                will be cleared when you switch on igni-
 required maintenance and safety checks
                                                                                                tion. You will then only see high-priority
 performed on the vehicle and by bringing
                                                                                                messages in the multifunction display.
 the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz
                                                                                                These are highlighted in red color
 Center to address the malfunction and
                                                                                                ( page 335).
 warning messages ( page 335).                  1 Number of messages


                                                                                                                                    153
Controls in detail
Control system


Settings menu                                  The following settings and submenus are   Resetting all settings
                                               available:
                                                                                         You can reset all the functions of all sub-
In the SETTINGS menu there are two func-
                                               Function                         Page     menus to the factory settings.
tions:
                                               Resetting all settings           154         Press the reset button J
   The function TO RESET PRESS R BUTTON
                                               Submenus in the Settings menu 155            ( page 134) for approximately three
   FOR 3 SEC., with which you can reset
                                                                                            seconds.
   all settings to the original factory set-   Resetting the functions of a sub- 155
   tings.                                      menu                                         In the multifunction display you will see
                                                                                            the request to press the reset
   A collection of submenus with which         Instrument cluster submenu       157         button J again to confirm.
   you can make individual settings for
                                               Lighting submenu                 158
   your vehicle.                                                                            Press the reset button J again.
                                               Vehicle submenu                  162
   Press button è or ÿ repeatedly                                                           The functions of all the submenus will
   until the SETTINGS menu appears in the      Convenience submenu              163         reset to factory settings.
   multifunction display.
                                                                                            i
                                                                                            The settings you have changed will not
                                                                                            be reset unless you confirm the action
                                                                                            by pressing the reset button J a sec-
                                                                                            ond time.
                                                                                            Due to safety reasons, resetting all of
                                                                                            the settings while driving will not reset
                                                                                            all of the values in the LIGHTING or the
                                                                                            VEHICLE menu.




154
                                                                                             Controls in detail
                                                                                                Control system


Submenus in the Settings menu                 Resetting the functions of a submenu
   Press button j or k.                       For each submenu you can reset all the
                                              functions to the factory settings.
   In the multifunction display you see the
   collection of the submenus.                   Move to a function in the submenu.
                                                 Press the reset button J
                                                 ( page 134) for approximately three
                                                 seconds.
                                                 In the multifunction display you will see
                                                 the request to press the reset
                                                 button J again to confirm.
   Press button æ or ç.
                                                 Press the reset button J again.
   The selection marker moves to the next
   submenu.                                      All functions of the submenu will reset
                                                 to factory settings.
The submenus are arranged by hierarchy.
Scroll down with the ç button, scroll up
with the æ button.
Move within the submenus with the k
or j button to the individual functions.
The settings themselves are made with
button æ or ç.




                                                                                                          155
Controls in detail
Control system


The table below shows what settings can
be changed within the various menus. De-
tailed instructions on making individual
settings can be found on the following pag-
es.

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER                LIGHTING                             VEHICLE                          CONVENIENCE
Select temperature display        Set daytime running lamp mode Set automatic locking                   Set key-dependency
mode                              (USA only)
Select multifunction display      Set locator lighting                 Limiting opening height of trunk Activate easy-entry/exit feature
mode                                                                   lid*
Select language                   Exterior lamps delayed shut-off                                       Set parking position for exterior
                                                                                                        rear view mirrors
Select tire inflation pressure    Interior lighting delayed shut-off                                    Set fold-in function for exterior
unit                                                                                                    rear view mirrors




156
                                                                                                             Controls in detail
                                                                                                                  Control system


Instrument cluster submenu                   Selecting temperature display mode             Selecting speedometer display mode
Access the INST. CLUS. submenu via the          Move the selection marker with                 Move the selection marker with
SETTINGS menu. Use the INST. CLUS. sub-         the æ or ç button to the INST.                 the æ or ç button to the INST.
menu to change the instrument cluster dis-      CLUS. submenu.                                 CLUS. submenu.
play settings. The following functions are
                                                Press button j or k repeatedly                 Press button j or k repeatedly
available:
                                                until you see this message in the multi-       until you see this message in the multi-
Function                          Page          function display: TEMP. INDICATOR.             function display: DISPLAY VALUES IN.
Select temperature display        157           The selection marker is on the current         The selection marker is on the current
mode                                            setting.                                       setting.
Select speedometer display        157
mode
Select language                   158
Select tire inflation pressure unit 158

                                                Press æ or ç to set the temper-                Press æ or ç to set speedome-
                                                ature unit to degrees Celsius (°C) or de-      ter unit to MILES or KM.
                                                grees Fahrenheit (°F).




                                                                                                                                 157
Controls in detail
Control system


Selecting language                               Available languages:
   Move the selection marker with                    German
   the æ or ç button to the INST.
                                                     English
   CLUS. submenu.
                                                     French
   Press button j or k repeatedly
   until you see this message in the multi-          Italian
   function display: LANGUAGE                                                                     Press æ or ç to select the de-
                                                     Spanish                                      sired tire inflation pressure unit.
   The selection marker is on the current
   setting.                                   Selecting tire inflation pressure unit           Lighting submenu
                                              Use this function to set the unit for the tire   Access the LIGHTING submenu via the SET-
                                              inflation pressure display.                      TINGS menu. Use the LIGHTING submenu
                                                 Move the selection marker with                to change the lamp and lighting settings on
                                                 the æ or ç button to the INST.                your vehicle. The following functions are
                                                 CLUS. submenu.                                available:

   Press æ or ç to select the lan-               Press button j or k repeatedly                Function                           Page
   guage to be used for the multifunction        until you see this message in the multi-
                                                                                               Set daytime running lamp mode 159
   display messages.                             function display: DISPLAY UNIT TIRE
                                                                                               (USA only)
                                                 PRESSURE.
                                                                                               Set locator lighting               160
                                                 The selection marker is on the current
                                                 setting.                                      Exterior lights delayed shut-off   160
                                                                                               Interior lighting delayed shut-off 161




158
                                                                                                           Controls in detail
                                                                                                                Control system


Setting daytime running lamp mode                Press æ or ç to select manual              i
(USA only)                                       or daytime running lamp (constant)         If you turn the exterior lamp switch to
                                                 mode. This function is not available in    another position, the corresponding
   i                                             countries where daytime running            lamp(s) will switch on.
   This function is not available in coun-       lamps are mandatory.
   tries where the daytime running lamp                                                     For safety reasons, resetting the
                                              With daytime running lamp mode selected       LIGHTING submenu to factory settings
   mode is mandatory and therefore in a
                                              and the exterior lamp switch at position 0,   ( page 155) while driving will not re-
   constant mode.
                                              the following lamps will come on automat-     set the daytime running lamp mode.
                                              ically when the engine is turned on:
   Move the selection marker with                                                           In the multifunction display you will
   the æ or ç button to the LIGHT-               Parking lamps and low beam head-           then see the message: LIGHTING –
   ING submenu.                                  lamps                                      CANNOT BE COMPLETELY RESET TO FAC-
   Press button j or k repeatedly                License plate lamps (in low ambient        TORY SETTINGS WHILE DRIVING.
   until you see this message in the multi-      light conditions)
   function display: LIGHTING CIRCUIT
   HEADLAMP MODE.
   The selection marker is on the current
   setting.




                                                                                                                              159
Controls in detail
Control system


Setting locator lighting                    The locator lighting switches off when the     Setting night security illumination
                                            driver’s door is opened. It switches off au-
During darkness, the following lamps will                                                  (Exterior lights delayed switch-off)
                                            tomatically after a period of approximately
come on when the exterior lamp switch is
                                            40 seconds.                                    Use the HEADLAMPS DELAYED SWITCH-OFF
in position U, the locator lighting fea-
                                                                                           function to set whether and for how long
ture is activated and the vehicle is un-       Move the selection marker with
                                                                                           you would like the exterior lamps to illumi-
locked by remote control:                      the æ or ç button to the LIGHT-
                                                                                           nate during darkness after all doors are
                                               ING submenu.
   Parking lamps                                                                           closed. When the delayed switch-off fea-
   Tail lamps                                  Press button j or k repeatedly              ture is activated and the exterior lamp
                                               until you see this message in the multi-    switch is in position U before the en-
   License plate lamps                         function display: LOCATOR LIGHTING.         gine is turned off, the following lamps will
   Front fog lamps                             The selection marker is on the current      remain lit after you remove the SmartKey
                                               setting.                                    from the starter switch:
To activate locator lighting:
                                                                                              Parking lamps
   Make sure the function LOCATOR
   LIGHTING is set.                                                                           Tail lamps

   Turn the exterior lamp switch to                                                           License plate lamps
   position U.                                                                                Front fog lamps

                                               Press æ or ç to select the de-
                                                                                              i
                                               sired setting.                                 You can reactivate this function within
                                                                                              ten minutes by opening a door.
                                               The locator lighting will be switched ON
                                               or OFF.                                        If you do not open a door after remov-
                                                                                              ing the SmartKey, the lamps will auto-
                                                                                              matically shut off after 60 seconds.


160
                                                                                                             Controls in detail
                                                                                                                  Control system


To activate night security illumination:         Press æ or ç to select the de-               Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
                                                 sired lamp-on period.                        to position 2 and back to 0.
   Select delayed switch-off period (see
   below).                                       You can select:                              The delayed switch-off feature is deac-
                                                                                              tivated. It will reactivate as soon as you
   Turn the exterior lamp switch to                 0 SEC., the delayed switch-off fea-
                                                                                              reinsert the SmartKey in the starter
   position U before turning off the en-            ture is deactivated
                                                                                              switch.
   gine.                                            15 SEC., 30 SEC., 45 SEC., or
To select delayed switch-off period:                60 SEC., the delayed switch-off fea-
                                                                                           Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
                                                    ture is activated                         Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop but-
   Move the selection marker with
                                                                                              ton ( page 35) on the gear selector le-
   the æ or ç button to the LIGHT-            You can temporarily deactivate the de-
                                                                                              ver.
   ING submenu.                               layed switch-off feature:
   Press button j or k repeatedly                Before leaving the vehicle, turn the      Interior illumination delayed switch-off
   until you see this message in the multi-      SmartKey in the starter switch to
                                                                                           Use this function to set whether and for
   function display: HEADLAMPS DELAYED           position 0.
                                                                                           how long you would like the interior light-
   SWITCH-OFF.
                                                                                           ing to remain lit during darkness after the
   The selection marker is on the current                                                  SmartKey is removed from the starter
   setting.                                                                                switch.
                                                                                              Move the selection marker with
                                                                                              the æ or ç button to the LIGHT-
                                                                                              ING submenu.




                                                                                                                                  161
Controls in detail
Control system


  Press button j or k repeatedly             Vehicle submenu                              Setting automatic locking
  until you see this message in the multi-
                                             Access the VEHICLE submenu via the SET-      Use this function to activate or deactivate
  function display: INTERIOR LIGHTING
                                             INGS menu. Use the VEHICLE submenu to        the automatic central locking. With the au-
  DELAYED SWITCH-OFF.
                                             make general vehicle settings. The follow-   tomatic central locking system activated,
  The selection marker is on the current     ing functions are available:                 the vehicle is centrally locked at vehicle
  setting.                                                                                speeds of approximately 9 mph
                                             Function                          Page
                                                                                          (15 km/h).
                                             Set automatic locking             162
                                                                                             Press button æ or ç to move
                                             Limiting opening height of trunk 163            the selection marker to the VEHICLE
                                             lid*                                            submenu.
                                                                                             Press button j or k repeatedly
                                                                                             until you see this message in the multi-
  Press æ or ç to select the de-                                                             function display: AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK.
  sired lamp-on time period. You can se-
  lect:                                                                                      The selection marker is on the current
                                                                                             setting.
      0 SEC., the delayed switch-off fea-
      ture is deactivated.
      5 SEC., 10 SEC., 15 SEC., or
      20 SEC., the delayed switch-off fea-
      ture is activated.

                                                                                             Press æ or ç to switch
                                                                                             AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK ON or OFF.



162
                                                                                                          Controls in detail
                                                                                                               Control system


Limiting opening height of trunk lid*         Convenience submenu                        Setting key-dependency
This function is available on vehicles with   Access the CONVENIENCE submenu via the     Use this function to set whether the mem-
the trunk lid opening/closing system*.        SETTINGS menu. Use the CONVENIENCE sub-    ory settings for the seats, the steering
Use this function to activate or deactivate   menu to change the settings for a number   wheel, the mirrors, and the automatic cli-
the limiting opening height of trunk lid.     of convenience features. The following     mate control should be stored separately
                                              functions are available:                   for each SmartKey ( page 122).
   Move the selection marker with
   the æ or ç button to VEHICLE               Function                           Page       Move the selection marker with
   submenu.                                                                                 the æ or ç button to
                                              Setting key-dependency             163
   Press button j or k repeatedly                                                           the CONVENIENCE submenu.
                                              Activating easy-entry/exit fea-    164
   until you see this message in the multi-                                                 Press button j or k repeatedly
                                              ture
   function display:                                                                        until you see this message in the multi-
                                              Setting parking position for exte- 165        function display: SETTINGS KEY-DEPEN-
   OPENING LIMITER                            rior rear view mirrors                        DENT.
   TRUNK LID
                                              Setting fold-in function for exteri- 165      The selection marker is on the current
   The selection marker is on the current     or rear view mirrors                          setting.
   setting.




                                                                                            Press æ or ç to set key-depen-
   Press button æ or ç to switch
                                                                                            dency to ON or OFF.
   the opening limiter for trunk lid ON or
   OFF.

                                                                                                                              163
Controls in detail
Control system


Activating easy-entry/exit feature                                                              Press æ or ç to change the
                                             Do not leave children unattended in the ve-
                                                                                                easy-entry/exit setting.
Use this function to activate and deacti-    hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
vate the easy-entry/exit feature             Children could open the driver’s door and
( page 112).                                 unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit    The following settings are available for the
                                             feature, which could result in an accident      easy-entry/exit feature:

 Warning!                             G      and/or serious personal injury.                 OFF              The easy-entry/exit fea-
                                                                                                              ture is deactivated.
 You must make sure no one can become          Move the selection marker with                STEER. COL       Only the steering column
 trapped or injured by the moving steering     the æ or ç button to                                           is moved.
 wheel and driver’s seat when the easy-en-     the CONVENIENCE submenu.
                                                                                             ST.COL+SEAT      Both the steering column
 try/exit feature is activated.                Press button j or k repeatedly                                 and the driver’s seat are
 To cancel seat/steering wheel movement,       until you see this message in the multi-                       moved.
 do one of the following:                      function display: EASY-ENTRY FEATURE
                                               ACTIVATE.
     Press seat adjustment switch
     ( page 38).                               The selection marker is on the current
     Move steering column stalk                setting.
     ( page 42).
     Press the one of the memory position
     buttons or the memory button
     ( page 123).




164
                                                                                                            Controls in detail
                                                                                                                 Control system


Setting parking position for exterior rear        The selection marker is on the current      Press button j or k repeatedly
view mirror                                       setting.                                    until the message FOLD IN MIRRORS
                                                                                              WHEN LOCKING appears in the multifunc-
Use the MIRROR SETTING WHEN PARKING
                                                                                              tion display.
function to select whether the passen-
ger-side exterior rear view mirror should be                                                  The selection marker is on the current
turned downward during parking maneu-                                                         setting.
vers when reverse gear R is engaged. For
additional information, see “Activating ex-
terior rear view mirror parking position”         Press æ or ç to switch function
( page 180).                                      ON or OFF.
   Move the selection marker to
   the CONVENIENCE submenu using               Setting fold-in function for exterior rear
   the æ or ç button.                          view mirrors
                                                                                              Press button æ or ç to switch
   Press button j or k repeatedly              Using this function, you can set the exteri-   the automatic fold-in setting for the
   until you see this message in the multi-    or rear view mirrors to be automatically       mirrors ON or OFF when the vehicle is
   function display: MIRROR SETTING WHEN       folded in when you lock your vehicle           locked.
   PARKING.                                    ( page 181).
                                                  Move the selection marker to the CON-
                                                  VENIENCE submenu with the æ
                                                  or ç button.




                                                                                                                               165
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission


For more information on driving with an           i                                        The automatic transmission selects indi-
automatic transmission see “Automatic             During the brief warm-up, transmission   vidual gears automatically, depending on:
transmission” ( page 48).                         upshifting is delayed. This allows the      the gear selector lever
Your vehicle’s transmission adapts its gear       catalytic converter to heat up more         position D ( page 170) with
shifting process to your individual driving       quickly to operating temperature.           gear ranges ( page 169)
style by continually adjusting the shift
                                                                                              the selected program mode:
points up or down. These shift point adjust-
ments are performed based on current                                                          (C/S) ( page 172)
operating and driving conditions.                                                             or
If the operating conditions change, the                                                       (M/C/S) (CL 55 AMG and CL 65 AMG
automatic transmission reacts by                                                              only) ( page 176)
adjusting its shift program.
                                                                                              the position of the accelerator pedal
                                                                                              ( page 173)
                                                                                              the vehicle speed
                                               Gearshift pattern for automatic
                                               transmission




166
                                                                                                               Controls in detail
                                                                                                        Automatic transmission


                                                                                                !
                                             Warning!                               G           Allow engine to warm up under low
                                                                                                load use. Do not place full load on the
                                             It is dangerous to shift the gear selector
                                                                                                engine until the operating temperature
                                             lever out of P or N if the engine speed is
                                                                                                has been reached.
                                             higher than idle speed. If your foot is not
                                             firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could       Shift into reverse gear R or parking
                                             accelerate quickly forward or reverse. You         position P only when the vehicle is
                                             could lose control of the vehicle and hit          stopped.
                                             someone or something. Only shift into gear         Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
1 Current gear range/gear selector lever     when the engine is idling normally and when        extended period when driving off on
  position                                   your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.      slippery road surfaces. This may cause
2 Current program mode                                                                          serious damage to the drivetrain which
The current gear range/gear selector lever                                                      is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
position and program mode (C/S)                                                                 Limited Warranty.
or (M/C/S) appear in the tachometer
display.                                                                                     When the gear selector lever is in
                                                                                             position D, you can influence transmission
                                                                                             shifting by:
                                                                                                limiting the gear range
                                                                                                changing gears manually




                                                                                                                                  167
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission


One-touch gearshifting                              i                                           Canceling gear range limit
                                                    To avoid overrevving the engine when           Press and hold the gear selector lever
Even with an automatic transmission you
                                                    the gear selector lever is moved to            in the D+ direction until D reappears in
can change the gears manually when the
                                                    the D- direction, the transmission will        the tachometer display.
gear selector lever is in position D.
                                                    not shift to a lower gear if the engine’s
                                                                                                The transmission will shift from the current
                                                    max. speed would be exceeded.
Downshifting                                                                                    gear range directly to gear range D.
   Briefly press the gear selector lever to      Upshifting                                     Shifting into optimal gear range
   the left in the D- direction.
                                                    Briefly press the gear selector lever to       Press and hold the gear selector lever
The transmission will shift from the current        the right in the D+ direction.                 in the D- direction.
gear to the next lower gear as permitted by
the shift program. This action simulta-          The transmission will shift from the current   The transmission will automatically select
neously limits the gear range of the             gear to the next higher gear as permitted      the gear range suited for optimal
transmission ( page 169).                        by the shift program. This action simul-       acceleration and deceleration. This will
                                                 taneously extends the gear range of the        involve shifting down one or more gears.
                                                 transmission.
 Warning!                               G
 On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
 in order to obtain braking action. This could
 result in drive wheel slip and reduced
 vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
 prevent this type of loss of control.




168
                                                                                                        Controls in detail
                                                                                                Automatic transmission


Gear ranges                                         Effect                                    Effect
With the gear selector lever in position D,   ï The transmission shifts through         ç The transmission shifts through
you can limit the transmission’s gear range         sixth gear only (applies to               second gear only.
by pressing the gear selector lever to the          vehicles with 7-speed automatic
                                                                                              Allows the use of engine’s
left (D-), and reverse the gear range limit         transmission only).
                                                                                              braking power when driving:
by pressing the gear selector lever to the    î The transmission shifts through
right (D+).                                                                                      on steep downgrades
                                                    fifth gear only (applies to
The selected gear range appears in the              vehicles with 7-speed automatic              in mountainous regions
tachometer display ( page 167). If you              transmission only).                          under extreme operating
press on the accelerator when the engine      é The transmission shifts through                  conditions
has reached its rpm limit, the transmission         fourth gear only.                   æ The transmission operates in
will upshift beyond any gear range limit      è The transmission shifts through               first gear only.
selected.                                           third gear only.
                                                                                              For maximum use of engine’s
                                                    With this selection you can use           braking effect on very steep or
                                                    the braking effect of the engine.         lengthy downgrades.




                                                                                                                          169
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission


Gear selector lever position                      Effect                                 Effect
                                                  The SmartKey can only be           ë Neutral
        Effect                                    removed from the starter switch
                                                                                         No power is transmitted from the
ì Park position                                   with the gear selector lever in
                                                                                         engine to the drive axle. When
                                                  position P. With the SmartKey
        Gear selector lever position                                                     the brakes are released, the
                                                  removed, the gear selector lever
        when the vehicle is parked. Place                                                vehicle can be moved freely
                                                  is locked in position P.
        gear selector lever in position P                                                (pushed or towed).
        only when vehicle is stopped.        í Reverse gear                              To avoid damage to the trans-
        The park position is not intended         Place gear selector lever in           mission, never engage N while
        to serve as a brake when the              position R only when vehicle is        driving.
        vehicle is parked. Rather, the            stopped.
        driver should always set the                                                     If the ESP is deactivated or
        parking brake in addition to                                                     malfunctioning:
        placing the gear selector lever in                                               Move gear selector lever to N
        position P to secure the vehicle.                                                only if the vehicle is in danger of
                                                                                         skidding, e.g. on icy roads.
                                                                                     ê Drive
                                                                                         The transmission shifts
                                                                                         automatically. All forward gears
                                                                                         are available.




170
                                                                                                               Controls in detail
                                                                                                       Automatic transmission


!
Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any   Warning!                                G        Warning!                                G
other reason with gear selector lever
                                           Getting out of your vehicle with the gear        When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
in N can result in transmission damage
                                           selector lever not fully engaged in position P   SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
that is not covered by the
                                           is dangerous. Also, position P alone is not      from the starter switch, take it with you, and
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
                                           intended to or capable of preventing your        lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-
                                           vehicle from moving, possibly hitting people     tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
                                           or objects.                                      unlocked vehicle. Children could move the
                                           Always set the parking brake in addition to      gear selector lever from position P, which
                                           shifting to position P ( page 50).               could result in an accident and/or serious
                                                                                            personal injury.
                                           When parked on an incline, turn the front
                                           wheels towards the road curb.
                                           Do not park this vehicle in areas where
                                           combustible materials such as grass, hay or
                                           leaves can come into contact with the hot
                                           exhaust system, as these materials could be
                                           ignited and cause a vehicle fire.




                                                                                                                                     171
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission


Automatic shift program                    !                                       Press program mode selector
                                           Never change the program mode when      switch 1 repeatedly until the letter of
The program mode selector switch is        the gear selector lever is out of       the desired program mode appears in
located on the lower part of the center    position P. This could result in a      the tachometer display.
console.                                   change of driving characteristics for   Select C for comfort driving:
                                           which you may not be prepared.
                                                                                      The vehicle starts out in second
                                                                                      gear (both forward and reverse) for
                                           i                                          gentler starts. This does not apply if
                                           The last selected program                  full throttle is applied or gear
                                           mode (C or S) is switched on when the      range 1 is selected.
                                           engine is restarted.
                                                                                      Traction and driving stability are
                                                                                      improved on icy roads.
                                                                                      Upshifts occur earlier even when
1 Program mode selector switch                                                        you give more gas. The engine then
                                                                                      operates at lower rpms and the
C Comfort        For comfort driving                                                  wheels are less likely to spin.
S Sport          For standard driving
The current gear selector lever position
and the selected program mode (C/S) are
indicated in the tachometer display
( page 167).




172
                                                                                                                Controls in detail
                                                                                                          Automatic transmission


Driving tips                                 Stopping                                         Maneuvering
                                             When you stop briefly, e.g. at traffic lights:   When you maneuver in tight areas,
Accelerator position                                                                          e.g. when pulling into a parking space:
                                                Leave the transmission in gear.
Your driving style influences the               Hold the vehicle with the brake.                 Control the vehicle speed by gradually
transmission’s shifting behavior:                                                                releasing the brakes.
                                             When you stop longer with the engine
Less throttle    Earlier upshifting                                                              Accelerate gently.
                                             idling or on an uphill gradient:
More throttle    Later upshifting                                                                Never abruptly step on the accelerator.
                                                Move the gear selector lever to
                                                position P.
Kickdown                                                                                      Working on the vehicle
                                                Set the parking brake.
Use kickdown when you want maximum
acceleration.                                                                                  Warning!                             G
   Press the accelerator past the point of
                                                                                               When working on the vehicle, set the
   resistance.
                                                                                               parking brake and move gear selector lever
   The transmission shifts into a lower                                                        to position P. Otherwise the vehicle could
   gear.                                                                                       roll away.
   Ease on the accelerator when you have
   reached the desired speed.
   The transmission shifts up again.




                                                                                                                                     173
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission


Steering wheel gearshift control               !                                         The steering wheel gearshift buttons are
(Speedshift) CL 55 AMG and                     Allow engine to warm up under low         located to the left and right of the steering
CL 65 AMG                                      load use. Do not place full load on the   wheel.
                                               engine until the operating temperature
When driving in the automatic program          has been reached.
modes C or S, or in the manual program
mode M, you can change the gears               Shift into reverse gear R or parking
manually on the steering wheel or by using     position P only when the vehicle is
the gear selector lever ( page 168).           stopped.
                                               Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
   i                                           extended period when driving off on
   To avoid overrevving the engine when        slippery road surfaces. This may cause
   downshifting with steering wheel            serious damage to the drivetrain which
   gearshift buttons, the transmission will    is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz       1 Left button: downshift
   not shift to a lower gear if the engine’s   Limited Warranty.                         2 Right button: upshift
   max. speed would be exceeded.




174
                                                                                                              Controls in detail
                                                                                                       Automatic transmission


i                                          Downshifting                                     Upshifting
You cannot shift with the steering                                                             Press button 2 on the right side of the
wheel gearshift buttons when the gear       Warning!                               G           steering wheel.
selector lever is in position P, N or R.
                                                                                            The transmission will shift to the next
                                            On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
The manual program mode M will not                                                          higher gear as permitted by the shift
                                            in order to obtain braking action. This could
be stored. When the engine is turned                                                        program. This action simultaneously
                                            result in drive wheel slip and reduced
off with the manual program mode M                                                          extends the gear range of the transmission
                                            vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
selected, the transmission will go to                                                       when you are driving in the automatic
                                            prevent this type of loss of control.
the automatic program mode (C or S)                                                         program mode (C or S).
when the engine is restarted.
                                              Press button 1 on the left side of the
The last selected program
                                              steering wheel.
mode (C or S) is switched on when the
engine is restarted in the automatic       The transmission will shift to the next
program mode.                              lower gear as permitted by the shift
                                           program. This action simultaneously limits
                                           the gear range of the transmission
                                           ( page 169) when you are driving in the
                                           automatic program mode (C or S).




                                                                                                                                175
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission


Manual shift program CL 55 AMG and           The program mode selector switch is         Activating manual shift program
CL 65 AMG                                    located on the lower part of the center
                                                                                            Press program mode selector
                                             console.
                                                                                            switch 1 repeatedly until the M for the
In the manual program mode M you can
                                                                                            manual program mode M appears in
change the gears manually on the steering
                                                                                            the tachometer display.
wheel ( page 174) or by using the gear
selector lever ( page 168).                                                                 The transmission switches to the
                                                                                            manual program mode M. Automatic
   !                                                                                        shifting is switched off. The gear range
   Allow engine to warm up under low                                                        is not limited.
   load use. Do not place full load on the
                                                                                         You can change the gears manually when
   engine until the operating temperature
                                                                                         the gear selector lever is in position D. You
   has been reached.
                                                                                         can upshift or downshift through the gears
   Shift into reverse gear R or parking      1 Program mode selector switch              in succession.
   position P only when the vehicle is       M Manual         For manual gear shifting
   stopped.
                                             C Comfort        For comfort driving
   Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
   extended period when driving off on       S Sport          For standard driving
   slippery road surfaces. This may cause    The current gear selector lever position
   serious damage to the drivetrain which    and the selected program mode (M/C/S)
   is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz       are indicated in the tachometer display
   Limited Warranty.                         ( page 167).




176
                                                                                                                   Controls in detail
                                                                                                            Automatic transmission


Downshifting                                     Upshifting                                      Kickdown
                                                      Briefly press the gear selector lever to   The kickdown can also be used for
 Warning!                               G             the right in the D+ direction              maximum acceleration when driving in the
                                                      ( page 168).                               manual program mode M.
 On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
                                                 or                                                 Press the accelerator past the point of
 in order to obtain braking action. This could
                                                      Press button 2 on the right side of the       resistance.
 result in drive wheel slip and reduced
 vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not         steering wheel ( page 174).                   The transmission shifts to a lower gear.
 prevent this type of loss of control.                The transmission shifts to the next           Shift up once the desired speed has
                                                      higher gear.                                  been reached.
     Briefly press the gear selector lever to
     the left in the D- direction                                                                   i
     ( page 168).                                                                                   When driving at full throttle, the trans-
                                                                                                    mission shifts to the next higher gear
or
                                                                                                    when maximum engine speed has been
     Press button 1 on the left side of the                                                         reached.
     steering wheel ( page 174).
     The transmission shifts to the next
     lower gear.

     i
     When you brake or stop, the transmis-
     sion shifts down to a gear from which
     you can easily accelerate or take off.



                                                                                                                                       177
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission


Deactivating manual shift program             Emergency operation (Limp Home
                                              Mode)
     Press the program mode selector
     switch ( page 176) repeatedly
                                              If vehicle acceleration worsens or the
     until C or S appears in the tachometer
                                              transmission no longer shifts, the trans-
     display.
                                              mission is most likely operating in limp
or                                            home (emergency operation) mode. In this
     Restart the engine.                      mode only second gear and reverse gear
                                              can be activated.
     The transmission will go to the
     automatic program mode (C or S).            Stop the vehicle.

     The manual program mode M is not            Move gear selector lever to P.
     stored.                                     Turn off the engine.
                                                 Wait at least ten seconds before
                                                 restarting.
                                                 Restart the engine.
                                                 Move gear selector lever to position D
                                                 (for second gear) or R.
                                                 Have the transmission checked at an
                                                 authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
                                                 soon as possible.




178
                                                                                                                Controls in detail
                                                                                                                      Good visibility
  Good visibility
For information on the windshield wipers,   Headlamp cleaning system                        Rear view mirrors
see “Windshield wipers” ( page 54).
                                            The switch is located on the left side of the   For information on setting the rear view
                                            dashboard.                                      mirrors, see “Mirrors” ( page 43).

                                                                                            Auto-dimming rear view mirror
                                                                                            The reflection brightness of the exterior
                                                                                            rear view mirror on the driver’s side and
                                                                                            the interior rear view mirror will respond
                                                                                            automatically to glare when
                                                                                               the ignition is switched on
                                                                                               and
                                                                                               incoming light from headlamps falls on
                                            1 Headlamp washer switch
                                                                                               the sensor in the interior rear view
                                               Switch on ignition ( page 34).                  mirror.
                                               Press switch 1.                              The interior rear view mirror will not react if
                                               The headlamps are cleaned with a                reverse gear is engaged
                                               high-pressure water jet.
                                                                                               the interior lighting is turned on
                                            For information on filling up the washer
                                            reservoir, see “Windshield washer system
                                            and headlamp cleaning system”
                                            ( page 282).



                                                                                                                                    179
Controls in detail
Good visibility


                                                      !                                              Activating exterior rear view mirror
 Warning!                                  G          Electrolyte drops coming into contact          parking position
                                                      with the vehicle paint finish can be           Follow these steps to activate the mirror
 The auto-dimming function does not react if
                                                      completely removed only while in the           parking position so that the passen-
 incoming light is not aimed directly at sen-
                                                      liquid state by applying plenty of water.      ger-side exterior rear view mirror will be
 sors in the interior rear view mirror.
                                                                                                     turned downward to the stored position.
 The interior rear view mirror and the exterior
 rear view mirror on the driver’s side do not       Warning!                                G           Make sure you have stored a parking
                                                                                                        position for the passenger-side exterior
 react, for example, if the rear window sun-
 shade is in raised position.                       Exercise care when using the passen-
                                                                                                        rear view mirror ( page 124).
 Glare can endanger you and others.                 ger-side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror      Make sure the MIRROR SETTING WHEN
                                                    surface is convex (outwardly curved surface         PARKING function in the CONVENIENCE
                                                    for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror       submenu of the control system is
 Warning!                                  G        are closer than they appear. Check your in-         switched to ON ( page 165).
                                                    side rear view mirror or glance over your
                                                                                                        Switch on ignition ( page 34).
 In the case of an accident, liquid electrolyte     shoulder before changing lanes.
                                                                                                        Press button 2 for passenger-side ex-
 may escape from the mirror housing if the
                                                                                                        terior rear view mirror.
 mirror glass breaks.
 Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not al-                                                       Place the gear selector lever in reverse
 low the liquid to come into contact with                                                               gear R.
 eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.                                                           The passenger-side exterior rear view
 In case it does, immediately flush affected                                                            mirror will be turned downward in the
 area with water, and seek medical help if                                                              stored position.
 necessary.



180
                                                                                                                Controls in detail
                                                                                                                      Good visibility


                                               Electrically folding exterior rear view          i
                                               mirrors                                          If you are driving at more than approxi-
                                                                                                mately 9 mph (15 km/h), you will not
                                                  !                                             be able to fold the exterior mirrors in.
                                                  Before driving the vehicle through an
                                                  automatic car wash, fold the exterior      Folding exterior rear view mirrors in
                                                  mirrors in. Otherwise they may get         and out manually
                                                  damaged.
                                                                                             The exterior rear view mirrors can vibrate if
                                                                                             they are not folded out completely.
                                               Folding exterior rear view mirrors in
1 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror      and out automatically                         The buttons are located on the driver’s
  button                                                                                     door.
2 Passenger-side exterior rear view            When the corresponding function in the
  mirror button                                control system is activated ( page 165):
The exterior rear view mirror returns to its      The exterior rear view mirrors
previously stored driving position:               automatically fold in as soon as the ve-
                                                  hicle is locked from the outside.
   ten seconds after you put the gear se-
   lector lever out of position R                 The exterior rear view mirrors
                                                  automatically fold out as soon as the
   immediately once your vehicle exceeds          vehicle is unlocked and the driver’s or
   a speed of approximately 6 mph                 passenger door are subsequently
   (10 km/h)                                      opened.
   immediately when you press button 1                                                       1 Folds the exterior mirrors out
   for driver’s side mirror                                                                  2 Folds the exterior mirrors in



                                                                                                                                    181
Controls in detail
Good visibility


   Switch on ignition ( page 34).              Windshield wipers                              !
                                                                                              Do not leave windshield wipers in inter-
Folding in                                     For more information on the windshield         mittent setting when vehicle is taken to
                                               wipers, see “Windshield wipers”                an automatic car wash or during wind-
   Press button 2 briefly.
                                               ( page 54).                                    shield cleaning. Wipers will operate in
   Both mirrors fold in.
                                                  i                                           the presence of water sprayed on the
                                                                                              windshield, and wipers may be dam-
Folding out                                       Intermittent wiping is interrupted when
                                                                                              aged as a result.
                                                  the vehicle is at a standstill and a door
   Press button 1 briefly.
                                                  is opened.                                  The switch should not be left in inter-
   Both mirrors fold out.                                                                     mittent setting as the wipers will wipe
                                               A rain sensor automatically controls the       the windshield once every time the en-
   !                                                                                          gine is started. Dust that accumulates
                                               windshield wipers depending on how wet
   If an exterior rear view mirror housing                                                    on the windshield might scratch the
                                               the windshield is.
   is forcibly pushed forward (hit from the                                                   glass and/or damage the wiper blades
   rear), reposition it manually by applying      Switch on ignition ( page 34).              when wiping occurs on a dry wind-
   firm pressure until it snaps back into         Set wiper switch to position I              shield.
   place.                                         ( page 54).
   If an exterior rear view mirror housing     After the initial wipe, pauses between
   is forcibly pushed rearward (hit from       wipes are automatically controlled by the
   the front), press button 2 to fold mir-     rain sensor.
   rors in, then press button 1 to fold
   mirrors out. Do not force mirrors by
   hand as it may damage the adjustment
   mechanism.



182
                                                                                              Controls in detail
                                                                                                    Good visibility


Sun visors                                     Glare from the front         Glare from the front and sides
                                                                               Swing sun visor 2 down.
The sun visors protect you from sun glare
while driving.                                                                 Disengage sun visor 2 from
                                                                               mounting 1.
 Warning!                               G                                      Pivot sun visor to the side.

 Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.
 Keep the mirrors in the sun visors closed
 while vehicle is in motion. Reflected glare
 can endanger you and others.
                                               1 Mounting
                                               2 Sun visor
   i                                              Swing sun visor 2 down.
   For information on vanity mirrors
   ( page 232)




                                                                                                              183
Controls in detail
Good visibility


Rear window sunshade*                           Switch on ignition ( page 34).
                                                Press switch 1 briefly to raise the sun-
                                                                                             Warning!                                G
The switch is located in the upper part of
                                                shade.                                       When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
the front center console.
                                                Press switch 1 briefly to lower the          SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
                                                sunshade.                                    from the starter switch, take it you, and lock
                                                                                             the vehicle. Do not leave children unattend-
                                             Always raise the sunshade fully for its sup-
                                                                                             ed in the vehicle, or with access to an un-
                                             port against the window frame.
                                                                                             locked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle
                                                                                             equipment may cause an accident and/or
                                              Warning!                              G        serious personal injury.

                                              When operating the rear window sunshade,
                                              make sure that there is no danger of anyone
                                              being harmed by the raising or lowering pro-
1 Rear window sunshade switch
                                              cedure.
                                              The raising or lowering procedure can be im-
                                              mediately reversed by pressing switch 1.




184
                                                                                                                 Controls in detail
                                                                                                      Automatic climate control
   Automatic climate control
The automatic climate control is operation-      Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and       i
al whenever the engine is running. You can       odors are filtered out before outside air en-   The current climate control settings
operate the climate control system in ei-        ters the passenger compartment through          (ON/OFF, temperature, air volume, ac-
ther the automatic or manual mode. The           the air distribution system.                    tivated charcoal filter, etc.) are stored
system cools or heats the interior depend-                                                       for each SmartKey before it is removed
                                                 The air conditioning will not engage (no
ing on the selected interior temperature                                                         from the starter switch or when the ve-
                                                 cooling) if the ± mode is selected
and the current outside temperature.                                                             hicle is locked using the SmartKey with
                                                 ( page 195).
                                                                                                 KEYLESS-GO* ( page 122).
 Warning!                               G         Warning!                              G        If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate
                                                                                                 the interior before driving off.
 When operating the automatic climate con-
                                                  Follow the recommended settings for heat-
 trol, the air that enters the passenger com-                                                    Keep the air intake grille in front of the
                                                  ing and cooling given on the following pag-
 partment through the air vents in the                                                           windshield free of snow, leaves, sticks,
                                                  es. Otherwise the windows could fog up,
 footwell can be very hot or very cold (de-                                                      and any other debris.
                                                  impairing visibility and endangering you and
 pending on the set temperature). This may                                                       Do not obstruct air volume by placing
                                                  others.
 cause burn or frostbite on unprotected skin                                                     objects on the air volume-through ex-
 in the immediate area of the air vents. Al-                                                     haust slots below the rear window.
 ways keep sufficient distance between un-
 protected parts of the body and the footwell
 air vents. If necessary, change the air flow
                                                                                                 i
 using the air distribution controls to direct                                                   When operating the climate control
 the air away from the footwell air vents                                                        system in automatic mode, you will
 ( page 189).                                                                                    only rarely need to adjust the tempera-
                                                                                                 ture, air volume and air distribution.




                                                                                                                                      185
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control




186
                                                                                                     Controls in detail
                                                                                           Automatic climate control


    Item                                                                              i
                                      Warning!                               G        For draft-free ventilation, move the slid-
1 Left center air vent, adjustable
                                                                                      ers for the center air vents 1, 7, 9
2 Left air vent, fixed                When operating the automatic climate con-
                                                                                      to the middle position.
                                      trol, the air that enters the passenger com-
3 Thumbwheel for air volume control
                                      partment through the air vents in the
  for left center air vent
                                      footwell can be very hot or very cold (de-
4 Thumbwheel for air temperature      pending on the set temperature). This may
  control for center air vents        cause burn or frostbite on unprotected skin
5 Thumbwheel for air volume control   in the immediate area of the air vents. Al-
  for right center air vent           ways keep sufficient distance between un-
                                      protected parts of the body and the footwell
6 Right air vent, fixed
                                      air vents. If necessary, change the air flow
7 Right center air vent, adjustable   using the air distribution controls to direct
8 Side defroster vent, fixed          the air away from the footwell air vents
                                      ( page 189).
9 Side air vent, adjustable
a Thumbwheel for air volume control
  for side air vent
b Door air vent
c Automatic climate control panel




                                                                                                                          187
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control


                                      Item
                                                                       Warning!                               G
                                  1 Windshield defroster
                                  2 Rear window defroster              When operating the automatic climate con-
                                                                       trol, the air that enters the passenger com-
                                  3 Display
                                                                       partment through the air vents in the
                                  4 Residual engine heat utilization   footwell can be very hot or very cold (de-
                                  5 Automatic climate control on/off   pending on the set temperature). This may
                                                                       cause burn or frostbite on unprotected skin
                                  6 Air distribution, right
                                                                       in the immediate area of the air vents. Al-
Automatic climate control panel   7 AC cooling on/off                  ways keep sufficient distance between un-
                                  8 Right side temperature control     protected parts of the body and the footwell
                                                                       air vents. If necessary, change the air flow
                                  9 Air volume (automatic, manual)
                                                                       using the air distribution controls to direct
                                  a Left side temperature control      the air away from the footwell air vents
                                  b Air recirculation                  ( page 189).

                                  c Air distribution, left
                                  d Activated charcoal filter




188
                                                                                                              Controls in detail
                                                                                                    Automatic climate control


Setting the temperature                       Adjusting the temperature for center          Turning on cooler air
                                              air vents
                                                                                               Turn thumbwheel 4 in the direction of
Use temperature controls a and 8
                                              When outside temperatures are low, you           the blue marking.
( page 188) to separately adjust the air
                                              can manually raise the air temperature for
temperature on each side of the passenger                                                      Cooler air will enter from the center air
                                              the center and side air vents. The
compartment. You should raise or lower                                                         vent.
                                              thumbwheel 4 is located between the
the temperature setting in small incre-
                                              center air vents ( page 185).
ments, preferably starting at 72°F (22°C).                                                  Adjusting air distribution
                                              Automatic temperature control                 Use the air distribution controls c and 6
Increasing/decreasing
                                                 Turn thumbwheel 4 to A.                    ( page 188) to separately adjust the air
   Press button a or 8 repeatedly up or
                                                                                            distribution on each side of the passenger
   down until the display shows the de-          The indicator lamp above the thumb-
                                                                                            compartment. The following symbols are
   sired temperature.                            wheel comes on. The temperature is
                                                                                            found on the controls:
                                                 automatically adjusted to the set value.
   The automatic climate control system
   will accordingly adjust the interior air                                                 Symbol        Function
                                              Turning on warm air
   temperature.                                                                             h             Directs air through the cen-
                                                 Turn thumbwheel 4 in the direction of                    ter air vents
                                                 the white marking.
                                                                                            d             Directs air to the windows
                                                 Warm air will enter from the center air
                                                                                            »             Directs air into the entire
                                                 vent.
                                                                                                          vehicle interior
                                                                                            c             Directs air to the footwells




                                                                                                                                  189
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control


Adjusting manually                              Windows fogged on the inside                  Set blower to the maximum speed.
   Press left or right button U.                   Press button ± to switch on the air        Adjust left and right air vents 1
                                                   conditioning ( page 188).                  and 6 upwards ( page 185).
   The button emerges and the h,
   », d and c symbols become                       The indicator lamp in the button goes      Increase temperature setting.
   visible.                                        out.                                       Open the side air vents 9 and direct
   Turn the marking on the regulator to            Press button , to switch off the air       them onto the side windows
   the desired symbol.                             recirculation ( page 188).                 ( page 185).
   The air will be directed to the vents cor-      The indicator lamp on the button goes
                                                                                           Windshield fogged on the outside
   responding to this symbol.                      out.
                                                                                              Switch the windshield wipers on
                                                   Make sure left and right button U
Adjusting automatically                                                                       ( page 54).
                                                   emerges.
   Press left or right button U until it           The h, », d and                            Press on both U buttons until they
   clicks in.                                      c symbols become visible.                  click in.
   The h, », d and c sym-                                                                     The h, », d and c sym-
                                                   Press left and right d button.
   bols are no longer visible.                                                                bols are no longer visible.
   The air distribution is adjusted auto-
   matically.




190
                                                                                                                  Controls in detail
                                                                                                        Automatic climate control


Adjusting air volume                         Maximum cooling MAXCOOL                           Defrosting

Use air volume control 9 ( page 188) for     If the left and right air distribution controls      i
both automatic and manual air volume ad-     as well as the air volume control are set
                                                                                                  These settings should only be selected
justment.                                    to U and there is a high need for cool-
                                                                                                  for a short time.
                                             ing, the display “AUTO MAXCOOL” appears.
Adjusting automatically
                                             This provides the fastest possible cooling        Activating
   Press A on air volume switch 9            of the vehicle interior (when windows and
   ( page 188).                              sliding/pop-up roof are closed).                     Press button P ( page 188).

   The display shows “AUTO”. The air vol-                                                         The indicator lamp on the button
   ume is adjusted automatically.                                                                 comes on.
                                                                                               Switch off air recirculation, if selected.
Adjusting manually
                                                                                                  Press button , ( page 188).
Reducing air volume                                                                               The indicator lamp on the button goes
                                                                                                  out.
   Press switch 9 down until the desired
   air volume is reached.                                                                         Close center air vents.
   The display shows the current level.                                                           Adjust side air vents upwards.

Increasing air volume                                                                          Deactivating
   Press switch 9 up until the desired air                                                        Press button P ( page 188).
   volume is reached.                                                                             The indicator lamp on the button goes
   The display shows the current level.                                                           out. Defrosting is turned off.


                                                                                                                                       191
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control


Air recirculation mode                                                                                i
                                                Warning!                                  G           The air recirculation mode is activated
Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
                                                                                                      automatically:
unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle      Never operate the side windows and the
from the outside. This setting cuts off the     tilt/sliding sunroof if there is the possibility          at high outside temperatures
intake of outside air and recirculates the      of anyone being harmed by the closing pro-
                                                                                                          if the concentration of carbon mon-
air in the passenger compartment.               cedure.
                                                                                                          oxide and nitrogen oxide in the out-
                                                In the event that the procedure causes po-                side air increases beyond a
 Warning!                               G       tential danger, the closing of the side win-              predetermined level, for example in
                                                dows can be immediately halted by                         a tunnel.
 When the outside temperature is below          releasing the , button or by pressing the
                                                                                                      Please note that the charcoal filter
 41°F (5°C), only switch to air recirculation   respective window switch. The closing of the
                                                                                                      must be activated ( page 193) for the
 mode for short periods to prevent window       tilt/sliding sunroof can be immediately halt-
                                                                                                      air recirculation mode to be activated
 fogging.                                       ed by releasing the , button or by mov-
                                                                                                      automatically.
                                                ing the tilt/sliding sunroof switch in the
                                                overhead control panel in any direction.              If you have turned off the air condition-
Activating
                                                                                                      ing ( page 195) or the outside
   Press button , ( page 188).                                                                        temperature is below 41°F (5°C), the
   The indicator lamp on the button                                                                   air recirculation mode will not switch
   comes on.                                                                                          on automatically.

   i                                                                                               Deactivating
   If you keep button , pressed, the                                                                  Press button , ( page 188).
   side windows and the sliding/pop-up
   roof will close.                                                                                   The indicator lamp on the button goes
                                                                                                      out.

192
                                                                                                                 Controls in detail
                                                                                                     Automatic climate control


   i                                            Charcoal filter
   If you keep button , pressed, the
                                                                                             Warning!                                  G
                                                An activated charcoal filter markedly re-
   side windows and the sliding/pop-up
                                                duces bad odors and removes pollutants       Never operate the side windows and the
   roof will return to their previous posi-
                                                from air entering the passenger compart-     tilt/sliding sunroof if there is the possibility
   tion.
                                                ment.                                        of anyone being harmed by the closing pro-
                                                                                             cedure.
The air recirculation mode is deactivated       Activating                                   In the event that the procedure causes po-
automatically:
                                                   Press button e ( page 188).               tential danger, the procedure can be imme-
   after five minutes if the outside temper-                                                 diately halted by releasing the e button
   ature is below approximately 41°F               The indicator lamp on the button          or by pressing the respective window
   (5°C)                                           comes on.                                 switch. The closing of the tilt/sliding sun-
   after five minutes if the air conditioning      i                                         roof can be immediately halted by releasing
   is turned off                                                                             the e button or by moving the tilt/slid-
                                                   If you keep button e pressed, the
                                                                                             ing sunroof switch in the overhead control
   after 30 minutes if the outside temper-         side windows and the sliding/pop-up
                                                                                             panel in any direction.
   ature is above approximately 41°F               roof will close.
   (5°C)
                                                                                            Deactivating
At outside temperatures above 79°F
(26°C) the system will not automatically                                                       Press button e ( page 188).
switch back to outside air. A quantity of                                                      The indicator lamp on the button goes
outside air is added after approximately                                                       out.
30 minutes.




                                                                                                                                        193
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control


   i                                          Rear window defroster
   If you keep button e pressed, the
                                                                                           Warning!                              G
                                              The rear window defroster uses a large
   side windows and the sliding/pop-up
                                              amount of power. To keep battery drain to    Any accumulation of snow and ice should be
   roof will return to their previous posi-
                                              a minimum, switch off the defroster as       removed from the rear window before driv-
   tions.
                                              soon as the rear window is clear. The de-    ing. Visibility could otherwise be impaired,
                                              froster is automatically deactivated after   endangering you and others.
The system switches automatically to the      approximately 6 to 17 minutes of opera-
air recirculation mode if the carbon          tion depending on the outside tempera-
monoxide (CO) or nitrogen oxide (NOX)                                                        !
                                              ture.
concentration of the outside air increases                                                   If the rear window defroster switches
beyond a predetermined level, for example                                                    off too soon and the indicator lamp
                                              Activating
in a tunnel.                                                                                 starts flashing, this means that too
                                                 Press button F ( page 188).                 many electrical consumers are operat-
The automatic air recirculation mode does
                                                 The indicator lamp on the button            ing simultaneously and there is insuffi-
not function if ± mode is selected or if
                                                 comes on.                                   cient voltage in the battery. The system
the outside temperature has fallen below
                                                                                             responds automatically by deactivating
41°F (5°C).
                                              Deactivating                                   the rear window defroster.
The activated charcoal filter should be
                                                 Press button F ( page 188) again.           As soon as the battery has sufficient
switched off when windows fog up on the
                                                                                             voltage, the rear window defroster au-
inside, or if the passenger compartment          The indicator lamp on the button goes       tomatically turns itself back on.
needs to be quickly heated or cooled             out.
down.




194
                                                                                                               Controls in detail
                                                                                                     Automatic climate control


Deactivating the climate control sys-         Air conditioning                               Activating
tem
                                                                                             Moist air can fog up the windows. You can
                                              The air conditioning is operational while
                                                                                             dehumidify the air with the air condition-
                                              the engine is running and cools the interior
Deactivating                                                                                 ing.
                                              air to the temperature set by the operator.
It is possible to completely deactivate the                                                     Press ± again ( page 188).
automatic climate control system.                i
                                                                                                The indicator lamp on the button ±
                                                 Condensation may drip out from under-
   Press button M ( page 188).                                                                  goes out.
                                                 neath the vehicle. This is normal and
   The display shows “0”.                        not an indication of a malfunction.         The air conditioning uses the refrigerant
                                                                                             R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs
Reactivating                                  Deactivating                                   which are harmful to the ozone layer.
There are several ways to reactivate the      It is possible to deactivate the air condi-       !
automatic climate control system:             tioning (cooling) function of the automatic       If the ± button on the automatic cli-
   Press one of the following buttons,        climate control system. The air in the vehi-      mate control panel starts to flash, this
   M, P, U, a temperature con-                cle will then no longer be cooled or dehu-        indicates that the air conditioning is
   trol switch ( page 188) or air volume      midified.                                         losing refrigerant. The compressor has
   switch 9 on the climate control pan-          Press button ± ( page 188).                    turned itself off. The air conditioning
   el.                                                                                          cannot be turned on again.
                                                 The indicator lamp on the button ±
                                                 comes on.                                      Have the air conditioning checked at
                                                                                                the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
                                                                                                Center.




                                                                                                                                  195
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control


Residual heat and ventilation                   Deactivating                                Ventilated storage compartment
                                                   Press button T ( page 188).
With the engine switched off, it is possible                                                Depending on vehicle model and configu-
to continue to heat or ventilate the interior      The indicator lamp on button T           ration, your vehicle is equipped with a stor-
for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes           goes out.                                age compartment under the front armrest
use of the residual heat produced by the        The residual heat is automatically turned   ( page 234) which can be ventilated
engine.                                         off:                                        when the automatic air conditioning is
                                                                                            switched on. If so equipped, the switch is
Activating                                         when the ignition is switched on         located inside the storage compartment in
                                                   after about 30 minutes                   the front. The air temperature is about the
   Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
                                                                                            same as that of the center air vents.
   to position 1 or 0, or remove it from           if the battery voltage drops
   the starter switch.                                                                      The air volume is dependent on the setting
   Press button T ( page 188).
                                                   i                                        of:
                                                   How long the system will provide heat-      Air distribution control
   The indicator lamp on button T                  ing depends on the coolant tempera-
   comes on.                                       ture and the temperature set by the         Air volume control
                                                   operator. The blower will run at speed      Air vents in the dashboard
                                                   setting 1 regardless of the air
                                                                                            The air temperature is about the same as
                                                   distribution control setting.
                                                                                            that of the dashboard air vents. It cannot
                                                                                            be regulated separately.




196
                                                                                                          Controls in detail
                                                                                                Automatic climate control


Switching ventilation on                       Rear passenger compartment adjust-       To open center air vents and to adjust the
                                               able air vents                           booster blower:
   Open the storage compartment in front
   of the armrest, see “Storage compart-                                                   Turn thumbwheel 3.
   ment below the front armrest”
   ( page 234)                                                                             i
                                                                                           The booster blower allows air volume
   Push upper portion of switch.
                                                                                           speed to the rear passenger compart-
                                                                                           ment to be increased at four different
Switching ventilation off
                                                                                           levels.
   Open the storage compartment in front
                                                                                           The temperature at the air vents for
   of the armrest, see “Storage compart-
                                                                                           rear passenger compartment 1
   ment below the front armrest”
                                                                                           and 2 is the same as at the dashboard
   ( page 234)                                 1 Left center air vent, adjustable          center air vents.
   Push lower portion of switch.               2 Right center air vent adjustable
                                               3 Thumbwheel for center air vents with
   !                                             adjustable booster blower
   Do not obstruct the air vent in the stor-
   age compartment.

   i
   The compartment can get very warm
   due to its confined space. When storing
   heat sensitive objects in the compart-
   ment, close the air vent while heating
   the passenger compartment.

                                                                                                                             197
Controls in detail
Power windows


Opening and closing the power                  Additional switches for the rear windows
                                                                                                The closing of the rear side windows can be
windows                                        are located on the rear center console.
                                                                                                immediately halted by releasing the switch.
The side windows are opened and closed                                                          The door windows are equipped with the ex-
electrically. The switches for all side win-                                                    press-close and automatic reversal func-
dows are on the driver’s door. A switch for                                                     tion. If the window encounters an
the front passenger window is on the re-                                                        obstruction that blocks its path in a circum-
spective door.                                                                                  stance where you pressed the switch past
                                                                                                the resistance point and released it to close
                                                                                                the window, the automatic reversal function
                                                                                                will stop the window and open it slightly.
                                                                                                If the window encounters an obstruction
                                               6 Left rear window                               that blocks its path in a circumstance where
                                               7 Right rear window                              you are closing the window by pressing and
                                                                                                holding the switch, by pressing and holding
                                                                                                button ‹ on the SmartKey, or by press-
                                                Warning!                               G        ing and holding the lock button (vehicles
                                                When closing the windows, make sure that        with KEYLESS-GO*) on the door handle, the
1 Left front window                                                                             automatic reversal function will not operate.
                                                there is no danger of anyone being harmed
2 Right front window
                                                by the closing procedure.                       When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
3 Right rear window
                                                The closing of the door windows can be im-      SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
4 Left rear window
                                                mediately halted by releasing the switch or,    from the starter switch, take it with you, and
5 Rear window override switch
                                                if the switch was pressed past the resis-       lock the vehicle.
  ( page 78)
                                                tance point and released, by pressing the re-
                                                spective switch.


198
                                                                                                                 Controls in detail
                                                                                                                      Power windows


                                                  i                                          Closing the windows
Do not leave children unattended in the ve-
hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.     With the SmartKey in starter switch po-       Press switch 1 to 4 at the
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may         sition 0 or removed from the starter          symbol j to the resistance point.
cause an accident and/or serious personal         switch, the power windows can be op-
                                                                                                The corresponding window will move
injury.                                           erated:
                                                                                                upwards until you release the switch.
                                                      until you open the driver’s or front
  i                                                   passenger’s door
                                                                                              Warning                                 G
  You can also open or close the win-                 for at least five minutes.
  dows using the SmartKey, see “Sum-                                                          If you press and hold the switch up when
  mer opening feature” ( page 201) and                                                        closing the window, and upward movement
                                                  Switch on ignition ( page 34).
  “Convenience closing feature”                                                               of the window is blocked by some obstruc-
  ( page 201).                                                                                tion including but not limited to arms, hands,
                                                Opening the windows
  You can close and reopen the windows                                                        fingers, etc., the automatic reversal will not
                                                  Press switch 1 to 4 at the
  using the air recirculation button ,            symbol k to the resistance point.
                                                                                              operate.
  or the charcoal filter button e in the
  climate control panel ( page 188).              The corresponding window will move         Fully opening the windows
                                                  downwards until you release the            (Express-open)
                                                  switch.
  i                                                                                             Press switch 1 to 4 at the
  Operating the windows from the rear is                                                        symbol k past the resistance point
  not possible if you activate the override                                                     and release.
  switch ( page 78).
                                                                                                The corresponding window opens com-
                                                                                                pletely.



                                                                                                                                       199
Controls in detail
Power windows


Fully closing the windows                          !                                           Synchronizing the power windows
(Express-close)                                    If the upward movement of the window
                                                   is blocked during the closing proce-           after the battery has been disconnect-
   Press switch 1 to 4 at the
                                                                                                  ed
   symbol j past the resistance point              dure, the window will stop and open
   and release.                                    slightly.Remove the obstruction, press         if the power windows cannot be fully
                                                   the respective power window switch at          opened (Express-open) or closed
   The corresponding window closes com-
                                                   the symbol j again past the resis-             (Express-close)
   pletely.
                                                   tance point and release.If the window
                                                                                               Each power window must be synchronized.
                                                   still does not close when there is no ob-
 Warning!                               G          struction, press and hold the respec-          Close all doors.
                                                   tive power window switch at the                Switch on ignition ( page 34).
 Driver's door only:                               symbol j. The side window will
 If within five seconds you again press the        then close without the obstruction sen-        Press and hold switch 1 to 4 at the
 switch past the resistance point and re-          sor function.                                  symbol j until the windows are
 lease, the automatic reversal will not func-                                                     completely closed.
 tion.                                          Stopping windows during Express-op-               Hold on to switches 1 to 4 for ap-
                                                eration                                           proximately one second.
                                                   Briefly press the respective power win-        The power windows are synchronized.
                                                   dow switch again.




200
                                                                                                         Controls in detail
                                                                                                             Power windows


Summer opening feature                                                                 Convenience closing feature

If the weather is warm, you can ventilate                                              When you lock the vehicle, you can close
the vehicle before driving off by simulta-                                             the windows and tilt/sliding sunroof simul-
neously:                                                                               taneously.
   opening the side windows                                                               Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey or
                                                                                          SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* at the
   opening the tilt/sliding sunroof
                                                                                          driver’s outside door handle
   turning on the seat ventilation* for the                                               ( page 201).
   driver’s seat
                                              Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey or      Press and hold button ‹ until the
   i                                          SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* at the            windows and tilt/sliding sunroof are
   The seat ventilation* for the driver’s     driver’s outside door handle.               completely closed.
   seat is automatically set to the highest   Press and hold button Œ until the           Release button ‹ to interrupt pro-
   level if activated via summer opening      windows and tilt/sliding sunroof have       cedure.
   feature.                                   reached the desired position.
                                              Release button Πto interrupt pro-
                                              cedure.




                                                                                                                            201
Controls in detail
Power windows


Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
   Press and hold button ‹ or the lock
                                             Warning!                                G
   button at the outside door handle         When closing the windows and the tilt/slid-
   ( page 60) until the side windows and     ing sunroof, make sure that there is no dan-
   the tilt/sliding sunroof are completely   ger of anyone being harmed by the closing
   closed.                                   procedure.
   Release button Πor the lock button       If potential danger exists, proceed as fol-
   at the outside door handle to interrupt   lows:
   procedure.
                                                 Release button ‹ to reverse direc-
                                                 tion of movement, press button Πor
                                                 opening or button ‹ for closing.
                                             Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
                                                 Pull on the door handle and hold firmly.
                                                 The side windows and the tilt/sliding
                                                 sunroof will open for as long as the door
                                                 handle is held but the door is not
                                                 opened.




202
                                                                                                                Controls in detail
                                                                                                     Power tilt/sliding sunroof
   Power tilt/sliding sunroof
Opening and closing the power                  With the sunroof closed or tilted open, a
tilt/sliding sunroof                           screen can be slid into the roof opening to   Warning!                                G
                                               guard against sun rays. When sliding the
The tilt/sliding sunroof can be opened and     sunroof open, the screen will also retract.   When closing the tilt/sliding sunroof, make
closed electrically. The switch for the                                                      sure that there is no danger of anyone being
tilt/sliding sunroof is on the overhead con-                                                 harmed by the closing procedure.
trol panel.                                                                                  The closing procedure of the tilt/sliding sun-
                                                                                             roof can be immediately halted by releasing
                                                                                             the switch or, if the switch was moved past
                                                                                             the resistance point and released, by mov-
                                                                                             ing the switch in any direction.
                                                                                             The tilt/sliding sunroof is made out of glass.
                                                                                             In the event of an accident, the glass may
                                                                                             shatter. This may result in an opening in the
                                                                                             roof.
                                                                                             In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing
1 Push up to raise sunroof at rear                                                           their seat belts or not wearing them properly
2 Pull down to lower sunroof at rear                                                         may be thrown out of the opening. Such an
3 Push forward to slide sunroof closed                                                       opening also presents a potential for injury
4 Push back to slide sunroof open                                                            for occupants wearing their seat belts
                                                                                             properly as entire body parts or portions of
                                                                                             them may protrude from the passenger
                                                                                             compartment.




                                                                                                                                      203
Controls in detail
Power tilt/sliding sunroof


                                                  i                                              Switch on ignition ( page 34).
 When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
 SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*            You can also open or close the tilt/slid-
                                                  ing sunroof using the SmartKey, see         Opening and closing the power
 from the starter switch, take it with you, and
                                                  “Summer opening feature”                    tilt/sliding sunroof
 lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-
 tended in the vehicle, or with access to an      ( page 201) and “Convenience clos-             To open, close, raise or lower the
 unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi-      ing feature” ( page 201).                      tilt/sliding sunroof, move the switch to
 cle equipment can cause an accident              You can close and reopen the tilt/slid-        resistance point in the required
 and/or serious personal injury.                  ing sunroof using the air recirculation        direction 1 to 4.
                                                  button , or the charcoal filter                Release the sunroof switch when the
   !                                              button e in the climate control pan-           tilt/sliding sunroof has reached the de-
   To avoid damaging the seals, do not            el ( page 188).                                sired position.
   transport any objects with sharp edges
   which can stick out of the tilt/sliding        i                                           Fully opening (Express-open) and clos-
   sunroof.                                       With the SmartKey in starter switch po-     ing (Express-close) the power the
                                                  sition 0 or removed from the starter        tilt/sliding sunroof
   Do not open the tilt/sliding sunroof if
   there is snow or ice on the roof, as this      switch, the tilt/sliding sunroof can be        To open, close, raise or lower the
   could result in malfunctions.                  operated                                       tilt/sliding sunroof, move the switch
                                                                                                 past the resistance point in the re-
   The tilt/sliding sunroof can be opened             until you open the driver’s or pas-
                                                                                                 quired direction 1 to 4 and release.
   or closed manually should an electrical            senger door
   malfunction occur ( page 370).                                                                The tilt/sliding sunroof opens or closes
                                                      for up to approximately five min-
                                                                                                 completely.
                                                      utes.




204
                                                                                                         Controls in detail
                                                                                               Power tilt/sliding sunroof


i                                           Stopping the power tilt/sliding sunroof       Switch on ignition ( page 34).
The selecting a tilt/sliding sunroof        during Express-operation
                                                                                          Press and hold the sunroof switch in di-
opening position feature is activated          Move the switch in any direction.          rection of arrow 1 until the tilt/sliding
for Canada vehicles, but deactivated                                                      sunroof is fully raised at the rear.
for U.S. vehicles at the factory. If you       i
                                                                                          Keep holding the sunroof switch in the
wish to have it activated, contact an au-      If the movement of the tilt/sliding sun-
                                                                                          direction of arrow 1 for approximately
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center.                 roof is blocked during the closing pro-
                                                                                          one second.
To select a tilt/sliding sunroof opening       cedure, the sunroof will stop and
                                               reopen slightly.                           Check the Express-open feature
position, press the sunroof switch to
                                                                                          ( page 204).
the resistance point and release it
when the tilt/sliding sunroof has           Synchronizing the power tilt/sliding          If the tilt/sliding sunroof opens com-
reached the desired position. The           sunroof                                       pletely, the sunroof is synchronized.
tilt/sliding sunroof now opens to the                                                     Otherwise repeat the above steps.
position set when the sunroof switch is     The tilt/sliding sunroof must be synchro-
pressed past the resistance point in the    nized
“open” direction.                              after the battery has been
                                               disconnected or discharged
                                               after the tilt/sliding sunroof has been
                                               closed manually ( page 370)
                                               the tilt/sliding sunroof does not open
                                               smoothly
                                               after a malfunction




                                                                                                                             205
Controls in detail
Driving systems


The driving systems of your vehicle are de-   Cruise control
scribed on the following pages:                                                             Warning!                                 G
                                              Cruise control automatically maintains the
   Cruise control and Distronic*, with                                                      Cruise control is a convenience system de-
                                              speed you set for your vehicle.
   which the vehicle can maintain a preset                                                  signed to assist the driver during vehicle op-
   speed.                                     Use of cruise control is recommended for
                                                                                            eration. The driver is and must remain at all
                                              driving at a constant speed for extended
   ABC with vehicle level control system,                                                   times responsible for the vehicle speed and
                                              periods of time. You can set or resume
   with which you can change vehicle sus-                                                   for safe brake operation.
                                              cruise control at any speed over 20 mph
   pension characteristics.                                                                 Only use cruise control if the road, traffic
                                              (30 km/h).
   Parktronic*, which serves as a parking                                                   and weather conditions make it advisable to
                                              The cruise control function is operated by    travel at a steady speed.
   assistant.
                                              means of the cruise control lever.
For information on the BAS, ABS, and ESP                                                        The use of cruise control can be danger-
                                              The cruise control lever is the uppermost         ous on winding roads or in heavy traffic
driving systems, see “Driving safety sys-
                                              lever on the left-hand side of the steering       because conditions do not allow safe
tems” ( page 80).
                                              column ( page 22).                                driving at a steady speed.
                                                                                                The use of cruise control can be danger-
                                                                                                ous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in
                                                                                                tire traction can result in wheel spin and
                                                                                                loss of control.
                                                                                                Deactivate cruise control when driving
                                                                                                in fog.
                                                                                            The “Resume” function should only be oper-
                                                                                            ated if the driver is fully aware of the previ-
                                                                                            ously set speed and wishes to resume this
                                                                                            particular preset speed.


206
                                                                                                                     Controls in detail
                                                                                                                         Driving systems


                                                     Remove your foot from the accelerator       or
                                                     pedal.
                                                                                                      Briefly push the cruise control lever in
                                                     Cruise control is activated.                     direction of arrow 3.
                                                  The selected speed appears in the multi-            Cruise control is canceled. The last
                                                  function display for approximately five sec-        speed set is stored for later use.
                                                  onds, and the corresponding speedometer
                                                  segments from the selected speed to the             !
                                                  vehicle maximum speed are illuminated.              Moving the gear selector lever to
                                                                                                      position N while driving also cancels
                                                     i                                                cruise control. However, the gear se-
1 Sets current or higher speed
2 Sets current or lower speed                        On uphill or downhill grades, cruise             lector lever should not be moved to
3 Cancels cruise control                             control may not be able to maintain the          position N while driving, except to
4 Resumes at last set speed                          set speed. Once the grade eases, the             coast when the vehicle is in danger of
                                                     set speed will be resumed.                       skidding (e.g. on icy roads).
Setting current speed
                                                  Canceling cruise control                            i
   Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
   speed.                                         There are several ways to cancel cruise             The last stored speed is canceled when
                                                  control:                                            you turn off the engine.
   Briefly lift the cruise control lever in di-
   rection of arrow 1 or depress in direc-           Step on the brake pedal.
   tion of arrow 2.                                  Cruise control is canceled. The last
   The current speed is set.                         speed set is stored for later use.




                                                                                                                                         207
Controls in detail
Driving systems


Setting a higher speed                            i                                            Setting to last stored speed
                                                  When you use the cruise control lever        (“Resume” function)
   Lift cruise control lever in direction of
   arrow 1 and hold it up until the de-           to decelerate, the transmission will au-
   sired speed is reached.                        tomatically downshift if the engine’s         Warning!                                G
                                                  braking power does not brake the vehi-
   Release cruise control lever.
                                                  cle sufficiently.                             The speed stored in memory should only be
   The new speed is set.                                                                        set again if prevailing road conditions per-
                                               Fine adjustment in 1 mph                         mit. Possible acceleration or deceleration
   i                                           (Canada: 1 km/h) increments                      differences arising from returning to the pre-
   Depressing the accelerator pedal does                                                        set speed could cause an accident and/or
   not deactivate cruise control. After        Faster                                           serious injury to you and others.
   brief acceleration (e.g. for passing),
   cruise control will resume the last            Briefly tip cruise control lever in direc-
                                                  tion of arrow 1.                                Briefly push cruise control lever in di-
   speed set.
                                                                                                  rection of arrow 4.
                                               Slower                                             The cruise control resumes the last set
Setting a lower speed
                                                  Briefly tip cruise control lever in direc-      speed.
   Depress cruise control lever in direc-
   tion of arrow 2 and hold it down until         tion of arrow 2.                                Remove your foot from the accelerator
   the desired speed is reached.                                                                  pedal.

   Release cruise control lever.                                                               The selected speed appears in the multi-
                                                                                               function display for approximately five sec-
   The new speed is set.                                                                       onds, and the corresponding speedometer
                                                                                               segments from the selected speed to the
                                                                                               vehicle maximum speed are illuminated.



208
                                                                                                                          Controls in detail
                                                                                                                              Driving systems


Distronic*
                                                   It is the driver’s responsibility at all times to
                                                   be attentive to traffic and road conditions
                                                                                                       Warning!                                G
When activated, the Distronic adaptive
                                                   and to provide the steering, braking and oth-       Distronic requires familiarity with its opera-
cruise control system increases driving
                                                   er driving inputs necessary to retain control       tional characteristics. We strongly recom-
convenience afforded by the cruise control
                                                   of the vehicle.                                     mend that you review the following
during travel on expressways and other
major roads.                                                                                           information carefully before operating the
                                                                                                       system.
   If the Distronic distance sensor detects        Warning!                                  G
   a slower moving vehicle directly ahead,
   your vehicle speed will be reduced so           Distronic is a convenience system. Its speed          i
   that you follow that vehicle at a preset        adjustment reduction capability is intended           USA only:
   distance.                                       to make cruise control more effective and             This device complies with Part 15 of
   If there is no vehicle directly ahead of        usable when traffic speeds vary. However, it          the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
   you, Distronic will function in the same        is not intended to, nor does it, replace the          the following two conditions:
   way as cruise control ( page 206).              need for extreme care. The responsibility for
                                                                                                             This device may not cause harmful
                                                   the vehicle speed and the distance to the ve-
                                                                                                             interference, and
                                                   hicle ahead, including most importantly
 Warning!                                 G        brake operation to assure safe stopping dis-              this device must accept any inter-
                                                   tance, always rests with the driver.                      ference received, including interfer-
 Distronic adaptive cruise control is no sub-                                                                ence that may cause undesired
                                                   Distronic cannot take street and traffic con-
 stitute for active driving involvement. It does                                                             operation.
                                                   ditions into account.
 not react to stationary objects, nor does it
                                                                                                         Any unauthorized modification to this
 recognize or predict the curvature and lane
                                                                                                         device could void the user’s authority
 layout or the movement of vehicles ahead.
                                                                                                         to operate the equipment.
 Distronic can only apply a maximum of 20%
 of the vehicle’s braking power.


                                                                                                                                                209
Controls in detail
Driving systems


   i
   Canada only:
                                                 Warning!                                 G        Switch off Distronic:
                                                                                                       when changing from the left to the right
   This device complies with RSS-210 of                                                                lane if vehicles are moving more slowly
                                                 Use of Distronic can be dangerous on slip-
   Industry Canada. Operation is subject                                                               in the left lane
                                                 pery roads. Rapid changes in tire traction
   to the following two conditions:
                                                 can result in wheel spin and loss of control.         when entering a turn lane or highway off
       This device may not cause interfer-       Distronic does not act upon adverse sight             ramp
       ence, and                                 distance conditions. Do not use Distronic             in complex driving situations, such as in
       this device must accept any inter-        during conditions of fog and heavy rain,              highway construction zones
       ference received, including interfer-     snow or sleet.                                    In these situations, Distronic will continue to
       ence that may cause undesired                                                               maintain the set speed unless deactivated.
       operation of the device.                                                                    Distronic is designed and intended only to
   Any unauthorized modification to this         Warning!                                 G        maintain a set speed and keep a set dis-
   device could void the user’s authority                                                          tance from moving objects in front of it.
                                                 Close attention to road and traffic condi-
   to operate the equipment.
                                                 tions is imperative at all times, regardless of
                                                 whether or not Distronic is activated.            Warning!                                 G
 Warning!                               G        Use of Distronic can be dangerous on wind-
                                                 ing roads or in heavy traffic because condi-      The “Resume” function should only be oper-
 Distronic cannot take street and traffic con-   tions do not allow safe driving at a steady       ated if the driver is fully aware of the previ-
 ditions into account. Only use Distronic if     speed.                                            ously set speed and wishes to resume this
 the road, weather and traffic conditions                                                          particular preset speed.
                                                 Distronic will not react to stationary objects
 make it advisable to travel at a steady         in the roadway (e.g. a stopped vehicle in a
 speed.                                          traffic jam or a disabled vehicle). Distronic
                                                 will also not respond to oncoming vehicles.


210
                                                                                                          Controls in detail
                                                                                                              Driving systems


Distronic displays in the speedometer                                                       Immediately brake the vehicle to avoid
dial                                                                                        a collision.
                                                                                            Under no circumstances should the
                                                                                            driver await the intermittent warning
                                                                                            sound before braking.
                                                                                            The intermittent warning sound ceases
                                                                                            and the red distance warning
                                                                                            lamp l goes out when the neces-
                                                                                            sary distance to the vehicle ahead is
                                             Segments                                       again established.
                                             If Distronic detects a vehicle directly
Set speed                                    ahead, the segments (representing the dif-
If Distronic is activated, one or two seg-   ference) between the speed of the vehicle
ments come on in the mph scale around        ahead and the set speed comes on.
the set speed.                               If Distronic calculates that there is a dan-
                                             ger of collision ( page 217):
   i
   The vehicle speed displayed on the           The distance warning lamp l in the
   speedometer can briefly vary from the        instrument cluster comes on.
   speed setting on the Distronic system.       An intermittent warning sounds.




                                                                                                                             211
Controls in detail
Driving systems


                                                                                                    Distronic menu in the control system
 Warning!                                G        Warning!                                 G        In the Distronic menu you see the current
 An intermittent warning sounds and the           Distronic brakes your vehicle with a maxi-        settings for Distronic. What appears in the
 distance warning lamp l in the instru-           mum of 6.5 ft/s2 (2 m/s2). This corre-            display depends on whether Distronic and
 ment cluster is illuminated if the Distronic     sponds to about 20% of the maximum                the distance warning function are turned
 system calculates that the distance to the       deceleration ability of your vehicle.             on or off.
 vehicle ahead and your vehicle’s current         Distronic brakes the vehicle in an effort to         Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
 speed indicate that Distronic will not be ca-    restore the preset distance or to maintain           until you see one of the following dis-
 pable of slowing the vehicle sufficiently to     the speed. The brake pedal is automatically          plays.
 maintain the preset following distance,          applied as this happens which results in the
 which creates a danger of a collision.           brake pedal moving.
 Immediately brake the vehicle to increase        Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times, in-
 the distance between your vehicle and the        cluding the area under the brake pedal. Ob-
 vehicle in front of you. The warning sound is    jects stored in this area may impair pedal
 intended as a final caution that you have not    movement which could interfere with the
 interceded with your own braking inputs to       braking ability of the Distronic system.
 avoid a potentially dangerous situation. Do
 not wait for the operation of the warning sig-   Do not place your foot under the brake pedal
 nal to intercede with your own braking, as       – your foot could become caught.
 that will result in potentially dangerous
 emergency braking which will not always re-
 sult in an impact being avoided.
 Tailgating increases the risk of an accident.




212
                                                                                                                  Controls in detail
                                                                                                                       Driving systems


Distronic deactivated                          Distronic activated                              Cruise control lever
If Distronic is deactivated, you can see the   If you turn Distronic on, you will see the set   The Distronic system is operated by means
standard display of Distronic in the multi-    speed in the multifunction display for           of the cruise control lever.
function display.                              about five seconds. You then see the fol-
                                                                                                The cruise control lever is the uppermost
                                               lowing display in the multifunction display.
                                                                                                lever on the left-hand side of the steering
                                                                                                column.




1 Vehicle ahead, if detected
2 Actual distance to vehicle ahead             1 Distronic activated
3 Preset distance threshold to vehicle
  ahead
4 Symbol for activated distance warning
  function
5 Your vehicle                                                                                  1 Sets current or higher speed
                                                                                                2 Sets current or lower speed
                                                                                                3 Deactivates Distronic
                                                                                                4 Resumes at last set speed




                                                                                                                                      213
Controls in detail
Driving systems


Activating Distronic                          Setting the current speed                         Setting a higher speed
You can activate Distronic if                    Accelerate or decelerate to the desired           Briefly tip the cruise control lever in di-
                                                 speed.                                            rection of arrow 1 ( page 213) to de-
   you are driving between 25 mph
                                                                                                   crease vehicle speed in increments of
   (40 km/h) and 110 mph (180 km/h)              Briefly lift the cruise control lever in di-
                                                                                                   5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h).
   the ESP is activated ( page 82)               rection of arrow 1 or depress in direc-
                                                 tion of arrow 2.                                  The new speed is set.
If Distronic has not been activated after
                                                 Distronic is activated and the current            The stored speed is displayed in the
pressing the cruise control lever you will
                                                 speed is set.                                     multifunction display for approximately
see the message --- in the multifunction
                                                                                                   five seconds ( page 213), and one or
display.                                         Remove your foot from the accelerator
                                                                                                   two segments around the stored speed
                                                 pedal.
In the following cases you cannot activate                                                         come on the speedometer
Distronic:                                       i                                                 ( page 211).
   up to two minutes after starting the en-      If you do not take your foot off of the
   gine
                                                                                                   i
                                                 accelerator completely, the following
                                                                                                   Depressing the accelerator pedal does
   when you brake                                message will appear in the multifunc-
                                                                                                   not deactivate Distronic. After brief ac-
                                                 tion display:
   if you have set the parking brake                                                               celeration (e.g. for passing), the cruise
                                                 DISTRONIC OVERRIDE
                                                                                                   control resumes the last speed set.
   if the gear selector lever is in              Distronic will not work to maintain the
   position P, R or N                            distance to a slower moving vehicles in
                                                 front of you. Your vehicle speed will
   if the ESP is switched off
                                                 then be determined only by the accel-
                                                 erator pedal position.




214
                                                                                                                     Controls in detail
                                                                                                                         Driving systems


Setting a lower speed                            Fine adjustment in 1 mph                         Setting to last stored speed
                                                 (Canada: 1 km/h) increments                      (“Resume” function)
   Briefly tip the cruise control lever in di-
   rection of arrow 2 ( page 213) to de-
   crease vehicle speed in increments of
                                                 Faster
                                                                                                   Warning!                              G
   5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h).                         Briefly tip the cruise control lever in di-
                                                    rection of arrow 4 ( page 213).                The speed stored in memory should only be
   The new speed is set.
                                                                                                   set again if prevailing road conditions per-
   The stored speed is displayed in the                                                            mit. Possible acceleration or deceleration
   multifunction display for approximately                                                         differences arising from returning to preset
   five seconds ( page 213), and one or                                                            speed could cause an accident and/or seri-
   two segments around the stored speed                                                            ous injury to you and others.
   come on the speedometer
   ( page 211).
                                                                                                     Briefly tip the cruise control lever in di-
   i                                                                                                 rection of arrow 4 ( page 213).
   When you use the cruise control lever                                                             Distronic is set to the last stored
   to decelerate, the transmission will au-                                                          speed.
   tomatically downshift if the rate of de-                                                          Remove your foot from the accelerator
   celeration is too low.                                                                            pedal.




                                                                                                                                           215
Controls in detail
Driving systems


Deactivating Distronic                             Distronic deactivates automatically when:       Setting the following distance in
                                                                                                   Distronic
There are several ways to deactivate the              You set the parking brake.
Distronic system:                                                                                  You can set the specified following dis-
                                                      you drive slower than 22 mph
                                                                                                   tance for Distronic by varying the time set-
     Briefly tip the cruise control lever in di-      (35 km/h)
                                                                                                   ting between 1.0 and 2.0 seconds. Using
     rection of arrow 3 ( page 213).                  The ESP is active ( page 82) or you          this time setting and the current speed of
or                                                    deactivate the ESP.                          your vehicle, Distronic calculates and sets
     Step on the brake pedal.                         You move the gear selector lever into        the required following distance to the vehi-
                                                      position N.                                  cle ahead. The set distance will be shown
     Distronic will be deactivated. The last                                                       in the multifunction display field.
     speed set will be stored into memory.            A signal will sound. The DISTRONIC OFF
                                                      message appears in the multifunction
     i                                                display for approximately five seconds.       Warning!                                 G
     The following message will appear in
     the multifunction display for approxi-                                                         It is up to the driver to exercise discretion to
     mately five seconds: DISTRONIC OFF.
                                                    Warning!                              G         select the appropriate setting given road
                                                                                                    conditions, traffic, driver’s preferred driving
     The last stored speed is deleted when          Distronic switches off and releases the         style and applicable laws and driving recom-
     you turn off the engine.                       brakes when the vehicle decelerates below       mendations for safe following distance.
                                                    the minimum speed of approximately
                                                    22 mph (35 km/h) by operation of the sys-
                                                    tem. At that time the driver must apply the
                                                    brakes in order to reduce vehicle speed fur-
                                                    ther or bring it to a stop.




216
                                                                                                             Controls in detail
                                                                                                                Driving systems


The distance warning function on/off but-    Increasing distance                           Distance warning function
ton and thumbwheel for setting distance
                                             Increasing the distance setting tells Dis-    When Distronic is deactivated, this func-
are located on the lower part of the front
                                             tronic to maintain a greater following dis-   tion will continue to warn you when recog-
center console.
                                             tance to the vehicle ahead.                   nizing a stationary obstacle or a slower
                                                                                           vehicle moving in the vehicle’s path and
                                                Turn thumbwheel 2 towards ¯.
                                                                                           the danger of a collision exists:
                                             Decreasing distance                              The distance warning lamp l in the
                                             Decreasing the distance setting tells Dis-       instrument cluster comes on
                                             tronic to maintain a shorter following dis-      An intermittent warning sounds.
                                             tance to the vehicle ahead.
                                                                                           If these warnings are issued, you must
                                                Turn thumbwheel 2 towards ®.               brake manually to maintain a safe distance
                                                                                           and avoid a collision with the vehicle
                                                                                           ahead.
1 Distance warning function on/off but-
  ton                                                                                      When pressing the brake pedal, the warn-
2 Thumbwheel for setting distance                                                          ing sound stops. The warning sound also
                                                                                           stops when the distance to the vehicle
                                                                                           ahead is sufficient again without applying
                                                                                           the brake pedal. In this case the distance
                                                                                           warning lamp l also extinguishes.




                                                                                                                                217
Controls in detail
Driving systems


                                                  Activating                                  Driving with Distronic
 Warning!                                G           Press button 1.                          This section describes a number of driving
 If the distance warning lamp l in the in-                                                    situations where special precaution is re-
                                                     Indicator lamp on the button comes on.
 strument cluster comes on while driving                                                      quired on the part of the driver. Be pre-
                                                     A loudspeaker symbol appears in the
 and/or an intermittent warning sounds, im-                                                   pared to brake in such situations. This will
                                                     multifunction display ( page 213).
 mediate attention on the part of the driver is                                               deactivate the Distronic system.
 required.As required by the traffic situation,   Deactivating
 apply the brakes and navigate around a pos-
                                                     Press button 1.                           Warning!                                G
 sible obstacle. However, do not drive by re-
 lying on the distance warning function, as          Indicator lamp on the switch goes out.    Distronic works to maintain the speed se-
 this will result in an emergency braking ap-        No loudspeaker symbol appears in the      lected by the driver unless a moving obsta-
 plication. Especially depending on road sur-        multifunction display.                    cle proceeding directly ahead of it in the
 face conditions and driver reaction, this will                                                same travel direction is detected (e.g. fol-
 not always enable you to avoid a collision.                                                   lowing another vehicle ahead of you at a dis-
                                                                                               tance set by Distronic). This means that:
   i                                                                                               Your vehicle can pass another vehicle
                                                                                                   after you change lanes.
   Complex driving situations are not al-
   ways fully recognized by Distronic. This                                                        While in a sharp turn or if the vehicle in
   could result in wrong or missing dis-                                                           front is in a sharp turn, Distronic could
   tance warnings.                                                                                 lose sight of a vehicle traveling in front
                                                                                                   of it, then your vehicle could accelerate
                                                                                                   to the previously selected speed.




218
                                                                                                                    Controls in detail
                                                                                                                        Driving systems


                                                  The most likely cause for a malfunctioning      Turns and bends
Distronic regulates only the distance be-
                                                  system is a dirty sensor (located behind
tween your vehicle and those directly ahead
                                                  the hood grille), especially at times of snow
of it, but does not register stationary objects
                                                  and ice or heavy rain. In such a case, Dis-
in the road, e.g.:
                                                  tronic will switch off, and the message
    a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam            DISTRONIC CURRENTLY UNAVAILABLE SEE
    a disabled vehicle                            OPERATORS MANUAL appears in the multi-
    an oncoming vehicle                           function display.
The driver must always be on the alert, ob-       For cleaning and care of the Distronic sen-
serve all traffic and intercede as required by    sor, see “Cleaning the Distronic* system
steering or braking the vehicle.                  sensor cover” ( page 320).
                                                                                                  In turns or bends, Distronic may not detect
                                                     i                                            a moving vehicle in front, or it may detect
                                                                                                  one too soon. This may cause your vehicle
Warning!                                 G           If the message DISTRONIC CURRENTLY
                                                                                                  to brake late or unexpectedly.
                                                     UNAVAILABLE SEE OPERATORS MANUAL
Distronic should not be used in snowy or icy         disappears during driving and the last
road conditions.                                     speed stored flashes for approximately
                                                     five seconds, the dirt (e.g. slush) has
                                                     dissolved; Distronic is again operation-
                                                     al.




                                                                                                                                       219
Controls in detail
Driving systems


Offset driving                                  Lane changing                                Narrow vehicles




A vehicle traveling in your lane but offset     Distronic has not yet detected the vehicle   Because of their narrow profiles, the vehi-
from your direct line of travel may not be      changing lanes. There will be insufficient   cles traveling near the outer edges of the
detected by Distronic. There will be insuffi-   distance to the lane changing vehicle.       lane have not yet been detected by Dis-
cient distance to the vehicle ahead.                                                         tronic. There will be insufficient distance to
                                                                                             the vehicles ahead.




220
                                                                                                              Controls in detail
                                                                                                                 Driving systems


Active Body Control (ABC)                    The ABC button with the indicator lamps is    Suspension for sporty driving
                                             located on the upper part of the front cen-
                                                                                           The setting for sporty driving is selected
The ABC system automatically selects the     ter console.
                                                                                           when indicator lamp 2 is illuminated.
optimum suspension tuning and ride
height for your vehicle.                                                                      Press button 1.
                                                                                              Indicator lamp 2 comes on.
Suspension tuning
The suspension tuning is set according to:                                                 Suspension for regular driving
   your driving style                                                                      The setting for regular driving is selected
                                                                                           when indicator lamp 2 is off.
   road surface conditions
                                                                                              Press button 1.
   the vehicle loading
                                                                                              Indicator lamp 2 goes out.
   your choice of suspension style,          1 ABC button
   “sporty” or “regular”, which you select   2 Indicator lamp
   using the ABC button
                                                Start the engine.
   The selected suspension style is stored
   in memory, even after the SmartKey is
   removed from the starter switch.




                                                                                                                                 221
Controls in detail
Driving systems


Vehicle level control                             i
Your vehicle automatically adjusts its ride       These height adjustments are so small
height to                                         that you may not notice any change.
   reduce fuel consumption
                                               Select the level 1 and 2 settings only when
   increase vehicle safety                     required by current driving conditions.
The vehicle chassis ride height is raised or   Otherwise
lowered according to the selected level           Fuel consumption may increase
setting and to the vehicle speed:
                                                  Handling may be impaired
   With increasing speed, ride height is re-
   duced by up to approximately 0.95 in
   (24 mm).                                     Warning!                            G
   With decreasing speed, the ride height       To help avoid personal injury, keep hands
   is again raised to the selected vehicle      and feet away from wheel housing area, and
   level.                                       stay away from under the vehicle when low-
                                                ering the vehicle chassis.




222
                                                                                                            Controls in detail
                                                                                                               Driving systems


The following vehicle level settings can be
selected when the vehicle is stationary:

Vehicle level when Use for                      Ride height increase       Automatic lowering            Indicator lamps
stationary                                      over normal
Normal level            Normal operation        None                       Max. approx. 0.4 in (11 mm)   Both lamps off
Raised level 1          Driving with snow       Max. 0.55 in (14   mm) 1   Max. approx. 0.55 in (14 mm) One lamp on
                        chains ( page 314)
Raised level 2          Very rough road surface Max. 0.95 in (24 mm) 1     Max. approx. 0.95 in (24 mm) Both lamps on
                        conditions
1
    Dependent on load

The button with the indicator lamps is lo-                                                   Briefly press button 2 to change from
cated in the upper part of the front center                                                  one level setting to the next. When ve-
console.                                                                                     hicle is at raised level 2, pressing the
                                                                                             button will return the vehicle to normal
                                                                                             level.
                                                                                             The message:
                                                                                             ACTIVE BODY CONTROL
                                                                                             VEHICLE RISING!
                                                                                             appears in the multifunction display.
                                              1 Indicator lamps                              The display switches off when the vehi-
                                              2 Vehicle level control button                 cle is raised.


                                                                                                                               223
Controls in detail
Driving systems


   i                                         Raised level 1 (see table)                  Raised level 2 (see table)
   Pressing the button twice in quick suc-   Speed dependent lowering of vehicle chas-   Speed dependent lowering of vehicle chas-
   cession will cause the vehicle to imme-   sis (approximate values)                    sis (approximate values):
   diately raise or lower according to the
                                                between 0 mph (0 km/h) and 38 mph           between 0 mph (0 km/h) and 18 mph
   starting level.
                                                (60 km/h) - raised by approximately         (30 km/h) - raised by approximately
   The selected vehicle level setting re-       0.55 in (14 mm)                             0.95 in (24 mm)
   mains stored in memory even if the en-
                                                between 38 mph (60 km/h) and                between 18 mph (30 km/h) and
   gine is turned off and restarted.
                                                100 mph (160 km/h) - lowered pro-           38 mph (60 km/h) - lowered progres-
                                                gressively by approximately 0.55 in         sively by approx. 0.4 in (10 mm)
Normal level (see table)                        (14 mm)
                                                                                            between 38 mph (60 km/h) and
Speed dependent lowering of vehicle chas-                                                   100 mph (160 km/h) – lowered pro-
sis (approximate values):                                                                   gressively by additional approximately
   between 0 mph (0 km/h) and 40 mph                                                        0.55 in (14 mm).
   (65 km/h) – none
   between 40 mph (65 km/h) and
   87 mph (140 km/h) – lowered pro-
   gressively by approximately 0.4 in
   (11 mm).




224
                                                                                                                    Controls in detail
                                                                                                                        Driving systems


Parktronic system* (Parking assist)                                                               The Parktronic system monitors the sur-
                                                    Warning!                             G        roundings of your vehicle with six sensors
                                                                                                  in the front bumper and four sensors in the
 Warning!                                 G         Make sure no persons or animals are in the    rear bumper.
                                                    area in which you are maneuvering. You
 Parktronic is a supplemental system. It is         could otherwise injure them.
 not intended to, nor does it replace, the
 need for extreme care. The responsibility         The Parktronic system is an electronic aid
 during parking and other critical maneuvers       designed to assist the driver during park-
 always rests with the driver.                     ing maneuvers. It visually and audibly indi-
 Special attention must be paid to objects         cates the relative distance between the
 with smooth surfaces or low silhouettes           vehicle and an obstacle.
 (e.g. trailer couplings, painted posts, or road   The Parktronic system is automatically ac-
 curbs). Such objects may not be detected by       tivated when you switch on the ignition
 the system and can damage the vehicle.            and placed the gear selector lever in posi-    1 Sensors in the front bumper
 The operational function of the Parktronic        tion D, R, or N.
 system can be affected by dirty sensors, es-
                                                   The Parktronic system deactivates at
 pecially at times of snow and ice, see
                                                   speeds over approximately 11 mph
 “Cleaning the Parktronic* system sensors”
                                                   (18 km/h). At lower speeds the Parktronic
 ( page 320).
                                                   system turns on again.
 Interference caused by other ultrasonic sig-
                                                   The Parktronic system also deactivates
 nals (e.g. working jackhammers, car wash,
                                                   when you place the gear selector lever in
 or the air brakes of trucks) can cause the
                                                   position P.
 system to send erratic indications, and
 should be taken into consideration.


                                                                                                                                       225
Controls in detail
Driving systems


Range of the sensors                                                                    !
To function properly, the sensors must be                                               During parking maneuvers, pay special
free of dirt, ice, snow and slush. Clean the                                            attention to objects located above or
sensors regularly, being careful not to                                                 below the height of the sensors (e.g.
scratch or damage the sensors see “Clean-                                               planters or trailer hitches). The Park-
ing the Parktronic* system sensors”                                                     tronic system will not detect such ob-
( page 320).                                                                            jects at close range and damage to
                                                                                        your vehicle or the object may result.
                                                                                        Ultrasonic signals from outside sourc-
                                                                                        es (e.g. truck air brakes, car wash, or
                                               Front sensors                            jackhammers) may impair the opera-
                                                                                        tion of the Parktronic system.
                                               Center          approx. 40 in (100 cm)
                                               Corners          approx. 24 in (60 cm)

                                               Rear sensors

                                               Center          approx. 48 in (120 cm)
                                               Corners          approx. 32 in (80 cm)




226
                                                                                                 Controls in detail
                                                                                                     Driving systems


Minimum distance                                                               Each warning indicator is divided into six
                                                                               yellow and two red distance segments for
Center               approx. 8 in (20 cm)                                      either side of the vehicle. The Parktronic
Corners              approx. 6 in (15 cm)                                      system is ready when the border around
                                                                               the indicator is illuminated.
If the system detects an obstacle in this                                      The position of the gear selector lever de-
range, all the distance warning segments                                       termines which warning indicators will be
illuminate and you hear a warning signal. If                                   activated.
the obstacle is closer than the minimum
                                                                               Gear selector     Warning indicator
distance, the actual distance may no long-
                                                 1 Left side of the vehicle    lever position
er be indicated by the system.
                                                                               D                 Front area activated
Warning indicators                                                             R or N            Front and rear area
Visual signals indicate to the driver the rel-                                                   activated
ative distance between the sensors and an                                      P                 Neither activated
obstacle. The warning indicators for the
front area are located above the left air
vents and center air vents in the dash-
board. The warning indicator for the rear
area is integrated in the rear trim.
                                                 1 Right side of the vehicle




                                                                                                                     227
Controls in detail
Driving systems


As your vehicle approaches an object, one     Switching the Parktronic system               Switching off the Parktronic system
or more distance segments will illuminate,    on/off
                                                                                               Press button 1.
depending on the distance. When the
                                              The Parktronic system can be switched off
eighth distance segment illuminates, you                                                       Indicator lamp 2 comes on.
                                              manually.
have reached the minimum distance.
                                              The Parktronic button is located in the up-   Switching on the Parktronic system
   Front area: An intermittent acoustic
                                              per part of the front center console.            Press button 1 again.
   warning will sound as the first red dis-
   tance segment illuminates and a con-                                                        Indicator lamp 2 goes out.
   stant acoustic warning lasting a
   maximum of two seconds will sound for                                                       i
   the second red distance segment. The                                                        The Parktronic system is automatically
   signal is canceled when the gear selec-                                                     switched on when the ignition is
   tor lever is placed in position P.                                                          switched on ( page 34).
   Rear area: An intermittent acoustic
   warning will sound as the first red dis-
   tance segment illuminates and a con-
   stant acoustic warning lasting a           1 Parktronic button
   maximum of two seconds will sound for      2 Indicator lamp
   the second red distance segment. The
   signal is canceled when the gear selec-
   tor lever is placed in position D or P.




228
                                                                                             Controls in detail
                                                                                               Driving systems


Parktronic system malfunction                 If only the red distance segments illumi-
                                              nate and no acoustic warning sounds, the
If only the red distance segments illumi-
                                              Parktronic system sensors are dirty or
nate and an acoustic warning sounds,
                                              there is an interference from other radio or
there is a malfunction in the Parktronic
                                              ultrasonic signals. The Parktronic system
system. The Parktronic system will auto-
                                              will automatically switch off after 20 sec-
matically switch off after 20 seconds and
                                              onds and the indicator lamp in the Park-
the indicator lamp in the Parktronic switch
                                              tronic switch comes on.
comes on.
                                                   Switch off ignition ( page 34).
   Have the Parktronic system checked
   by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-             Clean Parktronic system sensors
   ter as soon as possible.                        ( page 320).
                                                   Switch on ignition.
                                              or
                                                   Check Parktronic system operation at
                                                   another location to rule out interfer-
                                                   ence from outside radio or ultrasonic
                                                   signals.




                                                                                                          229
Controls in detail
Loading


Roof rack*                                   Preparing roof rack installation
                                                Open trim at the trim strips in the roof.
 Warning!                            G          Secure the roof rack according to man-
                                                ufacturer’s instructions for installation.
 Use only roof racks approved by
 Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model to        !
 avoid damage to the vehicle. Follow manu-      Load the roof rack in such a way that
 facturer’s installation instructions.          the vehicle cannot be damaged while
                                                driving.
                                                Make sure
                                                    you can fully raise the sliding/
                                                    pop-up roof
                                                    you can fully open the trunk




230
                                                                                                                Controls in detail
                                                                                                                              Loading


Loading instructions                                                                          Cargo tie-down hooks
                                              Warning!                               G
The total load weight including vehicle oc-
cupants and luggage/cargo should not ex-      Always fasten items being carried as secure-
ceed the load limit or vehicle capacity       ly as possible.
weight as indicated on the corresponding      In an accident, during hard braking or sud-
placard located on the driver’s door B-pil-   den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
lar.                                          around inside the vehicle and can cause in-
                                              jury to vehicle occupants unless the items
                                              are securely fastened in the vehicle.
                                              To help avoid personal injury during a colli-
                                              sion or sudden maneuver, exercise care          Six hooks are located in the trunk.
                                              when transporting cargo. Put luggage or car-
                                                                                                 Carefully secure cargo by applying
                                              go in the trunk if possible. Do not pile lug-
                                                                                                 even load on all hooks with rope of suf-
                                              gage or cargo higher than the seat backs.
                                                                                                 ficient strength to hold down the cargo.
                                              Do not place anything on the rear-window
                                              shelf.
                                              Never drive vehicle with trunk open. Deadly
                                              carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter ve-
                                              hicle interior resulting in unconsciousness
                                              and death.




                                                                                                                                    231
Controls in detail
Useful features


Sun visor                                                                              Adjusting the vanity mirror
                                                                                          Slide the mirror to the left or to the
Vanity mirror in the sun visor                                                            right.
                                                                                          Images in the mirror appear in normal
 Warning!                               G                                                 size or larger, depending on the posi-
                                                                                          tion of the mirror.
 Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.
 Keep the mirrors in the sun visors closed                                             Document holder
 while vehicle is in motion. Reflected glare                                           You can use the plastic tab of the docu-
 can endanger you and others.                  1 Mirror lamp                           ment holder 3 to hold admission tickets,
                                               2 Mirror cover                          parking passes, or similar items in place.
                                               3 Document holder
                                                 To use mirror, lift up cover 1.
                                                 Mirror lamp 2 comes on.

                                                 i
                                                 If you disengage the sun visor from
                                                 mounting, mirror lamp 2 will switch
                                                 off ( page 183).




232
                                                                                                              Controls in detail
                                                                                                                  Useful features


Storage compartments                              Glove box                                 Unlocking the glove box
                                                                                               Insert the mechanical key into the
                                                                                               glove box lock.
 Warning!                                G
                                                                                               Turn the mechanical key to
 To help avoid personal injury during a colli-                                                 position 1.
 sion or sudden maneuver, exercise care
 when stowing objects in the vehicle. Put lug-                                              Opening the glove box
 gage or cargo in the trunk if possible. Do not
                                                                                               Press button 3.
 pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat
 backs.                                                                                        The glove box lid opens downward.
 Luggage nets cannot secure hard or heavy         1 Unlocked
                                                                                            Closing the glove box
 objects.                                         2 Locked
 Keep compartment lids closed. This will help
                                                  3 Glove box lid release                      Push lid up to close.
 to prevent stored objects from being thrown
 about and injuring vehicle occupants during
                                                  Locking the glove box
 an accident.                                        Insert the mechanical key
                                                     ( page 367) into the glove box lock.
                                                     Turn the mechanical key to
                                                     position 2.




                                                                                                                                233
Controls in detail
Useful features


Storage compartment in the glove box          Storage compartment in front of arm-         Storage compartment below the front
                                              rest                                         armrest
A storage compartment is located in the
cover of the glove box. It can be used to                                                  Depending on vehicle model and configu-
store check cards, pens, a flashlight, etc.                                                ration, your vehicle is equipped with a stor-
                                                                                           age compartment below the front armrest.
                                                                                           The storage compartment below the front
                                                                                           armrest is illuminated with the exterior
                                                                                           lamps switched on.
                                                                                           The buttons are located under the cushion
                                                                                           of the armrest.

                                              1 Storage compartment

                                              Opening
1 Storage compartment in glove box
   Lightly press the marking on the lid of    The compartment contains a cup holder
   storage compartment 1.                     ( page 236).
                                                 Lightly touch cover plate 1.
   The lid opens upward.
                                                 The cover opens automatically.

                                              Closing                                      1 Button to open storage compartment
                                                                                           2 Button to open storage tray and tele-
                                                 Lightly push the cover plate 1 up until
                                                                                             phone holder*
                                                 it engages in lock.



234
                                                                                                           Controls in detail
                                                                                                               Useful features


Opening storage compartment                   Opening storage tray and telephone           Storage compartment between rear
                                              holder*                                      seats
  Press button 1 and lift the armrest.
                                              The tray contains a coin holder.
  i
                                                 Press button 2 and lift up the armrest.
  The storage compartment can be heat-
  ed or cooled.                                  !
  The compartment can get very warm              Do not let bank cards, credit cards or
  due to its confined space. When storing        other cards with a magnetic strip come
  heat-sensitive objects in the compart-         near the storage tray as a magnet built
  ment, close the air vent ( page 196)           into the tray could erase or change the
  while heating the passenger compart-           information on the card.
  ment.                                                                                    1 Cover

  !                                                                                        Opening
  Do not obstruct the air vent in the stor-                                                   Slide cover 1 rearward.
  age compartment.
                                                                                           Closing
                                                                                              Slide cover 1 forward.




                                                                                                                         235
Controls in detail
Useful features


Storage compartments under the front     Cup holder in front of seat armrest               Folding out cup holder
seats
                                          Warning!                                G
                                          In order to help prevent spilling liquids on
                                          vehicle occupants, only use containers that
                                          fit into the cup holder. Use lids on open con-
                                          tainers and do not fill containers to a height
                                          where the contents, especially hot liquids,
                                          could spill during braking, vehicle maneu-
                                          vers, or in an accident.
                                                                                           1 Button for folding out the cup holder
                                          When not in use, keep the cup holder
1 Lid
                                          closed. An open cup holder may cause injury         Open the storage compartment in front
2 Buttons
                                          to you or others when contacted during              of the armrest ( page 234).
                                          braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an acci-          Push button 1.
Opening
                                          dent.
   Press buttons 2 together and fold                                                          The cup holder opens automatically.
                                          Keep in mind that objects placed in the cup
   lid 1 down.
                                          holder may come loose during braking, vehi-
                                          cle maneuvers, or in an accident and be
Closing
                                          thrown around in the vehicle interior. Ob-
   Close lid 1 until both buttons 2 of    jects thrown around in the vehicle interior
   lock engage.                           may cause an accident and/or serious per-
                                          sonal injury.




236
                                                                                                        Controls in detail
                                                                                                            Useful features


                                            Folding in cup holder




2 Button for folding out the second cup                                                 4 Release button
  holder                                    3 Fold in the second cup holder
                                                                                          Press release button 4 and fold the
   Push button 2.                              Press the second cup holder in the di-     cup holder into the storage compart-
   The second cup holder folds out in the      rection of arrow 3 until it engages.       ment until it engages.
   direction indicated by the arrow.                                                      Close the storage compartment.




                                                                                                                           237
Controls in detail
Useful features


Cup holder in rear seat armrest                                                             Parcel net in front passenger footwell
                                                                                            A small convenience parcel net is located
 Warning!                                G                                                  in the front passenger footwell. It is for
                                                                                            small and light items, such as road maps,
 In order to help prevent spilling liquids on                                               mail, etc.
 vehicle occupants, only use containers that
 fit into the cup holder. Use lids on open con-
 tainers and do not fill containers to a height
                                                                                             Warning!                               G
 where the contents, especially hot liquids,
                                                                                             Do not place heavy or fragile objects, or ob-
 could spill during braking, vehicle maneu-
                                                  1 Compartment for cup holder               jects having sharp edges, in the parcel net.
 vers, or in an accident.
                                                                                             In an accident, during hard braking or sud-
 When not in use, keep the cup holder
                                                  Opening cup holder                         den maneuvers, they could be thrown
 closed. An open cup holder may cause injury
                                                                                             around inside the vehicle and cause injury to
 to you or others when contacted during              Push front of sliding compartment 1.
                                                                                             vehicle occupants.
 braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an acci-          The cup holder slides out.
 dent.
 Keep in mind that objects placed in the cup      Closing cup holder
 holder may come loose during braking, vehi-         Push sliding compartment 1 back un-
 cle maneuvers, or in an accident and be             til it engages.
 thrown around in the vehicle interior. Ob-
 jects thrown around in the vehicle interior
 may cause an accident and/or serious per-
 sonal injury.




238
                                                                                                        Controls in detail
                                                                                                             Useful features


Parcel net in trunk                           Ashtrays                              Removing ashtray insert
You can hang a parcel net in the trunk. The
hooks and the parcel net in the trunk can     Center console ashtray                 Warning!                                G
hold a load of up to 29.8 lbs (13.5 kg).
                                                                                     Remove front ashtray only with vehicle
                                                                                     standing still. Set the parking brake to se-
                                                                                     cure vehicle from movement. Move gear se-
                                                                                     lector lever to position N. With gear selector
                                                                                     lever in position N, turn off the engine.


                                                                                       Secure vehicle from movement by set-
                                                                                       ting the parking brake. Move the gear
                                                                                       selector lever to position N.
                                              1 Button for disengaging ashtray
                                                                                       Now you have more room to remove
1 Hook
                                                                                       the insert.
   Hang the parcel net on hooks 1 on the      Opening ashtray
                                                                                       Push sliding button 1 to the right.
   left and right sides of the trunk.            Briefly touch cover plate.
                                                                                       The ashtray is disengaged and slides
   !                                             The ashtray opens automatically.
                                                                                       out a short way.
   The parcel net cannot protect or suffi-
                                                                                       Remove insert from ashtray frame.
   ciently secure goods in the event of an
   accident.
                                                                                    Reinstalling the ashtray insert
                                                                                       Install insert by pushing back into the
                                                                                       frame until it engages.


                                                                                                                              239
Controls in detail
Useful features


Rear seat ashtray                          Cigarette lighter
                                                                                       Warning!                                G
                                                                                       Never touch the heating element or sides of
                                                                                       the lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold the
                                                                                       knob only.
                                                                                       When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
                                                                                       SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
                                                                                       from the starter switch, take it with you, and
                                                                                       lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-
                                                                                       tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
1 Latch                                                                                unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi-
                                           1 Cigarette lighter
                                                                                       cle equipment may cause an accident
Opening ashtray                               Switch on ignition ( page 34).           and/or serious personal injury.
   Pull at top of cover to open ashtray.      Push in cigarette lighter 1.
                                              The lighter will pop out automatically     i
Removing ashtray insert                       when hot.                                  The lighter socket can be used to ac-
   Pull latch 1 to disengage ashtray in-                                                 commodate electrical accessories up
   sert and remove it.                                                                   to a maximum 85 W.

Reinstalling the ashtray insert
   Install ashtray insert.
   Close the ashtray.



240
                                                                                                                Controls in detail
                                                                                                                     Useful features


Heated steering wheel*                         Switching on                                   Switching off
                                                  Switch on ignition ( page 34).                 Turn switch at the tip of stalk in direc-
The steering wheel heating warms up the
                                                                                                 tion of arrow 3.
leather area of the steering wheel.               All the lamps in the instrument cluster
                                                  should come on.                                The steering wheel heating is turned
The stalk with the heated steering wheel
                                                  Turn switch at the tip of stalk in direc-      off. Indicator lamp 2 goes out.
switch is on the lower left-hand side of the
steering wheel.                                   tion of arrow 1.                               i
                                                  The steering wheel is heated. Indicator        The steering wheel heating does not
                                                  lamp 2 comes on.                               turn off automatically.




1 Switching on
2 Indicator lamp
3 Switching off




                                                                                                                                    241
Controls in detail
Useful features


Telephone*
                                                       Warning!                                 G          Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
                                                                                                           (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is

 Warning!                                 G            Please do not forget that your primary re-          covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate-
                                                                                                           ly 14 m) every second.
                                                       sponsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s
 Never operate radio transmitters equipped             attention to the road must always be
 with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-       his/her primary focus when driving. For            You can take and make telephone calls us-
 out being connected to an external antenna)           your safety and the safety of others, we rec-      ing the s and t buttons on the
 from inside the vehicle while the engine is           ommend that you pull over to a safe location       steering wheel. To carry out other tele-
 running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-            and stop before placing or taking a tele-          phone functions, use the control system
 tion of the vehicle’s electronic system, pos-         phone call.                                        ( page 137).
 sibly resulting in an accident and/or serious         If you choose to use the telephone1 while          See separate operating manual for instruc-
 personal injury.                                      driving, please use the hands-free device          tions on how to use the telephone.
                                                       and only use the telephone when road,
Radio transmitters, such as a portable tele-           weather and traffic conditions permit. Some
phone or a citizens band unit, should only             jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a
be used inside the vehicle if they are con-            cellular telephone while driving a vehicle.
nected to an antenna that is installed on              Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit Man-
the outside of the vehicle.                            agement and Data System) 1 if road, weath-
The external antenna must be approved by               er and traffic conditions permit.
Mercedes-Benz. Please contact an autho-            1
                                                       Observe all legal requirements.
rized Mercedes-Benz Center for informa-
tion on the installation of an approved
external antenna. Refer to the radio trans-
mitter operation instructions regarding use
of an external antenna.

242
                                                                                                                Controls in detail
                                                                                                                     Useful features


Tele Aid                                         The Tele Aid system is operational provid-   Shortly after the completion of your Tele
                                                 ing that the vehicle’s battery is charged,   Aid acquaintance Call, you will receive a
   !                                             properly connected, not damaged and cel-     user ID and password via first call mail. By
   The initial activation of the Tele Aid sys-   lular and GPS coverage is available.         visiting www.mbusa.com and selecting
   tem may only be performed by com-                                                          “Tele Aid” (USA only), you will have access
                                                 The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can
   pleting the subscriber agreement and                                                       to account information, remote door un-
                                                 be adjusted when using the volume control
   placing an acquaintance call using the                                                     lock, and more.
                                                 on the multifunction steering wheel. To
   Information button ¡. Failure to              raise, press button æ and to lower,             i
   complete either of these steps will re-       press button ç or use the volume knob
                                                                                                 The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular
   sult in a system that is not activated.       on your COMAND headunit.
                                                                                                 network for communication and the
   If you have any questions regarding ac-          To activate, press the SOS button, the       GPS (Global Positioning System) satel-
   tivation, please call the Response Cen-          Roadside Assistance button • or              lites for vehicle location. If either of
   ter at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or            the Information button ¡, depend-            these signals are unavailable, the
   1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).                      ing on the type of response required.        Tele Aid system may not function and if
                                                                                                 this occurs, assistance must be sum-
The Tele Aid system                                 i                                            moned by other means.
                                                    The SOS button is located above the in-
(Telematic Alarm Identification on De-              terior rear view mirror.
mand)
                                                    The Roadside Assistance button •
The Tele Aid system consists of three types         and the Information button ¡ are
of response:                                        located below the center armrest cov-
   automatic and manual emergency                   er.
   roadside assistance and
   information

                                                                                                                                    243
Controls in detail
Useful features


System self-check                                                                              Emergency calls
Initially, after switching on ignition, mal-
                                               Warning!                                G       An emergency call is initiated
functions are detected and indicated (the      If the indicator lamps in the SOS button, in    automatically following an accident in
indicator lamps in the SOS button, the         the Roadside Assistance button and/or in        which the emergency tensioning devices
Roadside Assistance button • and the           the Information button do not come on dur-      (ETDs) or air bags deploy.
Information button ¡ stay on longer            ing the system self-check, or if any of these   An emergency call can also be initiated
than ten seconds or do not come on). The       indicators remain illuminated continuously      manually by opening the cover next to the
message                                        in red and/or the message                       interior rear view mirror labeled SOS, then
TELE AID MALFUNCTION                           TELE AID MALFUNCTION                            briefly pressing the button located under
DRIVE TO WORKSHOP!                             DRIVE TO WORKSHOP!                              the cover. See ( page 245) for
appears for approximately ten seconds in                                                       instructions on initiating an emergency call
                                               is displayed in the multifunction display af-
the multifunction display.                                                                     manually.
                                               ter the system self-check, a malfunction in
                                               the system has been detected.                   Once the emergency call is in progress, the
   i                                                                                           indicator lamp in the SOS button will begin
                                               If a malfunction is indicated as outlined
   The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular                                                   to flash. The message CONNECTING CALL
                                               above, the system may not operate as ex-
   network for communication and the                                                           appears in the multifunction display and
                                               pected. Have the system checked at the
   GPS (Global Positioning System) satel-                                                      the audio system is muted. When the con-
                                               nearest Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
   lites for vehicle location. If either of                                                    nection is established, the message CALL
                                               possible.
   these signals are unavailable, the Tele                                                     CONNECTED appears in the multifunction
   Aid system may not function and if this                                                     display. All information relevant to the
   occurs, assistance must be summoned                                                         emergency, such as the location of the ve-
   by other means.                                                                             hicle (determined by the GPS satellite loca-
                                                                                               tion system), vehicle model, identification
                                                                                               number and color are generated.


244
                                                                                                                   Controls in detail
                                                                                                                       Useful features


A voice connection between the Response                                                          Initiating an emergency call manually
Center and the occupants of the vehicle         Warning!                                G
will be established automatically soon af-
ter the emergency call has been initiated.      If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is
The Response Center will attempt to deter-      flashing continuously and there was no
mine more precisely the nature of the acci-     voice connection to the Response Center
dent provided they can speak to an              established, then the Tele Aid system could
occupant of the vehicle.                        not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the rele-
                                                vant cellular phone network is not available).
The Tele Aid system is available if             The message CALL FAILED appears in the
   it has been activated and is operation-      multifunction display for approximately
   al. Activation requires a subscription       ten seconds.                                     1 SOS button
   for monitoring services, connection,         Should this occur, assistance must be sum-       2 Cover
   and cellular air time                        moned by other means.
                                                                                                    Briefly press on cover 2.
   the relevant cellular phone network
   and GPS signals are available and pass                                                           The cover will open.
   the information on to the Response                                                               Press SOS button 1 briefly.
   Center
                                                                                                    The indicator lamp in SOS button 1
   i                                                                                                will flash until the emergency call is
   Location of the vehicle on a map is only                                                         concluded.
   possible if the vehicle is able to receive
   signals from the GPS satellite network
   and pass the information on to the Re-
   sponse Center.


                                                                                                                                      245
Controls in detail
Useful features


   Wait for a voice connection to the Re-          Roadside Assistance button • and       Roadside Assistance button •
   sponse Center.                                  Information button ¡
                                                                                             Press and hold the button • (for
   Close cover 2 after the emergency               The Roadside Assistance button • and      longer than two seconds).
   call is concluded.                              the Information button ¡ are located
                                                                                             A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside As-
                                                   below the center armrest cover.
                                                                                             sistance dispatcher will be initiated.
 Warning!                                 G                                                  The button will flash while the call is in
                                                                                             progress. The message CONNECTING
 If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the                                              CALL will appear in the multifunction
 vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, ve-                                             display and the audio system is muted.
 hicle in a dangerous road location), please
                                                                                          When the connection is established, the
 do not wait for voice contact after you have
                                                                                          message CALL CONNECTED appears in the
 pressed the emergency button. Carefully
                                                                                          multifunction display. The Tele Aid system
 leave the vehicle and move to a safe loca-
                                                                                          will transmit data generating the vehicle
 tion. The Response Center will automatically
                                                                                          identification number, model, color and lo-
 contact local emergency officials with the
                                                   1 Information button ¡                 cation (subject to availability of cellular
 vehicle’s approximate location if they re-
                                                   2 Roadside Assistance button •         and GPS signals).
 ceive an automatic SOS signal and cannot
 make voice contact with the vehicle occu-                                                A voice connection between the Roadside
 pants.                                                                                   Assistance dispatcher and the occupants
                                                                                          of the vehicle will be established.
                                                                                             Describe the nature of the need for as-
                                                                                             sistance.




246
                                                                                                              Controls in detail
                                                                                                                   Useful features


The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance           See system self-check ( page 244)          Information button ¡
dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified     when the indicator lamp does not come      The Information button ¡ is located be-
Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to          on in red or stays on longer than ap-      low the center armrest cover.
tow your vehicle to the nearest authorized      proximately ten seconds.
Mercedes-Benz Center. For services such                                                       Press and hold the button ¡ (for
as labor and/or towing, charges may ap-         If the indicator lamp in the Roadside         longer than two seconds).
ply. Refer to the Roadside Assistance Man-      Assistance button • is flashing con-
                                                tinuously and no voice connection to          A call to the Customer Assistance Cen-
ual for more information.                                                                     ter will be initiated. The button will
                                                the Response Center was established,
Sign and Drive services (only available in      the Tele Aid system could not initiate a      flash while the call is in progress. The
the USA): Services such as jump start, a        Roadside Assistance call (e.g. the rele-      message INFO – CONNECTING CALL will
few gallons of fuel or the replacement of a     vant cellular phone network is not            appear in the multifunction display.
flat tire with the vehicle spare tire are ob-   available). The message CALL FAILED        When the connection is established, the
tainable.                                       appears in the multifunction display.      message INFO – CALL CONNECTED appears
                                                Roadside Assistance calls can be ter-      in the multifunction display. The Tele Aid
   i                                                                                       system will transmit data generating the
   The indicator lamp in the Roadside As-       minated using the t button on the
                                                multifunction steering wheel or the re-    vehicle identification number, model, color
   sistance button • remains illumi-                                                       and location (subject to availability of cel-
   nated in red for approximately               spective button for ending a telephone
                                                call on the COMAND headunit.               lular and GPS signals).
   ten seconds during the system
   self-check after switching on ignition
   (together with the SOS button and the
   Information button ¡).




                                                                                                                                  247
Controls in detail
Useful features


A voice connection between the Customer      i                                          Information calls can be terminated us-
Assistance Center representative and the     The indicator lamp on the Information      ing the t button on the multifunc-
occupants of the vehicle will be estab-      button ¡ remains illuminated in red        tion steering wheel or the respective
lished. When a voice connection is estab-    for approximately ten seconds during       button for ending a telephone call on
lished, the audio system mutes and the       the system self-check after switching      the COMAND headunit.
message TELE AID – INFO CALL ACTIVE          on ignition (together with the SOS but-
appears in the multifunction display.        ton and the Roadside Assistance            !
Information regarding the operation of       button •).                                 If the indicator lamps do not start flash-
your vehicle, the nearest authorized         See System self-check ( page 244)          ing after pressing one of the buttons or
Mercedes-Benz Center or Mercedes-Benz        when the indicator lamp does not come      remain illuminated (in red) at any time,
USA products and services is available to    on in red or stays on longer than ap-      the Tele Aid system has detected a
you.                                         proximately ten seconds.                   fault or the service is not currently ac-
For more details concerning the Tele Aid                                                tive, and may not initiate a call. Visit an
                                             If the indicator lamp in the Information   Mercedes-Benz Center and have the
system, please visit www.mbusa.com and       button ¡ is illuminated continuous-
use your ID and password (sent to you sep-                                              system checked or contact the Re-
                                             ly and no voice connection to the Re-      sponse Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in
arately) to learn more (USA only).           sponse Center was established, then        the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in Cana-
                                             the Tele Aid system could not initiate     da) as soon as possible.
                                             an Information call (e.g. the relevant
                                             cellular phone network is not avail-
                                             able). The message INFO –
                                             CALL FAILED appears in the multifunc-
                                             tion display.




248
                                                                                                       Controls in detail
                                                                                                            Useful features


Upgrade scenario                              i                                         i
An emergency call is possible even if other   The indicator lamp in the respective      When a Tele Aid call has been initiated,
services are active.                          button flashes until the call is con-     the audio system or the COMAND*
                                              cluded. Calls can only be terminated by   system audio is muted and the
   !                                          a Response Center or Customer             selected mode (radio or CD) pauses.
   If the indicator lamp continues to flash   Assistance Center representative          The optional cellular phone (if installed)
   or the system does not reset, contact      except Roadside Assistance and            switches off. If you must use this
   the Response Center at                     Information calls, which can also be      phone, the vehicle must be parked.
   1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or             terminated by pressing button t on        Disconnect the coiled cord and place
   1-888-923-8367 (in Canada), or             the multifunction steering wheel or the   the call. The COMAND* navigation
   Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance          respective button for ending a            system (if engaged) will continue to
   at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes                      telephone call on the COMAND head-        run. The display in the instrument
   (1-800-367-6372) in the USA or             unit.                                     cluster is available for use, and spoken
   Customer Service at 1-800-387-0100                                                   commands are only available by press-
   in Canada.                                                                           ing the RPT button on the COMAND*
                                                                                        unit. A pop-up window will appear in
                                                                                        the COMAND* display to indicate that
                                                                                        a Tele Aid call is in progress.




                                                                                                                            249
Controls in detail
Useful features


Remote door unlock                            i                                           Stolen Vehicle Recovery services
In case you have locked your vehicle unin-    The remote door unlock feature is avail-    In the event your vehicle was stolen:
tentionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle),   able if the relevant cellular phone net-
                                                                                             Report the incident to the police.
and the reserve SmartKey is not handy:        work is available.
                                                                                             The police will issue a numbered
   Contact the Mercedes-Benz Response         The SOS button will flash and the mes-
                                                                                             incident report.
   Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA)      sage CALL CONNECTED will appear in
   or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).             the multifunction display to indicate re-      Pass this number on to the
                                              ceipt of the door unlock command.              Mercedes-Benz Response Center along
   You will be asked to provide your pass-
                                                                                             with your password issued to you when
   word which you provided when you           Once the vehicle is unlocked, a Re-
                                                                                             you subscribed to the service.
   completed the subscriber agreement.        sponse Center specialist will attempt
                                              to establish voice contact with the ve-        The Response Center will then attempt
   Then return to your vehicle and press
                                              hicle occupants.                               to covertly contact the vehicle’s
   the trunk lid button for a minimum of
                                                                                             Tele Aid system. Once the vehicle is
   20 seconds until the SOS button is         If the trunk lid button was pressed for
                                                                                             located, the Response Center will
   flashing.                                  more than 20 seconds before door un-
                                                                                             contact the local law enforcement and
                                              lock authorization was received by the
   The message CALL CONNECTED ap-                                                            you. The vehicle’s location will only be
                                              Response Center, you must wait
   pears in the multifunction display.                                                       provided to law enforcement.
                                              15 minutes before pressing the trunk
As an alternative, you may unlock the vehi-   lid button again.                              i
cle via Internet using the ID and password
                                                                                             When the anti-theft alarm or the
sent to you shortly after the completion of
                                                                                             tow-away alarm stays on for more than
your acquaintance call.
                                                                                             30 seconds, a call is initiated automat-
The Response Center will then unlock your                                                    ically to the Response Center. See
vehicle with the remote door unlocking                                                       anti-theft alarm system ( page 85)
feature.                                                                                     and tow-away alarm ( page 87).

250
                                                                                                              Controls in detail
                                                                                                                   Useful features


Garage door opener
                                                                                            Warning!                              G
The built-in remote control is capable of
operating up to three separately controlled                                                 Before programming the integrated remote
devices, for example garage door openers,                                                   control to a garage door opener or gate op-
gate openers, or other devices compatible                                                   erator, make sure people and objects are
with HomeLink® or some other systems.                                                       out of the way of the device to prevent po-
                                                                                            tential harm or damage.
You can program the signal transmitter
buttons.                                                                                    When programming a garage door opener,
                                                                                            the door moves up or down. When program-
                                              Remote control integrated into the interior   ming a gate operator, the gate opens or
                                              rear view mirror
                                                                                            closes.
                                              1         Indicator lamp
                                                                                            Do not use the integrated remote control
                                              2 3 4 Signal transmitter button               with any garage door opener that lacks safe-
                                              5         Hand-held transmitter button        ty stop and reverse features as required by
                                                                                            U.S. federal safety standards (this includes
                                              6         Hand-held remote control trans-     any garage door opener model manufac-
                                                        mitter (not part of the vehicle     tured before April 1, 1982). A garage door
                                                        equipment)                          that cannot detect an object - signaling the
                                                                                            door to stop and reverse - does not meet
                                                                                            current U.S. federal safety standards.




                                                                                                                                   251
Controls in detail
Useful features


  i                                         i                                           i
  Certain types of garage door openers      USA only:                                   Canada only:
  are incompatible with the integrated      This device complies with Part 15 of        This device complies with RSS-210 of
  opener. If you should experience diffi-   the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to      Industry Canada. Operation is subject
  culties with programming the transmit-    the following two conditions:               to the following two conditions:
  ter, contact an authorized                    This device may not cause harmful           This device may not cause interfer-
  Mercedes-Benz Center, or call                 interference, and                           ence, and
  Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
  Center (in the USA only) at                   this device must accept any inter-          this device must accept any inter-
  1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer               ference received, including interfer-       ference received, including interfer-
  Service (in Canada) at                        ence that may cause undesired               ence that may cause undesired
  1-800-387-0100.                               operation.                                  operation of the device.
                                            Any unauthorized modification to this       Any unauthorized modification to this
                                            device could void the user’s authority      device could void the user’s authority
                                            to operate the equipment.                   to operate the equipment.




252
                                                                                                              Controls in detail
                                                                                                                   Useful features


Programming or reprogramming the in-         Step 3:                                            i
tegrated remote control                                                                         The indicator lamp 1 flashes the first
                                                Hold the end of the hand-held remote
Step 1:                                         control transmitter 6 of the device             time the signal transmitter button is
                                                you wish to train approximately 2 to            programmed. If this button has already
   Switch on ignition ( page 34).
                                                5 in (5 cm to 12 cm) away from the sur-         been programmed, the indicator lamp
Step 2:                                         face of the integrated remote control           will only start flashing after 20 sec-
   If you have previously programmed an         located on the interior rear view mirror,       onds.
   integrated signal transmitter button         keeping the indicator lamp 1 in view.
   and wish to retain its programming,       Step 4:                                         Step 5:
   proceed to step 3. Otherwise, press                                                          When the indicator lamp 1 flashes
                                                Using both hands, simultaneously
   and hold the two outer signal transmit-                                                      rapidly, release both buttons.
                                                press the hand-held transmitter
   ter buttons 2 and 4 and release
                                                button 5 and the desired integrated          Step 6:
   them only when the indicator lamp 1
                                                signal transmitter button (2, 3
   begins to flash after approximately                                                          Press and hold the just-trained inte-
                                                or 4). Do not release the buttons until
   20 seconds (do not hold the button for                                                       grated signal transmitter button and
                                                completing step 5.
   longer than 30 seconds). This proce-                                                         observe the indicator lamp 1.
   dure erases any previous settings for        The indicator lamp 1 on the integrat-
                                                                                                If the indicator lamp 1 stays on con-
   all three channels and initializes the       ed remote control will flash, first slowly
                                                                                                stantly, programming is complete and
   memory. If you later wish to program a       and then rapidly.
                                                                                                your device should activate when the
   second and/or third hand-held trans-
                                                                                                integrated signal transmitter button is
   mitter to the remaining two signal
                                                                                                pressed and released.
   transmitter buttons, do not repeat this
   step and begin directly with step 3.




                                                                                                                                  253
Controls in detail
Useful features


   i                                         Rolling code programming                         Step 9:
   If the indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly   To train a garage door opener (or other roll-       Press “training” button on the garage
   for about two seconds and then turns      ing code devices) with the rolling code fea-        door opener motor head unit.
   to a constant light, continue with pro-   ture, follow these instructions after
                                                                                                 The “training light” is activated.
   gramming steps 8 through 12 as your       completing the “Programming” portion
   garage door opener may be equipped        (steps 1 through 6) of this text. (A second      You have 30 seconds to initiate the follow-
   with the “rolling code feature”.          person may make the following training           ing step.
                                             procedures quicker and easier.)                  Step 10:
Step 7:                                      Step 8:                                             Firmly press, hold for two seconds and
   To program the remaining two buttons,        Locate “training” button on the garage           release the programmed integrated
   repeat the steps above starting with         door opener motor head unit.                     signal transmitter button (2, 3
   step 3.                                                                                       or 4).
                                                Exact location and color of the button
                                                may vary by garage door opener brand.         Step 11:
                                                Depending on manufacturer, the “train-           Press, hold for two seconds and re-
                                                ing” button may also be referred to as           lease same button a second time to
                                                “learn” or “smart” button. If there is dif-      complete the training process.
                                                ficulty locating the transmitting button,
                                                refer to the garage door opener opera-        Some garage door openers (or other rolling
                                                tor’s manual.                                 code equipped devices) may require you to
                                                                                              perform this procedure a third time to
                                                                                              complete the training.




254
                                                                                                                    Controls in detail
                                                                                                                         Useful features


Step 12:                                        If you live in Canada or if you are having dif-      The integrated remote control trans-
                                                ficulties programming a gate operator (re-           mitter continues to send the signal as
   Confirm the garage door operation by
                                                gardless of where you live) by using the             long as the button is pressed – up to
   pressing the programmed integrated
                                                programming procedures, replace step 4               20 seconds.
   signal transmitter button (2, 3
                                                with the following:
   or 4).
                                                                                                  Erasing the integrated remote control
                                                Step 4:
Step 13:                                                                                          memory
   To program the remaining two buttons,           Continue to press and hold the inte-
                                                                                                     Switch on ignition ( page 34).
   repeat the steps above starting with            grated signal transmitter button (2,
   step 3.                                         3 or 4) while you press and re-press              Simultaneously hold down the signal
                                                   (“cycle”) your hand-held remote con-              transmitter buttons 2 and 4, for ap-
Gate operator/Canadian programming                 trol transmitter 6 every two seconds              proximately 20 seconds, until the indi-
                                                   until the frequency signal has been               cator lamp flashes rapidly 1. Do not
Canadian radio-frequency laws require              learned. Upon successful training, the            hold for longer than 30 seconds.
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)        indicator lamp 1 will flash slowly and            The codes of all three channels are
after several seconds of transmission              then rapidly after several seconds.               erased.
which may not be long enough for the inte-
                                                   Proceed with programming step 5 and
grated signal transmitter to pick up the sig-                                                        i
                                                   step 6 to complete.
nal during programming. Similar to this
                                                                                                     If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators
                                                Operation of integrated remote control               of all three channels.
are designed to “time-out” in the same
manner.                                            Switch on ignition ( page 34).
                                                   Select and press the appropriate inte-
                                                   grated signal transmitter button (2,
                                                   3 or 4) to activate the remote con-
                                                   trolled device.

                                                                                                                                        255
Controls in detail
Useful features


Reprogramming a single integrated sig-          Infrared reflecting windshield             Your vehicle is equipped with infrared re-
nal transmitter button                                                                     flecting glass which reduces the amount of
                                                                                           radiated heat entering the interior through
To program a device using a signal trans-
                                                                                           the windows.
mitter button previously trained, follow
these steps:                                                                               The infrared reflecting glass also prevents
                                                                                           the transmission of signals through the
   Press and hold the desired signal trans-
                                                                                           glass by in-vehicle electronic devices
   mitter button (2, 3 or 4). Do not re-
                                                                                           (e.g. electronic toll collection devices).
   lease the button.
   The indicator lamp will begin to flash af-                                              To allow the use of these devices in the ve-
   ter 20 seconds. Without releasing the                                                   hicle, two infrared transparent areas
   integrated signal transmitter button,                                                   (1 and 2) are placed in the windshield.
                                                1 Mounting location for electronic toll
   proceed with programming starting              collection devices (infrared transpar-
   with step 3.                                   ent)
                                                2 Infrared transparent area
                                                  (pass-through for electronic signals)
                                                3 31.5 in (80 cm)
                                                4 19.0 in (48 cm)
                                                5 1.75 in (4.5 cm)




256
                  Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
          Driving instructions
            At the gas station
         Engine compartment
             Tires and wheels
                Winter driving
                 Maintenance
                  Vehicle care




                         257
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)


In the “Operation” section you will find de-   The more cautiously you treat your vehicle     After 1000 miles (1500 km), you may
tailed information on operating, maintain-     during the break-in period, the more satis-    gradually increase vehicle and engine
ing and caring for your vehicle.               fied you will be with its performance later    speeds to the permissible maximum.
                                               on.
                                                                                                 !
                                                  Drive your vehicle during the first
                                                                                                 Additional instructions for AMG vehi-
                                                  1000 miles (1500 km) at varying but
                                                                                                 cles:
                                                  moderate vehicle and engine speeds.
                                                                                                     During the first 1000 miles
                                                  During this period, avoid heavy loads
                                                                                                     (1500 km), do not exceed a speed
                                                  (full throttle driving) and excessive en-
                                                                                                     of 85 mph (140 km/h).
                                                  gine speeds (no more than 2/3 of maxi-
                                                  mum rpm in each gear).                             During this period, avoid engine
                                                                                                     speeds above 4500 rpm
                                                  Avoid accelerating by kick-down.
                                                                                                     (CL 55 AMG) or 4000 rpm
                                                  Do not attempt to slow the vehicle                 (CL 65 AMG) in each gear.
                                                  down by shifting to a lower gear using
                                                  the gear selector lever.                    All of the above instructions, as may apply
                                                  Select positions 3, 2 or 1 only when        to your vehicle type, also apply when driv-
                                                  driving at moderate speeds (for hill        ing the first 1000 miles (1500 km) after
                                                  driving).                                   the engine or the rear differential has been
                                                                                              replaced.
                                                  Select C as the preferred shift program
                                                  ( page 172) for the first 1000 miles           i
                                                  1500 km).                                      Always obey applicable speed limits.




258
                                                                                                                                 Operation
                                                                                                                    Driving instructions
   Driving instructions
Drive sensibly – save fuel                     Drinking and driving                              Pedals

Fuel consumption, to a great extent, de-
pends on driving habits and operating con-      Warning!                                G         Warning!                                 G
ditions.
                                                Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs          Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times. Ob-
To save fuel you should:
                                                and driving are very dangerous combina-           jects stored in this area may impair pedal
   Keep tires at the recommended infla-         tions. Even a small amount of alcohol or          movement.
   tion pressures.                              drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions
   Remove unnecessary loads.                    and judgement.                                   Power assistance
                                                The possibility of a serious or even fatal ac-
   Remove roof rack when not in use.
                                                cident are greatly increased when you drink
   Allow engine to warm up under low            or take drugs and drive.                          Warning!                                 G
   load use.
                                                Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
                                                                                                  With the engine not running, there is no
   Avoid frequent acceleration and decel-       anyone to drive who has been drinking or
                                                                                                  power assistance for the brake and steering
   eration.                                     taking drugs.
                                                                                                  systems. In this case, it is important to keep
   Have all maintenance work performed                                                            in mind that a considerably higher degree of
   at the intervals specified in the Mainte-                                                      effort is necessary to brake and steer the ve-
   nance Booklet and as required by the                                                           hicle.
   Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or
   FSS (Canada vehicles). Contact an au-
   thorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Fuel consumption is also increased by driv-
ing in cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic,
on short trips, and in hilly area.

                                                                                                                                            259
Operation
Driving instructions


Brakes                                           To help prevent brake disk corrosion after    If the parking brake is released and the
                                                 driving on wet road surfaces (particularly    brake warning lamp in the instrument clus-
                                                 salted roads), it is advisable to brake the   ter stays on, the brake fluid level in the res-
 Warning!                               G        vehicle with considerable force prior to      ervoir is too low.
                                                 parking. The heat generated serves to dry
                                                                                               Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may
 After driving in heavy rain for some time       the brakes.
                                                                                               be the reason for low brake fluid in the res-
 without applying the brakes or through wa-
                                                 If your brake system is normally only sub-    ervoir.
 ter deep enough to wet brake components,
                                                 jected to moderate loads, you should occa-
 the first braking action may be somewhat                                                      Have the brake system inspected immedi-
                                                 sionally test the effectiveness of the
 reduced and increased pedal pressure may                                                      ately. Contact an authorized
                                                 brakes by applying above-normal braking
 be necessary to obtain expected braking ef-                                                   Mercedes-Benz Center.
                                                 pressure at higher speeds. This will also
 fect. Maintain a safe distance from vehicles
                                                 enhance the grip of the brake pads.           All checks and service work on the brake
 in front.
                                                                                               system should be carried out by qualified
 Resting your foot on the brake pedal will          !                                          technicians only. Contact an authorized
 cause excessive and premature wear of the          Be very careful not to endanger other      Mercedes-Benz Center.
 brake pads.                                        road users when you apply the brakes.      Only install brake pads and brake fluid
 It can also result in the brakes overheating,      Refer to the description of the Brake      recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
 thereby significantly reducing their effec-        Assist System (BAS) ( page 81).
 tiveness. It may not be possible to stop the
 vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an acci-
 dent.




260
                                                                                                                             Operation
                                                                                                                Driving instructions


                                                High-performance brake system
 Warning!                              G        (CL 65 AMG only)                               Warning!                               G
 If other than recommended brake pads are       The high-performance brake system is de-       New vehicle brake pads and discs, and
 installed, or other than recommended brake     signed to operate under the extremely high     replacement brake pads and discs may take
 fluid is used, the braking properties of the   operating demands required to accommo-         several hundred miles of driving until they
 vehicle can be degraded to an extent that      date the performance capabilities of the       provide optimum braking efficiency. Until
 safe braking is substantially impaired. This   vehicle. The brakes may produce a squeak-      that time, you may need to use increased
 could result in an accident.                   ing-type noise depending on the                brake pedal pressure while braking. Please
                                                   vehicle speed                               be aware of this and adjust your driving and
                                                                                               braking accordingly during this break-in
   !                                               brake force applied
                                                                                               period.
   When driving down long and steep                ambient conditions, e.g. temperature
   grades, relieve the load on the brakes                                                      Excessive high demand braking will cause
                                                   and humidity
   by shifting into a lower gear to use the                                                    correspondingly high brake wear. Please be
   engine’s braking power. This helps pre-      As with any brake system, the wear of indi-    attentive to the brake warning lamp in the
   vent overheating of the brakes and re-       vidual brake system components such as         instrument cluster and brake condition mes-
   duces brake pad wear.                        brake pads or disks strongly depends on        sages in the multifunction display. Especial-
                                                your driving style and the conditions under    ly for high performance driving, it is
                                                which you operate the vehicle. Thus, a driv-   important to maintain and have the brake
After hard braking, it is advisable to drive
                                                ing style calling for high demand braking      system checked regularly.
on for some time, rather than immediately
                                                will cause your vehicle’s brakes to wear
parking, so that the air stream can cool
                                                more quickly.
down the brakes faster.




                                                                                                                                       261
Operation
Driving instructions


Driving off                                     Parking
                                                                                                   Turn the SmartKey to starter switch
                                                                                                   position 0 and remove, or press
Apply the brakes to test them briefly after                                                        KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button
driving off. Perform this procedure only         Warning!                                G         ( page 35).
when the road is clear of other traffic.
                                                                                                   Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with
                                                 Do not park this vehicle in areas where com-
Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not                                                                KEYLESS-GO* with you and lock vehicle
                                                 bustible materials such as grass, hay or
place full load on the engine until the oper-                                                      when leaving.
                                                 leaves can come into contact with the hot
ating temperature has been reached.
                                                 exhaust system, as these materials could be
When starting off on a slippery surface, do      ignited and cause a vehicle fire.                !
not allow a drive wheel to spin for an ex-                                                        Set the parking brake whenever park-
                                                 To reduce the risk of personal injury as a re-
tended period with the ESP switched off.                                                          ing or leaving the vehicle. In addition,
                                                 sult of inadvertent vehicle movement,
Doing so may cause serious damage to the                                                          move gear selector lever to position P.
                                                 before turning off the engine and leaving the
drive train which is not covered by the                                                           When parking on hills, always turn front
                                                 vehicle always:
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.                                                                   wheels towards the curb.
                                                     Keep right foot on brake pedal.
   !                                                 Firmly depress parking brake pedal.
   Simultaneously depressing the acceler-            Move the gear selector lever to
   ator pedal and applying the brake re-             position P.
   duces engine performance and causes
                                                     Slowly release brake pedal.
   premature brake and drivetrain wear.
                                                     When parked on an incline, turn front
                                                     wheel towards the road curb.




262
                                                                                                                                      Operation
                                                                                                                       Driving instructions


Tires                                            The treadwear indicator appears as a solid
                                                 band across the tread.                             Warning!                                    G
 Warning!                               G         Warning!                                G
                                                                                                    Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
                                                                                                    the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
 If you feel a sudden significant vibration or                                                      may lose control of the vehicle. Continued
                                                  Although the applicable federal motor vehi-
 ride disturbance, or you suspect that possi-                                                       driving with a flat tire or driving at high
                                                  cle safety laws consider a tire to be worn
 ble damage to your vehicle has occurred,                                                           speed with a flat tire will cause excessive
                                                  when the treadwear indicators (TWI) be-
 you should turn on the hazard warning flash-                                                       heat build-up and possibly a fire.
                                                  come visible at approximately 1/16 in
 ers, carefully slow down, and drive with cau-
                                                  (1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not al-
 tion to an area which is a safe distance from                                                     Hydroplaning
                                                  low your tires to wear down to that level. As
 the road.
                                                  tread depth approaches 1/8 in (3 mm), the
 Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody      adhesion properties on a wet road are
                                                                                                   Depending on the depth of the water layer
 for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires     sharply reduced.
                                                                                                   on the road, hydroplaning may occur, even
 appear unsafe, have it towed to the nearest                                                       at low speeds and with new tires. Reduce
                                                  Depending upon the weather and/or road           vehicle speed, avoid track grooves in the
 Mercedes-Benz Center or tire dealer for re-
                                                  surface (conditions), the tire traction varies   road and apply brakes cautiously in the
 pairs.
                                                  widely.                                          rain.
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by
                                                 Specified tire inflation pressures must be
law. These indicators are located in six
                                                 maintained. This applies particularly if the
places on the tread circumference and be-
                                                 tires are subject to extreme operating con-
come visible at a tread depth of approxi-
                                                 ditions (e.g. high speeds, heavy loads, high
mately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), at which point the
                                                 ambient temperatures).
tire is considered worn and should be re-
placed.


                                                                                                                                                 263
Operation
Driving instructions


Tire traction                                   considerably greater than when the road is
                                                not covered with snow or ice. Exercise ap-    Warning!                               G
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or        propriate caution.
icy road is always lower than on a dry road.                                                  Even when permitted by law, never operate
                                                   !                                          a vehicle at speeds greater than the maxi-
You should pay particular attention to the
                                                   Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This      mum speed rating of the tires.
condition of the road whenever the outside
                                                   may cause serious damage to the driv-      Exceeding the maximum speed for which
temperatures are close to the freezing
                                                   etrain which is not covered by the         tires are rated can lead to sudden tire fail-
point.
                                                   Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.            ure, causing loss of vehicle control and pos-
                                                                                              sibly resulting in an accident and/or serious
 Warning!                               G       Tire speed rating                             personal injury and possible death, for you
                                                                                              and for others.
 If ice has formed on the road, tire traction   Regardless of the tire rating, local speed
 will be substantially reduced. Under such      limits should be obeyed. Use prudent driv-
 weather conditions, drive, steer and brake     ing speeds appropriate to prevailing condi-
 with extreme caution.                          tions.

Mercedes-Benz recommends M+S rated
radial-ply tires with a minimum tread depth
of approximately 1/6 in (4 mm) on all four
wheels for the winter season to ensure
normal balanced handling characteristics.
On packed snow, they can reduce your
stopping distance compared to summer
tires. Stopping distance, however, is still



264
                                                                                                                          Operation
                                                                                                             Driving instructions


CL 500                                       An electronic speed limiter prevents your     Winter driving instructions
                                             vehicle from exceeding a speed of
Your vehicle is factory equipped with
                                             130 mph (210 km/h).                           The most important rule for slippery or icy
“H”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
                                                                                           roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid
of 130 mph (210 km/h).
                                             CL 55 AMG and CL 65 AMG                       abrupt acceleration, braking and steering
An electronic speed limiter prevents your                                                  maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control
                                             Your vehicle is factory equipped with
vehicle from exceeding a speed of                                                          system under such conditions.
                                             “Y”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
130 mph (210 km/h).
                                             of 186 mph (300 km/h).                        When the vehicle is in danger of skidding,
                                                                                           move gear selector lever to position N. Try
CL 600                                       An electronic speed limiter prevents your
                                                                                           to keep the vehicle under control by cor-
Your vehicle is factory equipped with        vehicle from exceeding a speed of
                                                                                           rective steering action.
“Y”-rated tires, which have a speed rating   155 mph (250 km/h).
of 186 mph (300 km/h).                                                                        i
                                                i
                                                                                              For information on driving with snow
An electronic speed limiter prevents your       For information on speed rating for win-
                                                                                              chains, see “Snow chains”
vehicle from exceeding a speed of               ter tires, see “Winter driving”
                                                                                              ( page 314).
130 mph (210 km/h).                             ( page 313).
                                                For additional general information on
CL 500 and CL 600 with Sport Pack-
age* and Appearance Package*
                                                tire speed markings on tire sidewall,       Warning!                               G
                                                see “Tire speed rating” ( page 311).
Your vehicle is factory equipped with                                                       On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
“Y”-rated tires, which have a speed rating                                                  in order to obtain braking action. This could
of 186 mph (300 km/h).                                                                      result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi-
                                                                                            cle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not pre-
                                                                                            vent this type of control loss.



                                                                                                                                    265
Operation
Driving instructions


Road salts and chemicals can adversely af-                                                      Standing water
fect braking efficiency. Increased pedal        Warning!                               G
force may become necessary to produce                                                             !
the normal braking effect.                      If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make
                                                                                                  Do not drive through flooded areas or
                                                sure that snow is kept clear of the exhaust
Depressing the brake pedal periodically                                                           water of unknown depth. Before driving
                                                pipe and from around the vehicle with the
when traveling at length on salt-strewn                                                           through water, determine its depth.
                                                engine running. Otherwise, deadly carbon
roads can bring road-salt impaired braking                                                        Never accelerate before driving into
                                                monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle in-
efficiency back to normal.                                                                        water. The bow wave could force water
                                                terior resulting in unconsciousness and
                                                                                                  into the engine and auxiliary equip-
If the vehicle is parked after being driven     death.
                                                                                                  ment, thus damaging them.
on salt-treated roads, the braking efficien-    To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation,
cy should be tested as soon as possible af-     open a window slightly on the side of the ve-     If you must drive through standing wa-
ter driving is resumed.                         hicle not facing the wind.                        ter, drive slowly to prevent water from
                                                                                                  entering the passenger compartment
                                                                                                  or the engine compartment. Water in
 Warning!                            G                                                            these areas could cause damage to
                                                Warning!                               G          electrical components or wiring of the
 Make sure not to encoder any other road
                                                                                                  engine or transmission, or could result
 users when carrying out these braking ma-      The outside temperature indicator is not de-
                                                                                                  in water being ingested by the engine
 neuvers.                                       signed to serve as an ice-warning device and
                                                                                                  through the air intake causing severe
                                                is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. In-
                                                                                                  internal engine damage. Any such dam-
                                                dicated temperatures just above the freez-
                                                                                                  age is not covered by the
                                                ing point do not guarantee that the road
                                                                                                  Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
                                                surface is free of ice.


                                               For more information on winter driving, see
                                               “Winter driving” ( page 313).

266
                                                                                                                                      Operation
                                                                                                                         Driving instructions


Passenger compartment                            Control and operation of radio trans-                Telephones and two-way radios
                                                 mitters

 Warning!                               G                                                              Warning!                                 G
                                                 COMAND, radio and telephone*
                                                                                                       Never operate radio transmitters equipped
 Always fasten items being carried as secure-
                                                                                                       with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-
 ly as possible.                                     Warning!                                 G        out being connected to an external antenna)
 In an accident, during hard braking or sud-                                                           from inside the vehicle while the engine is
 den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown           Please do not forget that your primary
                                                                                                       running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-
 around inside the vehicle, and cause injury         responsibility is to drive the vehicle safely.
                                                                                                       tion of the vehicle’s electronic system, pos-
 to vehicle occupants unless the items are           Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit Man-
                                                                                                       sibly resulting in an accident and/or
 securely fastened in the vehicle.                   agement and Data System), radio or tele-
                                                                                                       personal injury.
                                                     phone1 if road, weather and traffic
 The trunk is the preferred place to carry ob-       conditions permit.
 jects.                                                                                               Radio transmitters, such as a portable tele-
                                                     Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
                                                                                                      phone or a citizens band unit should only
                                                     (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
Driving abroad                                                                                        be used inside the vehicle if they are con-
                                                     covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate-
                                                                                                      nected to an antenna that is installed on
                                                     ly 14 m) every second.
Abroad, there is an extensive                                                                         the outside of the vehicle.
                                                 1
Mercedes-Benz service network at your                Observe all legal requirements.
                                                                                                      Refer to the radio transmitter operation in-
disposal. If you plan to drive into areas                                                             structions regarding use of an external an-
which are not listed in the index of your                                                             tenna.
Mercedes-Benz Center directory, you
should request pertinent information from
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.



                                                                                                                                                 267
Operation
Driving instructions


Catalytic converter                                                                           Emission control
                                              Warning!                               G
Your Mercedes-Benz is equipped with                                                           Certain systems of the engine serve to
monolithic-type catalytic converters, an      As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or op-   keep the toxic components of the exhaust
important element in conjunction with the     erate this vehicle in areas where combusti-     gases within permissible limits required by
oxygen sensors to achieve substantial con-    ble materials such as grass, hay or leaves      law.
trol of the pollutants in the exhaust emis-   can come into contact with the hot exhaust
                                                                                              These systems, of course, will function
sions. Keep your vehicle in proper            system, as these materials could be ignited
                                                                                              properly only when maintained strictly ac-
operating condition by following our rec-     and cause a vehicle fire.
                                                                                              cording to factory specifications. Any ad-
ommended maintenance instructions as
                                                                                              justments to the engine should therefore
outlined in your Maintenance Booklet.
                                                                                              be carried out only by qualified
   !                                                                                          Mercedes-Benz Center authorized techni-
                                                                                              cians.
   To prevent damage to the catalytic con-
   verters, use only premium unleaded                                                         Engine adjustments should not be altered
   gasoline in this vehicle.                                                                  in any way. Moreover, the specified service
                                                                                              jobs must be carried out regularly accord-
   Any noticeable irregularities in engine
                                                                                              ing to Mercedes-Benz servicing require-
   operation should be dealt with prompt-
                                                                                              ments. For details refer to the
   ly. Otherwise, excessive unburned fuel
                                                                                              Maintenance Booklet.
   may reach the catalytic converter,
   causing it to overheat and potentially
   start a fire.




268
                                                                                                                           Operation
                                                                                                              Driving instructions


                                                Coolant temperature
Warning!                               G                                                     Warning!                              G
                                                During severe operating conditions,
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to       e.g. stop-and-go traffic, the coolant tem-      Driving when your engine is badly over-
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon    perature may rise close to approx. 248°F        heated can cause some fluids, which
monoxide, and inhaling it can cause uncon-      (120°C).                                        may have leaked into the engine com-
sciousness and lead to death.                                                                   partment, to catch fire. You could be se-
                                                The engine should not be operated with          riously burned.
Do not run the engine in confined areas         the coolant temperature over 248°F              Steam from an overheated engine can
(such as a garage) which are not properly       (120°C). Doing so may cause serious en-         cause serious burns and can occur just
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas       gine damage which is not covered by the         by opening the hood. Stay away from
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving,   Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.                 the engine if you see or hear steam com-
have the cause determined and corrected                                                         ing from it.
immediately. If you must drive under these
                                                                                             Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
conditions, drive with at least one window
                                                                                             and do not stand near the vehicle until the
fully open at all times.
                                                                                             engine has cooled down.




                                                                                                                                    269
Operation
At the gas station


Refueling                                        The fuel filler flap is located on the            now in position 0, same as
                                                 right-hand side of the vehicle towards the        SmartKey removed from starter
                                                 rear. Locking/unlocking the vehicle with          switch).
 Warning!                               G        the SmartKey or the SmartKey with
                                                                                                Open the fuel filler flap by pushing at
                                                 KEYLESS-GO* automatically locks/un-
                                                                                                the point indicated by the arrow.
 Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous.     locks the fuel filler flap.
 It burns violently and can cause serious                                                       The fuel filler flap springs open.
 injury. Whenever you are around gasoline,
                                                                                                Turn the fuel cap to the left and hold on
 avoid inhaling fumes and skin contact, extin-
                                                                                                to it until possible pressure is released.
 guish all smoking materials. Never allow
 sparks, flame or smoking materials near                                                        Take off the cap and set it in the recess
 gasoline!                                                                                      on the fuel filler flap.
                                                                                                To prevent fuel vapors from escaping
                                                                                                into open air, fully insert filler nozzle
                                                                                                unit.
                                                                                                Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle
                                                    Turn the engine off
                                                                                                unit cuts out – do not top up or over-
                                                        by turning the SmartKey to              fill.
                                                        position 0. Remove the SmartKey
                                                        from the starter switch.
                                                        by pressing the KEYLESS-GO*
                                                        start/stop button ( page 35).
                                                        Open the driver’s door (with the
                                                        driver’s door open, starter switch is



270
                                                                                                                    Operation
                                                                                                            At the gas station


                                                i                                         Check regularly and before a long trip
Warning!                               G        Only use premium unleaded gasoline
                                                with a minimum Posted Octane Rating
Overfilling of the fuel tank may create pres-
                                                of 91 (average of 96 RON/86 MON).
sure in the system which could cause a gas
discharge. This could cause the gas to spray    Information on gasoline quality can
back out when removing the fuel pump noz-       normally be found on the fuel pump.
zle, which could cause personal injury.
                                                More information on gasoline can be
                                                found in the Factory Approved Service
  Replace the fuel cap by turning it to the     Products pamphlet.
  right.
  You will hear when the fuel cap is tight-     i                                         1 Windshield washer and headlamp
  ened.                                         Leaving the engine running and the fuel     cleaning system
  Close the fuel filler flap.                   cap open can cause the yellow engine      2 Brake fluid
                                                malfunction indicator lamp                3 Coolant level
                                                ? (USA only), ± (Canada only)
                                                to illuminate.                               i
                                                                                             Opening the hood, see ( page 273).
                                                For more information, see “Practical
                                                hints” ( page 329).




                                                                                                                            271
Operation
At the gas station


Windshield washer system and head-            Brake fluid                                    Vehicle lighting
lamp cleaning system
                                                 !                                           Check function and cleanliness. For more
For more information on refilling the wash-                                                  information on replacing light bulbs, see
                                                 If you find that the brake fluid in the
er reservoir, see “Windshield washer sys-                                                    “Replacing bulbs” ( page 373).
                                                 brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
tem and headlamp cleaning system”
                                                 minimum mark or below, have the             For more information, see “Exterior lamp
( page 282).
                                                 brake system checked for brake pad          switch” ( page 125).
                                                 thickness and leaks immediately.
Coolant
                                                 Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz          Tire inflation pressure
For more information, see “Coolant level”        Center immediately. Do not add brake        For information on tire inflation pressure,
( page 279) and see “Coolants”                   fluid as this will not solve the problem.   see “Checking tire inflation pressure”
( page 415).                                     For more information, see “Practical        ( page 294).
                                                 hints” ( page 327).

                                              For more information on brake fluid, see
                                              “Brake fluid” ( page 414).

                                              Engine oil level
                                              For more information on engine oil, see
                                              “Engine oil” ( page 274).




272
                                                                                                                              Operation
                                                                                                               Engine compartment
   Engine compartment
Hood                                                Pull release lever 1 in direction of ar-     Pull handle 2 to its stop out of radiator
                                                    row.                                         grille.
                                                    The hood is unlocked and handle 2            Pull up on the hood (do not pull up on
 Warning!                               G           will extend out of the radiator grille.      the handle) and then release it.
 Do not pull the release lever while the vehi-      !                                            The hood will be automatically held
 cle is in motion. Otherwise the hood could                                                      open at shoulder height.
                                                    To avoid damage to the windshield wip-
 be forced open by passing air flow.
                                                    ers or hood, never open the hood if the
                                                    wiper arms are folded forward away         Warning!                                G
Opening                                             from the windshield.
The hood lock release lever is located in                                                      To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of
the driver’s footwell to the left of the park-                                                 moving parts when the hood is open and the
ing brake pedal.                                                                               engine is running. Make sure the hood is
                                                                                               properly closed before driving. When closing
                                                                                               the hood, use extreme caution not to catch
                                                                                               hands or fingers.
                                                                                               The radiator fan may continue to run for ap-
                                                                                               proximately 30 seconds or even restart af-
                                                                                               ter the engine has been turned off. Stay
                                                                                               clear of fan blades.

                                                 2 Handle for opening the hood

1 Release lever



                                                                                                                                        273
Operation
Engine compartment


                                               Closing                                         Engine oil
Warning!                                   G
                                                                                               The amount of oil your engine needs will
If you see flames or smoke coming from the      Warning!                              G        depend on a number of factors, including
engine compartment, or if the coolant tem-                                                     driving style. Higher oil consumption can
                                                Be careful that you do not close the hood on
perature gauge indicates that the engine is                                                    occur when
                                                anyone.
overheated, do not open the hood. Move
                                                                                                  the vehicle is new
away from vehicle and do not open the hood
until the engine has cooled down. If neces-       Let the hood drop from a height of ap-          the vehicle is driven frequently at
sary, call the fire department.                   proximately 1 ft (30 cm).                       higher engine speeds
                                                  The hood will lock audibly.                  Engine oil consumption checks should only
                                                                                               be made after the vehicle break-in period.
Warning!                                   G      Check to make sure the hood is fully
                                                  closed.                                         i
The engine is equipped with a transistorized      If you can raise the hood at a point            Do not use any special lubricant addi-
ignition system. Because of the high voltage      above the headlamps, then it is not             tives, as these may damage the drive
it is dangerous to touch any components (ig-      properly closed. Open it again and let it       assemblies. Using special additives not
nition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic      drop with somewhat greater force.               approved by Mercedes-Benz may
socket) of the ignition system                                                                    cause damage not covered by the Mer-
   with the engine running                                                                        cedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
   while starting the engine                                                                      More information on this subject is
   if ignition is “on” and the engine is                                                          available at any Mercedes-Benz
   turned manually                                                                                Center.




274
                                                                                                                      Operation
                                                                                                         Engine compartment


Checking the engine oil level with the          ENGINE OIL LEVEL                             i
control system                                  MEASURING NOW                                If you want to interrupt the checking
                                                CORRECT MEASUREMENT                          procedure, press the k or j but-
When checking the oil level
                                                ONLY IF VEH. LEVEL                           ton on the multifunction steering
   the vehicle must be parked on level
                                                                                             wheel.
   ground
   with the engine at operating tempera-                                                     If necessary, add engine oil.
   ture, the vehicle must have been sta-
   tionary for at least five minutes with the                                             For adding engine oil see ( page 278).
   engine turned off                                                                      For more information on engine oil, see
   with the engine not at operating tem-        One of the following messages will sub-   “Technical data” section ( page 411) and
   perature yet, the vehicle must have          sequently appear in the indicator:        ( page 413).
   been stationary for at least 30 minutes         ENGINE OIL LEVEL
   with the engine turned off                      OK
To check the engine oil level via the multi-       ADD 1.0 QT. TO
function display, do the following:                REACH MAX. OIL LEVEL
   Switch on ignition ( page 34).                  (Canada: 1.0 LITER)
The standard display ( page 142) should            ADD 1.5 QTS. TO
appear in the multifunction display.               REACH MAX. OIL LEVEL
   Press button k or j on the                      (Canada: 1.5 LITERS)
   steering wheel until the following mes-
   sage is seen in the multifunction dis-          ADD 2.0 QTS. TO
   play:                                           REACH MAX. OIL LEVEL
                                                   (Canada: 2.0 LITERS)

                                                                                                                             275
Operation
Engine compartment


Other display messages                         If you see the message:                            !
If the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*                 ENGINE OIL LEVEL                                   Excess oil must be siphoned or drained
start/stop button ( page 35) is not in po-     NOT WHEN ENGINE ON                                 off. It could cause damage to the en-
sition 2, the following message will appear:                                                      gine and catalytic converter not cov-
                                                  Turn off the engine.
                                                                                                  ered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
FOR ENGINE OIL LEVEL
                                                  If the engine is at operating tempera-          Warranty.
SWITCH IGNITION ON
                                                  ture, wait five minutes before checking
   Switch on ignition ( page 34).                 oil.                                            i
If you see the message:                           If the engine is not at operating temper-       Perform the engine oil level check with
                                                  ature yet, you must wait 30 minutes be-         the dipstick (CL 500, and CL 55 AMG
PERF. SERV ON TIME
                                                  fore checking oil.                              only) if it cannot be completed with the
   If engine is at operating temperature,                                                         control system.
   wait five minutes before repeating          If there is excess engine oil with the engine
   check procedure.                            at normal operating temperature, the fol-          In this case we recommend that you
                                               lowing message will appear:                        have the system checked at a
   If engine is not at operating tempera-                                                         Mercedes-Benz Center.
                                               ENGINE OIL LEVEL
   ture yet, wait 30 minutes before re-
                                               REDUCE OIL LEVEL
   peating check procedure.
                                                                                               For more information on messages in the
                                                  Have excess oil siphoned or drained
                                                                                               multifunction display concerning engine
                                                  off. Contact an authorized
                                                                                               oil, see the “Practical hints” section
                                                  Mercedes-Benz Center.
                                                                                               ( page 348).




276
                                                                                                                           Operation
                                                                                                              Engine compartment


Checking the engine oil level with the             Fully insert oil dipstick 1 into the dip-      i
oil dipstick (CL 500, CL 55 AMG only)              stick guide tube.                              The filling quantity between upper and
When checking the oil level                        Pull out oil dipstick 1 again after ap-        lower oil dipstick marking level is ap-
                                                   proximately three seconds to obtain            proximately 2.1 US qt (2.0 l).
   the vehicle must be parked on level
                                                   accurate reading.
   ground
                                                                                                  If necessary, add engine oil.
   with the engine at operating tempera-
   ture, the vehicle must have been sta-                                                       For adding engine oil see ( page 278).
   tionary for at least five minutes with the                                                  For more information on engine oil, see the
   engine turned off                                                                           “Technical data” section ( page 411) and
                                                                                               ( page 413).
   i
                                                                                               For more information on messages in the
   The engine oil level can be checked by
                                                                                               multifunction display concerning engine
   either the oil dipstick or via the multi-
                                                                                               oil, see the “Practical hints” section
   function display in the instrument clus-
                                                                                               ( page 348)
   ter ( page 275). The amount of engine        Oil dipstick
   oil needed is shown more precisely in
                                                The oil level is correct when it is between
   the multifunction display.
                                                the lower (min) and upper (max) mark of
                                                the oil dipstick.
To check the engine oil level with the oil
dipstick, do the following:
   Open the hood ( page 273).
   Pull out oil dipstick 1 ( page 278).
   Wipe oil dipstick 1 clean.


                                                                                                                                    277
Operation
Engine compartment


Adding engine oil                                                                                  !
   !                                                                                               Excess oil must be siphoned or drained
                                                                                                   off. It could cause damage to the en-
   Only use approved engine oils and oil
                                                                                                   gine and catalytic converter not cov-
   filters required for vehicles with Main-
                                                                                                   ered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
   tenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS
                                                                                                   Warranty.
   (Canada vehicles). For a listing of ap-
   proved engine oils and oil filters, refer
                                                                                                   Screw filler cap 2 back on filler neck.
   to the Factory Approved Service Prod-
   ucts pamphlet in your vehicle literature
   portfolio, or contact an authorized           CL 500, CL 55 AMG
   Mercedes-Benz Center.
                                                 1 Oil dipstick
   Using engine oils and oil filters of spec-    2 Filler cap
   ification other than those expressly re-
                                                    Unscrew filler cap 2 from filler neck.
   quired for the Maintenance System
   (U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada vehi-             Add engine oil as required. Be careful
   cles), or changing of oil and oil filter at      not to overfill with oil.
   change intervals longer than those            Be careful not to spill any oil when adding.
   called for by the Maintenance System          Avoid environmental damage caused by oil       CL 600
   (U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada Vehi-          entering the ground or water.                  1 Filler cap
   cles) will result in engine damage not
   covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
   Warranty.




278
                                                                                                                           Operation
                                                                                                             Engine compartment


                                                  !                                          Active Body Control (ABC) fluid level
                                                  Excess oil must be siphoned or drained
                                                  off. It could cause damage to the en-      Regular fluid level check is not required. If
                                                  gine and catalytic converter not cov-      you notice fluid leaks or malfunction mes-
                                                  ered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited          sages in the multifunction display, have an
                                                  Warranty.                                  authorized Mercedes-Benz Center check
                                                                                             the ABC system.
                                                  Screw filler cap 1 back on filler neck.
                                                                                             Coolant level
                                               For more information on engine oil, see the
CL 65 AMG                                      “Technical data” section ( page 411) and      The engine coolant is a mixture of water
                                               ( page 413).                                  and anticorrosion/antifreeze.
1 Filler cap
                                                                                             When checking the coolant level,
   Unscrew filler cap 1 from filler neck.      Transmission fluid level
                                                                                                the vehicle must be parked on level
   Add engine oil as required. Be careful
                                               The transmission fluid level does not need       ground, and
   not to overfill with oil.
                                               to be checked. If you notice transmission        the engine must be cool.
Be careful not to spill any oil when adding.   fluid loss or gear shifting malfunctions,
Avoid environmental damage caused by oil       have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
entering the ground or water.                  check the automatic transmission.




                                                                                                                                    279
Operation
Engine compartment


                                                The coolant expansion tank is located on         !
Warning!                               G        the passenger side of the engine compart-        CL 600 and CL 65 AMG:
                                                ment.                                            Only open the cap on coolant expan-
In order to avoid any possibly serious burns:
                                                                                                 sion tank 1. Never open the cap be-
    Use extreme caution when opening the                                                         tween the charge-air coolers.
    hood if there are any signs of steam or                                                      Otherwise, the engine could be dam-
    coolant leaking from the cooling system,                                                     aged.
    or if the coolant temperature gauge indi-
    cates that the coolant is overheated.
                                                                                              The coolant level is correct if the level
    Do not remove pressure cap on coolant
    reservoir if coolant temperature is                                                          for cold coolant: reaches the black top
    above 158°F (70°C). Allow engine to                                                          part of the reservoir
    cool down before removing cap. The
    coolant reservoir contains hot fluid and
                                                                                                 for warm coolant: is approximately
                                                1 Coolant expansion tank                         0.6 in (1.5 cm) higher
    is under pressure.
    Using a rag, slowly open the cap approx-       Using a rag, turn the cap slowly approx-      Add coolant as required.
    imately ½ turn to relieve excess pres-         imately one half turn to the left to re-
                                                   lease any excess pressure.                    Replace and tighten cap.
    sure. If opened immediately, scalding
    hot fluid and steam will be blown out un-      Continue turning the cap to the left and   For more information on coolant, see
    der pressure.
                                                   remove it.                                 “Coolants” ( page 415).
    Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine
    parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene gly-
    col which may burn if it comes into con-
    tact with hot engine parts.




280
                                                                                                                      Operation
                                                                                                         Engine compartment


Battery                                                                                  Batteries contain materials that can harm
                                                G      Observe all safety instructions
                                                       and precautions when handling     the environment if disposed of improperly.
Your vehicle’s battery is located in the                                                 Recycling of batteries is the preferred
                                                       automotive batteries.
trunk under the right hand wheel well cov-                                               method of disposal. Many states require
er panel ( page 386).
The battery should always be sufficiently
                                                A Risk of explosion                      sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
                                                                                         for recycling.

                                                D Keep battery.or sparks away
charged in order to achieve its rated ser-              flames
vice life. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for       from           Do not smoke.

                                                B Battery to eyescaustic. Do not
battery maintenance intervals.                             acid is
If you use your vehicle mostly for short-dis-     allow it come into contact
tance trips, you will need to have the bat-       with skin,       or clothing.
tery charge checked more frequently.                   In case it does, immediately
When replacing the battery, always use                 flush affected area with clear
batteries approved by Mercedes-Benz.                   water and seek medical help if
                                                       necessary.
If you do not intend to operate your vehicle
                                                E      Wear eye protection.
for an extended period of time, consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center about

                                                C
steps you need to observe.                             Keep children away.



                                                F      Follow the instructions in this
                                                       Operator's Manual.




                                                                                                                               281
Operation
Engine compartment


Windshield washer system and                      Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield         !
headlamp cleaning system                          Washer Concentrate and water (or                Only use washer fluid which is suitable
                                                  commercially available premixed wind-           for plastic lenses. Improper washer
The windshield washer reservoir is located        shield washer solvent/antifreeze, de-           fluid can damage the plastic lenses of
in the engine compartment.                        pending on ambient temperatures).               the headlamps.
                                                  Always use washer solvent/antifreeze
                                                  where temperatures may fall below            For more information, see “Windshield and
                                                  freezing point. Failure to do so could re-   headlamp washer system” ( page 418).
                                                  sult in damage to the washer sys-
                                                  tem/reservoir.

                                                Warning!                             G
                                                Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flamma-
1 Washer fluid reservoir                        ble. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze
                                                on hot engine parts, because it may ignite
Fluid for the windshield washer system and      and burn. You could be seriously burned.
the headlamp cleaning system is supplied
from the windshield washer reservoir. It
has a capacity of approx. 7.1 US qt. (6.7 l).
During all seasons, add MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate “S” to water. Premix
the windshield washer fluid in a suitable
container.



282
                                                                                                                                Operation
                                                                                                                        Tires and wheels
  Tires and wheels
See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center                                                             Important guidelines
for information on tested and                     Warning!                                 G
recommended rims and tires for summer                                                                 Only use sets of tires and rims of the
and winter operation. They can also offer         Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the         same type and make.
advice concerning tire service and                tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have
                                                                                                      Tires must be of the correct size for the
purchase.                                         sustained damage, replace them.
                                                                                                      rim.
                                                  When replacing rims, only use genuine
                                                                                                      Break in new tires for approximately
 Warning!                               G         Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the
                                                                                                      60 miles (100 km) at moderate
                                                  particular rim type. Failure to do so can
                                                  result in the bolts loosening and possibly an
                                                                                                      speeds.
 Replace rims or tires with the same designa-
 tion, manufacturer and type as shown on the      accident.                                           Regularly check the tires and rims for
 original part. See an authorized                                                                     damage. Dented or bent rims can
 Mercedes-Benz Center for further informa-       Retreaded tires are not tested or recom-             cause tire inflation pressure loss and
 tion. If incorrectly sized rims and tires are   mended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous              damage to the tire beads.
 mounted:                                        damage cannot always be recognized on                If vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire
     The wheel brakes or suspension              retreads. The operating safety of the                inflation pressure and correct as
     components can be damaged.                  vehicle cannot be assured when such tires            required.
                                                 are used.
     The operating clearance of the wheels                                                            Do not allow your tires to wear down
     and the tires may no longer be correct.     See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center               too far. Adhesion properties on wet
                                                 for information on tested and                        roads are sharply reduced at tread
                                                 recommended rims and tires for summer                depths under 1/8 in (3 mm).
                                                 and winter operation.
                                                                                                      When replacing individual tires, you
                                                                                                      should mount new tires on the front
                                                                                                      wheels first (on vehicles with
                                                                                                      same-sized wheels all around).

                                                                                                                                         283
Operation
Tires and wheels


Tire care and maintenance                         Tire inspection                                 Life of tire
                                                  Every time you check your tire inflation        The service life of a tire is dependent upon
                                                  pressure, you should also inspect your          varying factors including but not limited to:
 Warning!                                 G       tires for the following:
                                                                                                     Driving style
 Regularly check the tires for damage. Dam-          excessive tread wear ( page 285)                Tire inflation pressure
 aged tires can cause tire inflation pressure
                                                     cord or fabric showing through the
 loss. As a result, you could lose control of                                                        Distance driven
                                                     tire’s rubber
 your vehicle.
 Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the
                                                     bumps, bulges, cuts, cracks or splits in
                                                     the tread or side of the tire
                                                                                                   Warning!                               G
 tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have
 sustained damage, replace them.                  Replace the tire if you find any of the above    Tires and spare tire should be replaced after
                                                  conditions.                                      six years, regardless of the remaining tread.
Regularly check your tire inflation pressure      Make sure you also inspect the spare tire
at least once a month. For more informa-          periodically for condition and inflation.
tion on checking tire inflation pressure see      Spare tires will age and become worn over
“Recommended tire inflation pressure”             time even if never used, and thus should be
( page 292).                                      inspected and replaced when necessary.




284
                                                                                                                               Operation
                                                                                                                       Tires and wheels


Tread depth                                                                                       Storing tires
                                                 to wear down to that level. As tread depth
Do not allow your tires to wear down too         approaches 1/8 in (3 mm), the adhesion              !
far. Adhesion properties on wet roads are        properties on a wet road are sharply re-
                                                                                                     Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry
sharply reduced at tread depths under            duced.
1/ in (3 mm).                                                                                        place with as little exposure to light as
   8                                             Depending upon the weather and/or road              possible. Protect tires from contact
Tread wear indicators (TWI) are required by      surface (conditions), the tire traction varies      with oil, grease and gasoline.
law. These indicators are located in six         widely.
places on the tread circumference and                                                             Cleaning tires
become visible at a tread depth of approx-
imately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), at which point                                                             !
the tire is considered worn and should be                                                            Never use a round nozzle to power
replaced.                                                                                            wash tires. The intense jet of water can
Recommended minimum tire tread depth:                                                                result in damage to the tire.

   Summer tires 1/8 in (3 mm)                                                                        Always replace a damaged tire.

   Winter tires 1/6 in (4 mm)

 Warning!                              G        1 TWI (Tread Wear Indicator)
 Although the applicable federal motor safety   The tread wear indicator appears as a solid
 laws consider a tire to be worn when the       band across the tread.
 tread wear indicators (TWI) become visible
 at approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), we rec-
 ommend that you do not allow your tires


                                                                                                                                        285
Operation
Tires and wheels


Direction of rotation                          Loading the vehicle                            The Certification label, also found on
                                                                                              the driver’s door B-pillar tells you about
Unidirectional tires offer added advan-        Two labels on your vehicle show how much       the gross weight capacity of your vehi-
tages, such as better hydroplaning perfor-     weight it may properly carry.                  cle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight
mance. To benefit, however, you must                                                          Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the
                                                  The Tire and Loading Information
make sure the tires rotate in the direction                                                   weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
                                                  placard (Example A) or the Vehicle Tire
specified.                                                                                    fuel and cargo. The Certification label
                                                  Information placard (Example B) can be
An arrow on the sidewall indicates the            found on the driver's door B-pillar. This   also tells you about the front and rear
intended direction of rotation (spinning) of      placard tells you important information     axle weight capacity, called the Gross
the tire.                                         about the number of people that can be      Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). The GAWR
                                                  in the vehicle and the total weight that    is the total allowable weight that can be
   i                                              can be carried in the vehicle. It also      carried by a single axle (front or rear).
   Spare wheels may be mounted against            contains information on the proper size     Never exceed the GVWR or GAWR for
   the direction of rotation (spinning) even      and recommended tire inflation              either the front axle or rear axle.
   with a unidirectional tire for temporary       pressures for the original equipment
   use only until the regular drive wheel         tires on your vehicle.
   has been repaired or replaced. Always
   observe and follow applicable tempo-
   rary use restrictions and speed limita-
   tions indicated on the spare wheel.




286
                                                                                                                             Operation
                                                                                                                     Tires and wheels


                                              Tire and Loading Information                     Placard (Example A)

                                               Warning!                                G
                                               Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
                                               specified load limit or vehicle capacity
                                               weight as indicated on the placard on the
                                               driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
                                               can overheat them, possibly causing a
                                               blowout. Overloading the tires can also
1 Driver’s door B-pillar
                                               result in handling or steering problems, or
Following is a discussion on how to work       brake failure.                                  1 Load limit information on the Tire and
with the information contained on the two                                                        Loading Information placard
placards with regards to loading your vehi-   Your vehicle is equipped with either the         The placard showing the load limit informa-
cle.                                          Tire and Loading Information placard             tion is located on the driver's door B-pillar.
                                              (Example A) or the Vehicle Tire Information      If your vehicle is equipped with the Tire and
                                              placard (Example B).                             Loading Information placard (Example A),
                                                                                               locate the statement “The combined
                                                 i                                             weight of occupants and cargo should
                                                 Data shown on placard examples is for         never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.”
                                                 illustration purposes only. Load limit        on this placard. The combined weight of all
                                                 data is specific to each vehicle and may      occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer
                                                 vary from data shown in the illustra-         tongue load (if applicable) should never
                                                 tions below. Refer to placard on vehicle      exceed the weight referenced in that
                                                 for actual data specific to your vehicle.     statement.


                                                                                                                                       287
Operation
Tires and wheels


Placard (Example B)                              Seating capacity
                                                 The seating capacity gives you important
                                                 information on the number of occupants
                                                 that can be in the vehicle. Observe front
                                                 and rear seating capacity. Your vehicle is
                                                 equipped with either placard Example A or
                                                 placard Example B located on the driver's
                                                 door B-pillar ( page 287).

                                                    i
                                                    Data shown on placard examples is for      Placard (Example A)
1 Load limit information on the Vehicle             illustration purposes only. Seating data   1 Seating capacity
  Tire Information placard                          is specific to each vehicle and may vary
The placard showing the load limit informa-         from data shown in the illustrations
tion is located on the driver’s door B-pillar.      below. Refer to placard on vehicle for
If your vehicle is equipped with the Vehicle        actual data specific to your vehicle.
Tire Information placard (Example B),
locate the heading “Vehicle Capacity
Weight” on this placard. The combined
weight of all occupants, cargo/luggage
and trailer tongue (if applicable) should
never exceed the weight listed next to
vehicle capacity weight.                                                                       Placard (Example B)
                                                                                               1 Seating capacity



288
                                                                                                                         Operation
                                                                                                                 Tires and wheels


Steps for determining correct load limit       Step 3                                      Step 6 (if applicable)
The following steps have been developed           Subtract the combined weight of the         If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
as required of all manufacturers under Title      driver and passengers from XXX kilo-        load from your trailer will be trans-
49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part        grams or XXX lbs.                           ferred to your vehicle. Consult this
575 pursuant to the “National Traffic and                                                     manual to determine how this reduces
                                               Step 4
Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.                                                            the available cargo and luggage load
                                                  The resulting figure equals the avail-      capacity of your vehicle ( page 291).
Step 1 (Vehicles equipped with placard            able amount of cargo and luggage load
Example A)                                        capacity. For example, if the “XXX”      The following table shows examples on
   Locate the statement “The combined             amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will   how to calculate total and cargo load
   weight of occupants and cargo should           be five 150 lbs. passengers in your      capacities with varying seating configura-
   never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on            vehicle, the amount of available cargo   tions and number and size of occupants.
   your vehicle’s placard.                        and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.    The following examples use a load limit
                                                  (1400-750 (5 x150) = 650 lbs.)           of 1500 lbs. This is for illustration
Step 1 (Vehicles equipped with placard                                                     purposes only. Make sure you are using
Example B)                                     Step 5                                      the actual load limit for your vehicle stated
   Locate the heading “Vehicle Capacity           Determine the combined weight of         on the vehicle’s placard ( page 287).
   Weight” on your vehicle’s placard.             luggage and cargo being loaded on the
Step 2                                            vehicle. That weight may not safely
                                                  exceed the available cargo and luggage
   Determine the combined weight of the           load capacity calculated in step 4.
   driver and passengers that will be
   riding in your vehicle.




                                                                                                                                  289
Operation
Tires and wheels


Example Combined          Number of Seating         Occupants weight      Combined      Available cargo/luggage and trailer
        weight limit      occupants configura-                            weight of all tongue weight (total load limit or
        of occu-          (driver and tion                                occupants     vehicle capacity weight from plac-
        pants and         passengers)                                                   ard minus combined weight of all
        cargo from                                                                      occupants)
        placard
1          1500 lbs       5              front: 2   Occupant 1: 150 lbs   750 lbs       1500 lbs - 750 lbs = 750 lbs
                                                    Occupant 2: 180 lbs
                                         rear: 3    Occupant 3: 160 lbs
                                                    Occupant 4: 140 lbs
                                                    Occupant 5: 120 lbs
2          1500 lbs       3              front: 1   Occupant 1: 200 lbs   540 lbs       1500 lbs - 540 lbs = 960 lbs
                                         rear: 2    Occupant 2: 190 lbs
                                                    Occupant 3: 150 lbs
3          1500 lbs       1              front:1    Occupant 1: 150 lbs   150 lbs       1500 lbs - 150 lbs = 1350 lbs

The higher the weight of all occupants, the
less cargo and luggage load capacity is
available.
For more information, see “Trailer tongue
load” ( page 291).




290
                                                                                                                            Operation
                                                                                                                     Tires and wheels


Certification label                             Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): The        Trailer tongue load
                                                total weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
Even after careful determination of the                                                        The tongue load of any trailer is an impor-
                                                all cargo, and the trailer tongue load
combined weight of all occupants, cargo                                                        tant weight to measure because it affects
                                                ( page 291) must never exceed the
and the trailer tongue load (if applicable)                                                    the load you can carry in your vehicle. If a
                                                GVWR.
( page 291) as to not exceed the permis-                                                       trailer is towed, the tongue load must be
sible load limit, you must make sure that       Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The to-       added to the weight of all occupants riding
your vehicle never exceeds the Gross Vehi-      tal allowable weight that can be carried by    and any cargo you are carrying in the
cle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross          a single axle (front or rear).                 vehicle. The tongue load typically is ten
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the                                                       percent of the trailer weight and every-
                                                To assure that your vehicle does not ex-
front or rear axle. You can obtain the                                                         thing loaded in it.
                                                ceed the maximum permissible weight
GVWR and GAWR from the Certification la-
                                                limits (GVWR and GAWR for front and rear       Your Mercedes-Benz has been designed
bel. The Certification Label can be found
                                                axle), have the loaded vehicle (including      primarily to carry passengers and their
on the driver’s door B-pillar, see “Technical
                                                driver, passengers and all cargo and, if ap-   cargo. Mercedes-Benz does not recom-
data” ( page 400).
                                                plicable, trailer fully loaded) weighed on a   mend trailer towing with your vehicle.
                                                suitable commercial scale.




                                                                                                                                     291
Operation
Tires and wheels


Recommended tire inflation pressure               The tire inflation pressure should be           Placard (Example A)
                                                  checked regularly and should only be ad-
                                                  justed on cold tires. The tires can be con-
 Warning!                                G        sidered cold if the vehicle has been parked
                                                  for at least three hours or driven less than
 Follow recommended tire inflation                one mile (1.6 km).
 pressures.
                                                  Follow recommended cold tire inflation
 Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires   pressures listed on placard.
 wear excessively and/or unevenly,
 adversely affect handling and fuel economy,      Keeping the tires properly inflated
 and are more likely to fail from being over-     provides the best handling, tread life and
 heated.                                          riding comfort.                                 1 Tire and Loading Information placard
 Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires     In addition to the tire placard on the            with recommended cold tire inflation
 can adversely affect handling and ride           driver’s door B-pillar, also consult the fuel     pressures
 comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping        filler flap for any additional information      Placard (Example A) lists the recommend-
 distance, and result in sudden deflation         pertaining to special driving situations. For   ed cold tire inflation pressures for maxi-
 (blowout) because they are more likely to        more information, see “Important notes on       mum loaded vehicle weight. The tire
 become punctured or damaged by road              tire inflation pressure” ( page 293).           inflation pressures listed apply to the tires
 debris, potholes etc.                                                                            installed as original equipment.
                                                     i
                                                     Data shown on placard examples is for
Your vehicle is equipped with either the             illustration purposes only. Tire data is
Tire and Loading Information placard                 specific to each vehicle and may vary
(Example A) or the Vehicle Tire Information          from data shown in the illustrations
placard (Example B) located on the driver's          below. Refer to placard on vehicle for
door B-pillar ( page 287).                           actual data specific to your vehicle.

292
                                                                                                                               Operation
                                                                                                                       Tires and wheels


Placard (Example B)                             Important notes on tire inflation                Be sure to readjust the tire inflation
                                                pressure                                         pressure for normal driving speeds. You
                                                                                                 should wait until the tires are cold before
                                                 Warning!                                G       adjusting the tire inflation pressure.
                                                                                                 Some vehicles may have supplemental tire
                                                 If the tire inflation pressure repeatedly       pressure information for vehicle loads less
                                                 drops:                                          than the maximum loaded vehicle condi-
                                                     Check the tires for punctures from          tion. If such information is provided, it can
                                                     foreign objects.                            be found on the placard located on the in-
                                                                                                 side of the fuel filler flap.
                                                     Check to see whether air is leaking from
1 Vehicle Tire Information placard with              the valves or from around the rim.          Tire inflation pressure changes by approxi-
  recommended cold tire inflation                                                                mately 1.5 psi (0.1 bar) per 18°F (10°C) of
  pressures                                     Tire temperature and tire inflation pressure     air temperature change. Keep this in mind
                                                are also increased while driving, depending      when checking tire inflation pressure
Placard (Example B) lists the recommend-                                                         where the temperature is different from
                                                on the driving speed and the tire load.
ed cold tire inflation pressures for maxi-                                                       the outside temperature.
mum loaded vehicle weight. The tire             If you will be driving your vehicle at high
inflation pressures listed apply to the tires   speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher,
installed as original equipment.                where it is legal and conditions allow,
                                                consult the placard on the inside of the fuel
   i                                            filler flap on how to adjust the cold tire in-
   Placard (Example B) may list                 flation pressure. If you do not adjust the
   recommended cold tire inflation              tire inflation pressure, excessive heat can
   pressures for different vehicle loads.       build up and result in sudden tire failure.



                                                                                                                                        293
Operation
Tires and wheels


Checking tire inflation pressure                Checking tire inflation pressure                   Install the valve cap.
                                                manually
                                                                                                   Repeat this procedure for each tire.
Regularly check your tire inflation pressure
                                                Follow the steps below to achieve correct
at least once a month.
                                                tire inflation pressure:                        Checking tire inflation pressure
Check and adjust the tire inflation                                                             electronically*
                                                   Remove the cap from the valve on one
pressure when the tires are cold. The tires
                                                   tire.                                        The tire inflation pressure monitor only
can be considered cold if the vehicle has
                                                   Firmly press a tire gauge onto the           functions on wheels that are equipped with
been parked for at least three hours or
                                                   valve.                                       the proper electronic sensors. It monitors
driven less than one mile (1.6 km).
                                                                                                the tire inflation pressure, as selected by
If you check the tire inflation pressure           Read tire inflation pressure on tire         the driver, in all four tires. A warning is
when the tires are warm (the vehicle has           gauge and check against the recom-           issued to alert you to a decrease in tire
been driven for several miles or sitting less      mended tire inflation pressure on the        inflation pressure in one or more of the
than three hours), the reading will be             placard on the driver’s door B-pillar        tires.
approximately 4 psi (0.3 bar) higher than          ( page 292). If necessary, add air to
                                                                                                You can call up the tire inflation pressure
the cold reading. This is normal. Do not let       achieve the recommended tire inflation
                                                                                                monitoring display using the control
air out to match the specified cold tire in-       pressure.
                                                                                                system ( page 137).
flation pressure. Otherwise, the tire will be
underinflated.                                     i
                                                   If you have overfilled the tire, release
                                                   tire inflation pressure by pushing the
                                                   metal stem of the valve with e.g. a tip of
                                                   a pen. Then recheck the tire inflation
                                                   pressure with the tire gauge.




294
                                                                                                                          Operation
                                                                                                                 Tires and wheels


i                                            Press button è or ÿ on the mul-
After you have reactivated the tire infla-   tifunction steering wheel repeatedly         Warning!                                 G
tion pressure monitor, the current tire      until the standard display menu
                                             appears in the multifunction display         When the tire inflation pressure monitoring
inflation pressures will only be shown
                                             ( page 137).                                 system warning light is lit, one or more of
after a few minutes’ driving time.
                                                                                          your tires is significantly under-inflated. You
During this time, you will see the follow-   Press button j or k repeatedly               should stop and check your tires as soon as
ing message in the multifunction dis-        until the current tire inflation pressures   possible, and inflate them to the proper tire
play:                                        for each tire appear in the multifunc-       inflation pressure as indicated on the vehi-
TIRE PRES. DISPLAY                           tion display.                                cle’s tire information placard. Driving on a
APPEARS AFTER
                                                                                          significantly under-inflated tire causes the
DRIVING A FEW
                                                                                          tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
MINUTES
                                                                                          Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
                                                                                          and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi-
i                                                                                         cle’s handling and stopping ability. Each tire,
Possible differences between the                                                          including the spare, should be checked
readings of a tire inflation pressure                                                     monthly when cold and set to the recom-
                                             i
gauge of an air hose, e.g. gas station                                                    mended tire inflation pressure as specified
                                             You can select the unit of measure           in the vehicle placard and owner’s manual.
equipment, and the vehicle’s control
                                             (Bar/Psi) used for the tire inflation
system can occur. The readings issued
                                             pressure by changing the setting in the
by the control system are more pre-
                                             control system ( page 137).
cise.

Switch on the ignition ( page 34).




                                                                                                                                    295
Operation
Tires and wheels


   i                                                i
   The recommended tire inflation pres-             Operating radio transmission equip-
                                                                                              Warning!                                G
   sures for your vehicle can be found on           ment (e.g. wireless headsets, two-way
                                                                                              Follow recommend tire inflation pressures.
   the tire placard located on the driver’s         radios) in or near the vehicle could
   door B-pillar. The tire inflation pres-          cause the tire inflation pressure moni-   Do not overinflate tires. Overinflating tires
   sures are not listed in the owner’s man-         tor to malfunction.                       can result in sudden deflation (blowout) be-
   ual.                                                                                       cause they are more likely to become punc-
                                                                                              tured or damaged by road debris, potholes,
                                                                                              etc.
 Warning!                                  G                                                  Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
                                                                                              wear unevenly, adversely affect handling
 The tire inflation pressure monitor does not                                                 and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail
 indicate a warning for wrongly selected tire                                                 from being overheated.
 inflation pressures. Always adjust tire infla-
                                                                                              Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
 tion pressure according to the placard on
                                                                                              specified load limit or vehicle capacity
 the driver’s door B-pillar or, if available, the
                                                                                              weight as indicated on the placard on the
 inside of the fuel filler flap.
                                                                                              driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
 The tire inflation pressure monitor is not                                                   can overheat them, possibly causing a
 able to issue a warning due to a sudden dra-                                                 blowout.
 matic loss of tire inflation pressure (e.g. tire
 blowout caused by a foreign object). In this
 case bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully
 applying the brakes and avoiding abrupt
 steering maneuvers.




296
                                                                                                                         Operation
                                                                                                                 Tires and wheels


Reactivating the tire inflation pressure          i                                            Press the æ button.
monitor                                           If you are transporting a deflated tire in   The following message will appear in
The tire inflation pressure monitor must be       the vehicle, do not activate the tire        the multifunction display:
reactivated in the following situations:          inflation pressure monitor until             TIRE PRES. MONITOR
                                                      the deflated tire is no longer in the    REACTIVATED
   If you have changed the tire inflation
   pressure                                           vehicle                                  The tire inflation pressure monitor will
   If you have replaced the wheels or tires           you have inflated the tire to the        now monitor the tire inflation pressure
                                                      correct tire inflation pressure          values of all four tires.
   If you have installed new wheels or
                                                                                               The following message will appear in
   tires
                                                  Press the reset button J on the in-          the multifunction display field:
   Using the tire placard on the driver’s         strument cluster ( page 134).                TIRE PRES. DISPLAY
   door B-pillar or, if available, the inside                                                  APPEARS AFTER
   of the fuel filler flap, make sure the tire    The following message will appear in
                                                                                               DRIVING A FEW
   inflation pressure of all four tires is cor-   the multifunction display:
                                                                                               MINUTES
   rect.                                          MONITOR CURRENT
                                                  TIRE                                         This display appears until the individual
   Press button j or k repeatedly                 PRESSURES?                                   tire inflation pressure values are
   until you see the current tire inflation                                                    matched with the tires. The individual
   pressures for each tire appear in the                                                       values are then displayed
   multifunction display or the following                                                      ( page 295).
   message appears in the multifunction
   display:
   TIRE PRES. DISPLAY
   APPEARS AFTER
   DRIVING A FEW
   MINUTES

                                                                                                                                  297
Operation
Tires and wheels


If you wish to cancel activation:             Potential problems associated with                Overinflated tire inflation pressure
                                              underinflated and overinflated tires
   Press the ç button.                                                                          Overinflated tires can:
If one of the following messages appears in   Underinflated tire inflation pressure                adversely affect handling
the multifunction display:                                                                         characteristics
                                              Underinflated tires can:
   TIRE PRES. MONITOR                                                                              cause uneven tire wear
   REACTIVATE AFTER
                                                 cause excessive and uneven tire wear
                                                                                                   be more prone to damage from road
   CORRECTING PRESSURE                           adversely affect fuel economy
                                                                                                   hazards
   TIRE PRESSURE                                 lead to tire failure from being
                                                                                                   adversely affect ride comfort
   PLEASE CORRECT                                overheated
                                                                                                   increase stopping distance
   Check the tire inflation pressures and        adversely affect handling
   correct them if necessary.                    characteristics
   Reactivate the tire inflation pressure
                                                                                                 Warning!                               G
   monitor.                                    Warning!                                G         Follow recommended tire inflation
                                                                                                 pressures.
                                               Follow recommended tire inflation
                                               pressures.                                        Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
                                                                                                 can adversely affect handling and ride
                                               Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
                                                                                                 comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping
                                               wear excessively and/or unevenly,
                                                                                                 distance, and result in sudden deflation
                                               adversely affect handling and fuel economy,
                                                                                                 (blowout) because they are more likely to
                                               and are more likely to fail from being
                                                                                                 become punctured or damaged by road
                                               overheated.
                                                                                                 debris, potholes etc.




298
                                                                                                                        Operation
                                                                                                                 Tires and wheels


Tire labeling                               1 Uniform Quality Grading Standards            Tire size designation, load and speed
                                              ( page 306)                                  rating
Besides tire name (sales designation) and   2 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
manufacturer name, a number of markings       ( page 304)
can be found on a tire.                     3 Maximum tire load ( page 305)
Following are some explanations for the     4 Maximum tire inflation pressure
markings on your vehicle's tires:             ( page 306)
                                            5 Manufacturer
                                            6 Tire ply material ( page 308)
                                            7 Tire size designation, load and speed
                                              rating ( page 299)
                                            8 Load identification ( page 303)
                                            9 Tire name                                    1 Tire width
                                                                                           2 Aspect ratio in %
                                               i                                           3 Radial tire code
                                               For illustration purposes only. Actual      4 Rim diameter
                                               data on tires is specific to each vehicle   5 Tire load rating
                                               and may vary from data shown in above       6 Tire speed rating
                                               illustration.
                                               For more information, see “Rims and
                                                                                              i
                                               Tires” ( page 404).                            For illustration purposes only. Actual
                                                                                              data on tires is specific to each vehicle
                                                                                              and may vary from data shown in above
                                                                                              illustration.




                                                                                                                                 299
Operation
Tires and wheels


General:                                        Tire width                                     Rim diameter
Depending on the design standards used,         The tire width 1 ( page 299) indicates         The rim diameter 4 ( page 299) is the
the tire size molded into the sidewall may      the nominal tire width in mm.                  diameter of the bead seat, not the
have no letter or a letter preceding the tire                                                  diameter of the rim edge. Rim diameter is
size designation.                               Aspect ratio                                   indicated in inches (in).
No letter preceding the size designation        The aspect ratio 2 ( page 299) is the
                                                                                               Tire load rating
(as illustrated above): Passenger car tire      dimensional relationship between tire
based on European design standards.             section height and section width and is        The tire load rating 5 ( page 299) is a
Letter “P” preceding the size designation:      expressed in percentage. The aspect ratio      numerical code associated with the
Passenger car tire based on U.S. design         is arrived at by dividing section height by    maximum load a tire can support.
standards.                                      section width.                                 For example, a load rating of 91 corre-
                                                                                               sponds to a maximum load of 1356 lbs
Letter “LT” preceding the size designation:     Tire code                                      (615 kg) the tire is designed to support.
Light Truck tire based on U.S. design
                                                The tire code 3 ( page 299) indicates          See also “Maximum tire load”
standards.
                                                the tire construction type. The “R” stands     ( page 305) where the maximum load as-
Letter “T” preceding the size designation:      for radial tire type. Letter “D” means diag-   sociated with the load index is indicated in
Temporary spare tires which are high            onal or bias ply construction; letter “B”      kilograms and lbs.
pressure compact spares designed for            means belted-bias ply construction.
temporary emergency use only.
                                                At the tire manufacturer's option, any tire
                                                with a speed capability above 149 mph
                                                (240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the size
                                                designation (for example: 245/40 ZR 18).
                                                For additional information, see “Tire speed
                                                rating” ( page 301).


300
                                                                                                                           Operation
                                                                                                                  Tires and wheels


                                                 For additional information on tire load    Tire speed rating
Warning                                 G        rating, see “Load identification”
                                                                                            The tire speed rating 6 ( page 299)
                                                 ( page 303).
The tire load rating must always be at least                                                indicates the approved maximum speed
half of the GAWR ( page 309) of your vehi-          i                                       for the tire.
cle. Otherwise, tire failure may be the result      Tire load rating 5 ( page 299) and
which may cause an accident and/or seri-            Tire speed rating 6 ( page 299) are      Warning!                               G
ous personal injury to you or others.               also referred to as “service descrip-
Always replace rims and tires with the same         tion”.                                   Even when permitted by law, never operate
designation, manufacturer and type as                                                        a vehicle at speeds greater than the
shown on the original part.                                                                  maximum speed rating of the tires.
                                                                                             Exceeding the maximum speed for which
                                                                                             tires are rated can lead to sudden tire
Warning!                                G                                                    failure, causing loss of vehicle control and
                                                                                             possibly resulting in an accident and/or
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the                                                   personal injury and possible death, for you
specified load limit or vehicle capacity                                                     and for others.
weight as indicated on the placard located
on the driver's door B-pillar. Overloading the
                                                                                               i
tires can overheat them, possibly causing a
                                                                                               Tire load rating 5 ( page 299) and
blowout. Overloading the tires can also
                                                                                               Tire speed rating 6 ( page 299) are
result in handling or steering problems, or
                                                                                               also referred to as “service descrip-
brake failure.
                                                                                               tion”.




                                                                                                                                     301
Operation
Tires and wheels


Summer tires                                      is comprised of the tire load rating 5     Any tire with a speed capability above
                                                  ( page 299) and the tire speed             186 mph (300 km/h) must include a
Index         Speed rating                        rating 6 ( page 299).                      “ZR” in the size designation AND the
Q             up to 100 mph (160 km/h)                                                       service description must be placed in
                                                  If your tire includes “ZR” in the size
R             up to 106 mph (170 km/h)                                                       parenthesis. Example: 275/40 ZR 18
                                                  designation and no service
                                                                                             (99Y). The “(Y)” speed rating in paren-
S             up to 112 mph (180 km/h)            description 5 and 6 ( page 299) is
                                                                                             thesis designates the maximum speed
                                                  given, the tire manufacturer must be
T             up to 118 mph (190 km/h)                                                       capability of the tire as being above
                                                  consulted for the maximum speed ca-
H             up to 130 mph (210 km/h)                                                       186 mph (300 km/h). Consult the tire
                                                  pability.
                                                                                             manufacturer for the actual maximum
V             up to 149 mph (240 km/h)            If a service description 5 and 6           permissible speed of the tire.
W             up to 168 mph (270 km/h)            ( page 299) is given, the speed capa-
Y             up to 186 mph (300 km/h)            bility is limited by the speed symbol in
                                                  the service description.
(Y)           above 186 mph (300 km/h)            Example: 245/40 ZR18 97Y.
ZR            above 149 mph (240 km/h)            In this example, “97Y” is the service
                                                  description. The letter “Y” designates
      At the tire manufacturer's option, any      the speed rating and the speed capabil-
      tire with a speed capability above          ity of the tire is limited to 186 mph
      149 mph (240 km/h) can include a            (300 km/h).
      “ZR” in the size designation (for exam-
      ple: 245/40 ZR18). To determine the
      maximum speed capability of the tire,
      the service description for the tire must
      be referred to. The service description



302
                                                                                                                        Operation
                                                                                                                Tires and wheels


All-season and winter tires                Load identification                            In addition to tire load rating, special load
                                                                                          information may be molded into the tire
Index      Speed rating                                                                   sidewall following the letter designating
Q M+S      up to 100 mph (160 km/h)                                                       the tire speed rating 1 ( page 303).
T M+S      up to 118 mph (190 km/h)                                                       No specification given: absence of any text
H M+S      up to 130 mph (210 km/h)                                                       (like in above example) indicates a
                                                                                          standard load (SL) tire.
V M+S      up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
                                                                                          XL (Extra Load): designates an extra load
   i                                                                                      (or reinforced) tire.
   The marking “M+S” next to the service                                                  Light Load: designates a light load tire.
   description designates tires with mud   1 Load identification                          C, D, E: designates load range associated
   and snow capabilities.                                                                 with the maximum load a tire can carry at
                                              i                                           a specified pressure.
                                              For illustration purposes only. Actual
                                              data on tires is specific to each vehicle
                                              and may vary from data shown in above
                                              illustration.




                                                                                                                                 303
Operation
Tires and wheels


DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)                                                          DOT (Department of Transportation)
                                                                                               A tire branding symbol 1 ( page 304)
U.S. tire regulations require each new tire
                                                                                               which denotes the tire meets require-
manufacturer or tire retreader to mold a
                                                                                               ments of the U.S. Department of Transpor-
TIN into or onto a sidewall of each tire
                                                                                               tation.
produced.
The TIN is a unique identifier which facili-                                                   Manufacturer’s identification mark
tates efforts by tire manufactures to notify
                                                                                               The manufacturer’s identification mark 2
purchasers in recall situations or other
                                                                                               ( page 304) denotes the tire
safety matters concerning tires and gives
                                                1 DOT                                          manufacturer.
purchasers the means to easily identify
such tires.                                     2 Manufacturer’s identification mark           New tires have a mark with two symbols.
                                                3 Tire size
The TIN is comprised of “Manufacturer’s         4 Tire type code (at the option of the tire    Retreaded tires have a mark with four sym-
identification mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type     manufacturer)                                bols. For more information on retreaded
code” and “Date of manufacture”.                5 Date of manufacture                          tires, see ( page 283).

                                                   i                                           Tire size
                                                   For illustration purposes only. Actual      The code 3 ( page 304) indicates the
                                                   data on tires is specific to each vehicle   tire size.
                                                   and may vary from data shown in above
                                                   illustration.




304
                                                                                                                                Operation
                                                                                                                       Tires and wheels


Tire type code                                   Maximum tire load
The code 4 ( page 304) may, at the
                                                                                                 Warning!                                G
option of the manufacturer, be used as a                                                         Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
descriptive code for identifying significant                                                     specified load limit or vehicle capacity
characteristics of the tire.                                                                     weight as indicated on the placard located
                                                                                                 on the driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the
Date of manufacture                                                                              tires can overheat them, possibly causing a
The date of manufacture 5 ( page 304)                                                            blowout. Overloading the tires can also
identifies the week and year of manufac-                                                         result in handling or steering problems, or
ture.                                                                                            brake failure.
The first two figures identify the week,         1 Maximum tire load rating
starting with “01” to represent the first full                                                  For more information on tire load rating
week of the calendar year. The second two           i                                           ( page 300)
figures represent the year.                         For illustration purposes only. Actual      For information on calculating total and
For example, “3202” represents the 32nd             data on tires is specific to each vehicle   cargo load capacities ( page 289).
week of 2002.                                       and may vary from data shown in above
                                                    illustration.

                                                 The maximum tire load is the maximum
                                                 weight the tires are designed to support.




                                                                                                                                          305
Operation
Tires and wheels


Maximum tire inflation pressure                Always follow the recommended tire                Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
                                               inflation pressure ( page 292) for proper         (U.S. vehicles)
                                               tire inflation.
                                                                                                 Tire manufacturers are required to grade
                                                                                                 tires based on three performance
                                                Warning!                                G        factors: treadwear, traction and
                                                                                                 temperature resistance.
                                                Never exceed the max. tire inflation
                                                pressure. Follow recommended tire inflation
                                                pressures.
                                                Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
                                                wear excessively and/or unevenly, adverse-
1 Maximum permissible tire inflation            ly affect handling and fuel economy, and are
  pressure                                      more likely to fail from being overheated.

   i                                            Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
                                                can adversely affect handling and ride com-
   For illustration purposes only. Actual
                                                fort, wear unevenly, increase stopping dis-
   data on tires is specific to each vehicle
                                                tance, and result in sudden deflation            1 Treadwear
   and may vary from data shown in above
                                                (blowout) because they are more likely to        2 Traction
   illustration.
                                                become punctured or damaged by road de-          3 Temperature resistance
                                                bris, potholes etc.
This is the maximum permissible tire                                                                i
inflation pressure for the tire.                                                                    For illustration purposes only. Actual
                                                                                                    data on tires is specific to each vehicle
                                                                                                    and may vary from data shown in above
                                                                                                    illustration.


306
                                                                                                                            Operation
                                                                                                                   Tires and wheels


Quality grades can be found, where appli-    Treadwear                                      Traction
cable, on the tire sidewall between tread
                                             The treadwear grade is a comparative rat-      The traction grades, from highest to low-
shoulder and maximum section width. For
                                             ing based on the wear rate of the tire when    est, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades rep-
example:
                                             tested under controlled conditions on a        resent the tire’s ability to stop on wet
                                             specified government test course. For ex-      pavement as measured under controlled
Treadwear Traction Temperature
                                             ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one        conditions on specified government test
200           AA         A                   and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the      surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
                                             government course as a tire graded 100.        marked C may have poor traction perfor-
All passenger car tires must conform to      The relative performance of tires depends      mance.
federal safety requirements in addition to   upon the actual conditions of their use,
these grades.                                however, and may depart significantly
                                             from the norm due to variations in driving
                                                                                             Warning!                                G
                                             habits, service practices and differences in    The traction grade assigned to this tire is
                                             road characteristics and climate.               based on straight-ahead braking traction
                                                                                             tests, and does not include acceleration,
                                                                                             cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
                                                                                             characteristics.




                                                                                                                                      307
Operation
Tires and wheels


Temperature                                                                                        Tire ply material
The temperature grades are A (the high-
                                                 Warning!                                 G
est), B, and C, representing the tire’s resis-   The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
tance to the generation of heat and its          lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
ability to dissipate heat when tested under      not overloaded. Excessive speed, underin-
controlled conditions on a specified indoor      flation, or excessive loading, either sepa-
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tem-       rately or in combination, can cause
perature can cause the material of the tire      excessive heat build-up and possible tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and ex-      failure.
cessive temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger                                                           1 Plies in sidewall
car tires must meet under the Federal Mo-                                                          2 Plies under tread
tor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of                                                             i
performance on the laboratory test wheel                                                              For illustration purposes only. Actual
than the minimum required by law.                                                                     data on tires is specific to each vehicle
                                                                                                      and may vary from data shown in above
                                                                                                      illustration.

                                                                                                   This marking tells you about the type of
                                                                                                   cord and number of plies in the sidewall
                                                                                                   and under the tread.




308
                                                                                                                             Operation
                                                                                                                     Tires and wheels


Tire and loading terminology                   Bar                                              DOT (Department of Transportation)
                                               Another metric unit for air pressure. There      A tire branding symbol which denotes the
Accessory weight                               are 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi)         tire meets requirements of the
                                               to 1 bar; there are 100 kilopascals (kPa)        U.S. Department of Transportation.
The combined weight (in excess of those
                                               to 1 bar.
standard items which may be replaced) of
                                                                                                GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
automatic transmission, power steering,
                                               Bead
power brakes, power windows, power                                                              The GAWR is the maximum permissible
seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that   The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped       axle weight. The gross vehicle weight on
these items are available as                   by steel cords that hold the tire onto the       each axle must never exceed the GAWR for
factory-installed equipment (whether           rim.                                             the front and rear axle indicated on the
installed or not).                                                                              Certification label located on the driver's
                                               Cold tire inflation pressure                     door B-pillar.
Air pressure                                   Tire inflation pressure when your vehicle
                                               has been sitting for at least three hours or     GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire.       driven no more than one mile (1.6 km).           The GVW comprises the weight of the
Air pressure is expressed in pounds per                                                         vehicle including fuel, tools, spare wheel,
square inch (psi), or kilopascal (kPa) or      Curb weight                                      installed accessories, passengers and
bars.                                                                                           cargo and, if applicable, trailer tongue
                                               The weight of a motor vehicle with stan-
                                                                                                load. The GWV must never exceed the
                                               dard equipment including the maximum
Aspect ratio                                                                                    GWVR indicated on the Certification label
                                               capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so
                                                                                                located on the driver's door B-pillar.
Dimensional relationship between tire          equipped, air conditioning and additional
section height and section width               optional equipment, but without passen-
expressed in percentage.                       gers and cargo.



                                                                                                                                      309
Operation
Tires and wheels


GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)              Maximum tire inflation pressure                PSI (Pounds per square inch)
This is the maximum permissible vehicle         This number is the greatest amount of air      A standard unit of measure for air pressure
weight of the fully loaded vehicle (weight of   pressure that should ever be put in the tire   -> bar, kilopascal (kPa).
the vehicle including all options, passen-      under normal driving conditions.
gers, fuel, and cargo and, if applicable,                                                      Recommended tire inflation pressure
trailer tongue load). It is indicated on        Normal occupant weight
                                                                                               Recommended tire inflation pressure
Certification label located on the driver's
                                                The number of occupants the vehicle is         listed on placard located on driver's door
door B-pillar.
                                                designed to seat, multiplied by                B-pillar for normal driving conditions.
                                                68 kilograms (150 lbs).                        Provides best handling, tread life and
Kilopascal (kPa)
                                                                                               riding comfort.
The metric unit for air pressure. There are     Occupant distribution
6.9 kPa to one psi; another metric unit for     The distribution of occupants in a vehicle     Rim
air pressure is bars. There are                 at their designated seating positions.         A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube
100 kilopascals (kPa) to one bar.                                                              assembly upon which the tire beads are
                                                Production options weight                      seated.
Maximum load rating
                                                The combined weight of those installed
The maximum load in kilograms and                                                              Sidewall
                                                regular production options weighing over
pounds that can be carried by the tire.
                                                5 lbs (2.3 kilograms) in excess of those       The portion of a tire between the tread and
                                                standard items which they replace, not         the bead.
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
                                                previously considered in curb weight or
The sum of curb weight, accessory weight,       accessory weight, including heavy duty
vehicle capacity weight and production          brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty
options weight.                                 battery, and special trim.



310
                                                                                                                           Operation
                                                                                                                   Tires and wheels


TIN (Tire Identification Number)               Tire speed rating                             Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
Unique identifier which facilitates efforts    Part of tire designation; indicates the       A tire information system that provides
by tire manufacturers to notify purchasers     speed range for which a tire is approved.     consumers with ratings for a tire's traction,
in recall situations or other safety matters                                                 temperature and treadwear. Ratings are
concerning tires and gives purchases the       Traction                                      determined by tire manufacturers using
means to easily identify such tires. The TIN                                                 government testing procedures. The
                                               Force exerted by the vehicle on the road
is comprised of “Manufacturer's identifica-                                                  ratings are molded into the sidewall of the
                                               via the tires. The amount of grip provided.
tion mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type code”                                                    tire.
and “Date of manufacture”.
                                               Tread
                                                                                             Vehicle capacity weight
Tire load rating                               The portion of a tire that comes into
                                               contact with the road.                        Rated cargo and luggage load plus
Numerical code associated with the                                                           68 kilograms (150 lbs) times the vehicle's
maximum load a tire can support.               Treadwear indicators                          designated seating capacity.

Tire ply composition and material used         Narrow bands, sometimes called                Vehicle maximum load on the tire
                                               “wear bars” that show across the tread of
This indicates the number of plies or the                                                    Load on an individual tire that is
                                               a tire when only 1/6 in (1.6 mm) of tread
number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in                                                  determined by distributing to each axle its
                                               remains.
the tire tread and sidewall. Tire manufac-                                                   share of the maximum loaded vehicle
turers also must indicate the ply materials                                                  weight and dividing it by two.
in the tire and sidewall, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.




                                                                                                                                    311
Operation
Tires and wheels


Rotating tires                                    If applicable to your vehicle's tire configu-
                                                  ration, tires can be rotated according to        Warning!                              G
                                                  the tire manufacturer's recommended in-
 Warning!                                G        tervals in the tire manufacturer's warranty      Have the tightening torque checked after
                                                  pamphlet located in your vehicle literature      changing a wheel. Wheels could become
 Rotate front and rear wheels only if the tires   portfolio. If none is available, tires should    loose if not tightened with a torque of
 are of the same dimension.                       be rotated every 3000 to 6000 miles              110 lb-ft (150 Nm).
 If your vehicle is equipped with mixed-size      (5000 to 10000 km), or sooner if neces-          Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel
 tires (different tire dimensions front vs.       sary, according to the degree of tire wear.      bolts specified for your vehicle's rims.
 rear), tire rotation is not possible.            The same rotation (spinning) direction
                                                  must be maintained ( page 286).
                                                                                                  For information on wheel change, see the
Tire rotation can be performed on vehicles        Rotate tires before the characteristic tire     “Practical hints” section ( page 381).
with tires of the same dimension all              wear pattern becomes visible (shoulder
around. If your vehicle is equipped with          wear on front tires and tread center wear
tires of the same dimension all around,           on rear tires).
tires can be rotated, observing a a               Thoroughly clean the mounting face of
front-to-rear rotation pattern that will          wheels and brake disks, i.e. the inner side
maintain the intended rotation (spinning)         of the wheels/tires, during each rotation.
direction of the tire ( page 286).                Check for and ensure proper tire inflation
In some cases, such as when your vehicle          pressure.
is equipped with mixed-size tires (different
tire dimension front vs. rear), tire rotation
is not possible.




312
                                                                                                                            Operation
                                                                                                                       Winter driving
  Winter driving
Before the onset of winter, have your        Winter tires                                    Always observe the speed rating of the
vehicle winterized at an authorized                                                          winter tires installed on your vehicle. If the
Mercedes-Benz Center. This service           Always use winter tires at temperatures         maximum speed for which your tires are
includes:                                    below 45°F (7°C) and whenever wintry            rated is below the speed rating of your
                                             road conditions prevail. Use of winter tires    vehicle, you must place a notice to this
   Check of anticorrosion and antifreeze
                                             is the only way to achieve the maximum          effect where it will be seen by the driver.
   concentration.
                                             effectiveness of the ABS and ESP in winter      Such notices are available from your tire
   Addition of cleaning concentrate to the   operation.                                      dealer or from any authorized
   water of the windshield and headlamp                                                      Mercedes-Benz Center.
                                             For safe handling, make sure that all
   cleaning system. Add MB Concentrate
                                             mounted winter tires are of the same make
   “S” to a premixed windshield washer
   solvent/antifreeze which is formulated
                                             and have the same tread design.                  Warning!                               G
   for below freezing temperatures
   ( page 416).                               Warning!                               G        If you use your spare tire when winter tires
                                                                                              are fitted on the other wheels, be aware that
   Battery test. Battery capacity drops                                                       the difference in tire characteristics may
                                              Winter tires with a tread depth under 1/6 in
   with decreasing ambient temperature.                                                       very well impair turning stability and that
                                              (4 mm) must be replaced. They are no
   A well charged battery helps to make                                                       overall driving stability may be reduced.
                                              longer suitable for winter operation.
   sure that the engine can be started,                                                       Adapt your driving style accordingly.
   even at low ambient temperatures.
                                                                                              Have the spare tire replaced with a winter
   Tire change. Mercedes-Benz recom-                                                          tire at the nearest authorized
   mends M+S rated radial-ply tires with a                                                    Mercedes-Benz Center.
   minimum tread depth of approximately
   1/ in (4 mm) on all four wheels for the
      6
   winter season.



                                                                                                                                      313
Operation
Winter driving


Block heater (Canada only)                    Please observe the following guidelines     !
                                              when using snow chains:                     Even on vehicles with all-wheel-drive
The engine is equipped with a block                                                       use snow chains on rear tires only.
                                                 Use of snow chains is not permissible
heater.
                                                 with all wheel/tire combinations.        Use of snow chains is not permissible
The electrical cable may be installed at an                                               with tire sizes:
                                                 Snow chains should only be used on
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
                                                 the rear wheels. Follow the manufac-         245/45 R18 100V XL M+S on
                                                 turer's mounting instructions.               81/2 x 18 rims
Snow chains
                                                 Only use snow chains that are                245/45 R18 96H M+S on 81/2 x 18
Snow chains should only be driven on             approved by Mercedes-Benz. Your              rims
snow-covered roads at speeds not to              authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains           be glad to advise you on this subject.       245/45 R18 100Y XL (Extra Load)
as soon as possible when driving on roads                                                     245/45 ZR18 100Y XL (Extra Load)
                                                 Use of snow chains may be prohibited
without snow.
                                                 depending on location. Always check          265/40 R18 101Y XL (Extra Load)
   i                                             local and state laws before installing
                                                                                              265/40 ZR18 101Y XL (Extra Load)
                                                 snow chains.
   When driving with snow chains, you
                                                                                              245/40 ZR19 98Y XL (Extra Load)
   may wish to deactivate the ESP
   ( page 83) before setting the vehicle                                                      245/40 ZR19
   in motion. This will improve the                                                           275/35 ZR19 100Y XL (Extra Load)
   vehicle‘s traction.
                                                                                              275/35 ZR19




314
                                                                                                                          Operation
                                                                                                                       Maintenance
   Maintenance
We strongly recommend that you have            Starting approximately one month before         i
your vehicle serviced by an authorized         your next maintenance service is due, one       Vehicles equipped with FSS (Flexible
Mercedes-Benz Center, in accordance with       of the following messages will appear in        Service System) only (Canada vehi-
the Maintenance Booklet at the times           the multifunction display while you are         cles):
called for by the maintenance service indi-    driving or when you switch on the ignition
cator display.                                 (example service A):                            The interval between services depends
                                                                                               on your driving habits. A gentle driving
Failure to have the vehicle maintained in      'A'   SERVICE   IN XXXXX MILES (KM)             style, moderate engine speeds and the
accordance with the Maintenance Booklet        'A'   SERVICE   IN XXX DAYS                     avoidance of short-distance trips will
and maintenance service indicator at the       'A'   SERVICE   IN X DAY                        lengthen the interval between services.
designated times /mileage will result in ve-   'A'   SERVICE   DUE NOW
hicle damage not covered by the
                                                                                            Clearing the maintenance service indi-
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
                                                                                            cator
The maintenance service indicator will no-
tify you when your next maintenance ser-                                                    The maintenance service indicator is auto-
vice is due.                                                                                matically cleared after 30 seconds when
                                                                                            you switch on the ignition or when reach-
                                               The type of maintenance service due is in-   ing the maintenance service threshold
                                               dicated in the multifunction display:        while driving. You can also clear it yourself.
                                               9          Basic service (A)                    Press the reset button J in the instru-
                                                                                               ment cluster ( page 134).
                                               ´          Extended service (B)




                                                                                                                                    315
Operation
Maintenance


Maintenance service term exceeded                Press button k or j on the mul-             have the maintenance service indicator re-
                                                 tifunction steering wheel until the         set. The automotive maintenance facility
If you have exceeded the suggested main-         maintenance service indicator with the      carrying out the maintenance service will
tenance service term, you will see the fol-      service symbol 9 or ´ and the               find the information for resetting the main-
lowing message in the multifunction              service deadline appears in the multi-      tenance service indicator in the mainte-
display:                                         function display.                           nance-relevant information for your
'A' SERVICE EXCEEDED                                                                         vehicle. Such information is available from
                                                 i                                           either your authorized Mercedes-Benz
BY XXXX MILES (KM)
'A' SERVICE EXCEEDED BY XXX DAYS
                                                 If the battery is disconnected, the days    Center or directly from Mercedes-Benz
'A' SERVICE EXCEEDED BY X DAY
                                                 of disconnection will not be included in    USA, LLC.
                                                 the count shown by the maintenance
In addition, a signal sounds when the mes-       service indicator. To arrive at the true       i
sage appears.                                    maintenance service deadline, you will         If the maintenance service indicator
Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will         need to subtract these days from the           was inadvertently reset, have an autho-
reset the maintenance service indicator          days shown in the maintenance service          rized Mercedes-Benz Center correct it.
following a completed maintenance ser-           indicator.
                                                                                                Only reset if the proper maintenance
vice.                                            Do not confuse the maintenance ser-            service has been performed. Resetting
                                                 vice indicator with the engine oil level       the system without performing the
Calling up the maintenance service in-           indicator :.                                   proper service as called for by the
dicator                                                                                         maintenance service indicator will re-
                                              Resetting the maintenance service indi-           sult in engine damage and/or other ve-
   Switch on ignition ( page 34).                                                               hicle damage not covered by the
                                              cator
   The standard display of the control sys-                                                     Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
   tem appears ( page 142).                   In the event that the maintenance service
                                              on your vehicle is not carried out by an au-
                                              thorized Mercedes-Benz Center, you can

316
                                                                                                                            Operation
                                                                                                                          Vehicle care
   Vehicle care
Cleaning and care of vehicle                     Such damage is caused not only by ex-        More frequent washings are necessary to
                                                 treme and varying climatic conditions, but   deal with unfavorable conditions:
                                                 also by:
                                                                                                 near the ocean
 Warning!                               G           Air pollution
                                                                                                 in industrial areas (smoke, exhaust
 Many cleaning products can be hazardous.           Road salt                                    emissions)
 Some are poisonous, others are flammable.
                                                    Tar                                          during winter operation
 Always follow the instructions on the partic-
 ular container. Always open your vehicle’s         Gravel and stone chipping                 You should check your vehicle from time to
 doors or windows when cleaning the inside.                                                   time for stone chipping or other damage.
                                                 To avoid paint damage, you should imme-
                                                                                              Any damage should be repaired as soon as
 Never use fluids or solvents that are not de-   diately remove:
                                                                                              possible to prevent corrosion.
 signed for cleaning your vehicle.                  Grease and oil
                                                                                              In doing so, do not neglect the underbody
                                                    Fuel                                      of the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thor-
While in operation, even while parked, your
vehicle is subjected to varying external in-        Coolant                                   ough check is a washing of the underbody
fluences which, if gone unchecked, can at-                                                    followed by a thorough inspection. Dam-
                                                    Brake fluid                               aged areas need to be re-undercoat-
tack the paintwork as well as the
underbody and cause lasting damage.                 Bird droppings                            ed.Your vehicle has been treated at the
                                                                                              factory with a wax-base rustproofing in the
                                                    Insects
                                                                                              body cavities which will last for the lifetime
                                                    Tree resins, etc.                         of the vehicle. Post-production treatment
                                                 Frequent washing reduces and/or elimi-       is neither necessary nor recommended by
                                                 nates the aggressiveness and potency of      Mercedes-Benz because of the possibility
                                                 the above adverse influences.                of incompatibility between materials used
                                                                                              in the production process and others ap-
                                                                                              plied later.

                                                                                                                                      317
Operation
Vehicle care


We have selected car-care products and           Power-wash                                      Tar stains
compiled recommendations which are
                                                 When using a power-wash for cleaning the        Quickly remove tar stains before they dry
specially matched to our vehicles and
                                                 vehicle, always observe the manufactur-         and become more difficult to remove. A tar
which always reflect the latest technology.
                                                 er’s operating instructions.                    remover is recommended.
You can obtain Mercedes-Benz approved
car-care products at an authorized                  i                                            Paintwork, painted body components
Mercedes-Benz Center.                               Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
                                                                                                 Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care
Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or         If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of
                                                                                                 should be applied when water drops on the
damage due to negligent or incorrect care           water, and a SmartKey with
                                                                                                 paint surface do not “bead up”, normally
cannot always be removed or repaired with           KEYLESS-GO* is in close proximity, i.e.
                                                                                                 every three to five months, depending on
the car-care products recommended here.             within approx. 3 ft. (approx. 1 m), the
                                                                                                 climate and washing detergent used.
In such cases it is best to seek aid at an au-      vehicle could be inadvertently locked
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center.                      or unlocked.                                 Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner
                                                                                                 should be applied if the paint surface
The following topics deal with the cleaning                                                      shows signs of embedded dirt (i.e. loss of
and care of your vehicle and give important         !
                                                                                                 gloss).
“how-to” information as well as references          Never use a round nozzle to
to Mercedes-Benz approved car-care prod-            power-wash tires. The intense jet of         Do not apply any of these products or wax
ucts.                                               water can result in damage to the tire.      if your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the
                                                                                                 hood is still hot.
                                                    Always replace a damaged tire.
                                                                                                 Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up Stick
                                                    Always keep the jet of water moving
                                                                                                 for quick and provisional repairs of minor
                                                    across the surface. Do not aim directly
                                                                                                 paint damage (i.e. chips from stones, vehi-
                                                    at electrical parts, electrical connec-
                                                                                                 cle doors, etc.).
                                                    tors, seals, or other rubber parts.



318
                                                                                                                            Operation
                                                                                                                         Vehicle care


Engine cleaning                                Rinse with clear water and thoroughly dry       Ornamental moldings
                                               with a chamois. Do not allow cleaning
Prior to cleaning the engine compartment                                                       For regular cleaning and care of very dirty
                                               agents to dry on the finish.
make sure to protect electrical compo-                                                         chrome-plated parts, use a chrome clean-
nents and connectors from the intrusion of     Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in ex-    er.
water and cleaning agents.                     terior rear view mirrors prior to running the
                                               vehicle through an automatic car wash to        Headlamps, tail lamps, side markers,
Corrosion protection, such as MB Anticor-
                                               prevent damage to the mirrors.                  turn signal lenses
rosion Wax, should be applied to the en-
gine compartment after every engine            In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces        Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
cleaning. Before applying, all control link-   of road salt as soon as possible.                  Mercedes-Benz approved Car Sham-
age bushings and joints should be lubricat-    When washing the underbody, do not for-            poo, with plenty of water.
ed. The poly-V-belt and all pulleys should     get to clean the inner sides of the wheels.     To prevent scratches, never apply strong
be protected from any wax.                                                                     force and use only a soft, non-scratchy
                                                  i                                            cloth when cleaning the lenses. Do not at-
Vehicle washing                                   Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:                   tempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry cloth
Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle         If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of   or sponge.
in direct sunlight. Only use a mild car wash      water, and a SmartKey with
detergent, such as Mercedes-Benz ap-              KEYLESS-GO* is in close proximity, i.e.
proved Car Shampoo.                               within approx. 3 ft. (approx. 1 m), the
                                                  vehicle could be inadvertently locked
Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a dif-
                                                  or unlocked.
fused jet of water. Direct only a very weak
spray towards the ventilation intake. Use
plenty of water and rinse the sponge and
chamois frequently.



                                                                                                                                    319
Operation
Vehicle care


Cleaning the Distronic* system sensor        Cleaning the Parktronic* system               To prevent scratches, never apply strong
cover                                        sensors                                       force and only use a soft, non-scratchy
                                                                                           cloth when cleaning the sensor. Do not at-
                                                                                           tempt to wipe dirty sensors with a dry cloth
                                                                                           or sponge.

                                                                                           Wiper blades

                                                                                              !
                                                                                              The windshield wipers must be in a ver-
                                                                                              tical position before folding them away
                                                                                              from the windshield. They could other-
1 Distronic system sensor cover              1 Parktronic system sensors                      wise damage the hood.

   Use a mild car wash detergent, such as       Clean the sensors 1 on the bumpers
                                                                                              Turn on the wipers and place it in a ver-
   Mercedes-Benz approved Car Sham-             using a mild car wash detergent, such
                                                                                              tical position.
   poo, with plenty of water to clean sen-      as Mercedes-Benz approved Car Sham-
   sor cover 1.                                 poo, with plenty of water and a soft,      For information on placing the wipers to a
                                                non-scratchy cloth.                        vertical position, see “Replacing wiper
To prevent scratches, never apply strong
                                                                                           blades” ( page 379).
force and use only a soft, non-scratchy      When using a steam cleaner or power
cloth when cleaning the sensor cover. Do     washer, aim nozzle only briefly from a min-
not attempt to wipe dirty sensors with a     imum distance of 12 in (30 cm) at
dry cloth or sponge.                         sensors 1.
                                             Do not apply strong pressure to the sensor
                                             cover, applying strong pressure may dam-
                                             age the sensor cover.

320
                                                                                                                         Operation
                                                                                                                       Vehicle care


                                                Window cleaning                                  Use a window cleaning solution on all
Warning!                               G                                                         glass surfaces.
                                                   !
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and re-                                                    An automotive glass cleaner is recom-
                                                   The windshield wipers must be in a ver-
move SmartKey from starter switch (vehi-                                                         mended.
                                                   tical position before folding them away
cles with KEYLESS-GO*: Make sure the               from the windshield. They could other-        !
vehicle's on-board electronics have status         wise damage the hood.
                                                                                                 Fold the windshield wiper arms back
0) before cleaning the wiper blades. Other-
                                                                                                 onto the windshield before turning the
wise, the wiper motor could suddenly turn          Turn on the wipers and place it in a ver-     SmartKey in the starter switch.
on and cause injury.                               tical position.
                                                                                                 Hold on to the wiper when folding the
                                                For information on placing the wipers to a       wiper arm back. If released, the force
  Clean the wiper blade inserts with a          vertical position, see “Replacing wiper
  clean cloth and detergent solution.                                                            of the impact from the tensioning
                                                blades” ( page 379).                             spring could crack the windshield.
  !
  Fold the windshield wiper arms back            Warning!                               G
  onto the windshield before turning the
  SmartKey in the starter switch.                For safety reasons, switch off wipers and re-
                                                 move SmartKey from starter switch (vehi-
  Hold on to the wiper when folding the
                                                 cles with KEYLESS-GO*: Make sure the
  wiper arm back. If released, the force
                                                 vehicle's on-board electronics have status
  of the impact from the tensioning
                                                 0) before cleaning the wiper blades. Other-
  spring could crack the windshield.
                                                 wise, the wiper motor could suddenly turn
                                                 on and cause injury.




                                                                                                                                  321
Operation
Vehicle care


Light alloy wheels                            Steering wheel and gear selector lever       Seat belts
Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care             Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly    The webbing must not be treated with
should be used for regular cleaning of the    or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved         chemical cleaning agents. Only use clear,
light alloy wheels.                           Leather Care.                                lukewarm water and soap. Do not dry the
                                                                                           webbing at temperatures above 176°F
If possible, clean wheels once a week with
                                              Cup holder                                   (80°C) or in direct sunlight.
Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care, us-
ing a soft bristle brush and a strong spray   Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or
of water.                                     mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a      Warning!                             G
Follow the instructions on container.         washing solution. Wipe with a cloth moist-
                                              ened in lukewarm solution. Do not use         Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
   i                                          scouring agents.                              severely weaken them. In a crash they may
                                                                                            not be able to provide adequate protection.
   Only use acid-free cleaning materials.
   Acid may cause corrosion or damage         Hard plastic trim items
   the clear coat.                            Pour Mercedes-Benz approved Interior
                                              Care onto soft lint-free cloth and apply
Instrument cluster                            with light pressure.
Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or
                                              Headliner and shelf below rear window
mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a
washing solution. Wipe with a cloth moist-    Clean with soft bristle brush, or use a
ened in lukewarm solution. Do not use         dry-shampoo cleaner in case of excessive
scouring agents.                              dirt.




322
                                                                                                                         Operation
                                                                                                                        Vehicle care


Upholstery                                    Nubuck leather upholstery (CL 55 AMG           Plastic and rubber parts
                                              and CL 65 AMG)
Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing                                                     Do not use oil or wax on these parts.
clothing that have the tendency to give off   The nubuck leather upholstery is treated
coloring (e.g. when wet, etc.) may cause      with a protective coating. Wipe nubuck         Wood trims
the upholstery to become permanently dis-     leather upholstery with damp microfiber
                                                                                             Dampen cloth using water and use damp
colored. By lining the seats with a proper    cloth to remove dust and other light stains.
                                                                                             cloth to clean wood trims in your vehicle.
intermediate cover, contact-discoloration     Carefully dab nubuck leather upholstery
                                                                                             Do not use solvents like tar remover or
will be prevented.                            with a dry microfiber cloth to remove oil
                                                                                             wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as
                                              stains.
                                                                                             these may be abrasive.
Leather upholstery
                                                 !
Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth
                                                 Do not use Mercedes-Benz approved
and dry thoroughly or clean with
                                                 Leather Care or any solvents to clean
Mercedes-Benz approved Leather Care.
                                                 nubuck leather upholstery.
Exercise particular care when cleaning per-
forated leather as its underside should not      Avoid hard scrubbing on nubuck leath-
become wet.                                      er upholstery.




                                                                                                                                     323
324
                 Practical hints
                  What to do if …?
               Where will I find...?
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
 Opening/closing in an emergency
     Replacing SmartKey batteries
                  Replacing bulbs
           Replacing wiper blades
                           Flat tire
                           Battery
                    Jump starting
               Towing the vehicle
                             Fuses




                              325
Practical hints
What to do if …?


Lamps in instrument cluster               If any of the following lamps in the instru-    ignition, have the respective bulb checked
                                          ment cluster fails to come on during the        and replaced if necessary.
General information:                      bulb self-check when switching on the

Problem                                  Possible cause                                  Suggested solution
-         The yellow ABS malfunction in- The ABS has detected a malfunction and             Continue driving with added caution.
          dicator lamp comes on while    has switched off. The BAS and the ESP are          Wheels may lock during hard braking,
          driving.                       also switched off (see messages in multi-          reducing steering capability.
                                         function display).
                                                                                            Read and observe messages in the mul-
                                         The brake system is still functioning nor-         tifunction display ( page 335).
                                         mally but without the ABS available.
                                                                                        Have the system checked at an autho-
                                         If the ABS control unit is malfunctioning,     rized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
                                         other systems such as Parktronic*,             possible.
                                         Distronic*, and the automatic transmission Failure to follow these instructions increas-
                                         may also be malfunctioning.                es the risk of an accident.
                                         The charging voltage has fallen below              Switch off electrical consumers that are
                                         10 volts and the ABS has switched off.             currently not needed, e.g. seat heat-
                                         The battery may not be charged sufficiently.       ing*.
                                                                                            If necessary, have the generator
                                                                                            (alternator) and battery checked.
                                                                                         When the voltage is above this value again,
                                                                                         the ABS is operational again.



326
                                                                                                                       Practical hints
                                                                                                                      What to do if …?


Problem                                         Possible cause                                Suggested solution
;                 The red brake warning         You are driving with the parking brake set.       Release the parking brake ( page 50).
(USA only)        lamp comes on while
                  driving and you hear a
3
                  warning sound.
(Canada only)
                  The red brake warning         There is insufficient brake fluid in the reser- Risk of accident!
                  lamp comes on while           voir.
                                                                                                   Carefully stop the vehicle and notify an
                  driving.
                                                                                                   authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Do
                                                                                                   not add brake fluid! This will not solve
                                                                                                   the problem.

                                                    !
Warning!                               G            If you find that the brake fluid in the
                                                    brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
Driving with the brake warning lamp illumi-
                                                    minimum mark or below, have the
nated can result in an accident. Have your
                                                    brake system checked for brake pad
brake system checked immediately if the
                                                    thickness and leaks.
brake warning lamp stays on. Do not add
brake fluid before checking the brake
system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir
can result in spilling brake fluid on hot en-
gine parts and the brake fluid catching fire.
You can be seriously burned.




                                                                                                                                      327
Practical hints
What to do if …?


Problem                                   Possible cause                              Suggested solution
?               The yellow engine malfunc- There is a malfunction in:                    Have the vehicle checked as soon as
(USA only)      tion indicator lamp comes                                                possible by an authorized
                                              The fuel management system
                on while driving                                                         Mercedes-Benz Center.
±                                             The ignition system                        An on-board diagnostic connector is
(Canada only)
                                             The emission control system                 used by the service station to link the
                                                                                         vehicle to the shop diagnostics system.
                                             Systems which affect emissions              It allows the accurate identification of
                                          Such malfunctions may result in excessive      system malfunctions through the read-
                                          emissions values and may switch the en-        out of diagnostic trouble codes. It is lo-
                                          gine to its limp-home (emergency opera-        cated in the front left area of the
                                          tion) mode.                                    footwell next to the parking brake pedal.
                                          Your fuel tank is empty.                       After refuelling, start, turn off, and re-
                                                                                         start the engine three or four times in
                                                                                         succession.
                                                                                      The limp-home mode is canceled. You do
                                                                                      not need to have your vehicle checked.




328
                                                                                                                   Practical hints
                                                                                                                   What to do if …?


Problem                                    Possible cause                              Suggested solution
?               The yellow engine malfunc- A loss of pressure has been detected in the      Check the fuel cap ( page 270).
(USA only)      tion indicator lamp comes fuel system. The fuel cap may not be closed
                                                                                       If it is not closed properly:
                on while driving           properly or the fuel system may be leaky.
±                                                                                           Close the fuel cap.
(Canada only)
                                                                                       If it is closed properly:
                                                                                          Have the fuel system checked by an au-
                                                                                          thorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The yellow fuel tank reserve warning lamp The fuel level has gone below the reserve       Refuel at the next gas station
comes on while driving.                   mark.                                           ( page 270).




                                                                                                                              329
Practical hints
What to do if …?


Problem                                    Possible cause                                 Suggested solution
l         Only vehicles with Distronic*:   You are too close to the vehicle in front of      Apply the brakes immediately to in-
          The red distance warning lamp    you to maintain selected speed.                   crease the following distance.
          comes on while driving.
l         Only vehicles with Distronic*:      You are gaining too rapidly on the vehi-       Apply the brakes immediately.
          The red distance warning lamp       cle ahead of you.
                                                                                             Carefully observe the traffic situation.
          comes on while driving and you
                                              The distance warning system has recog-         You may need to brake or maneuver to
          hear a warning sound.
                                              nized a stationary obstacle on your            avoid hitting an obstacle.
                                              probable line of travel.
v         The yellow ESP warning lamp      The ESP or traction control has come into         When driving off, apply as little throttle
          flashes while driving.           operation because of detected traction loss       as possible.
                                           in at least one tire.
                                                                                             While driving, ease up on the accelera-
                                           Distronic* is deactivated.                        tor.
                                                                                             Adapt your speed and driving to the pre-
                                                                                             vailing road and weather conditions.
                                                                                             Do not deactivate the ESP. Exceptions:
                                                                                             ( page 83).
                                                                                          Failure to follow these instructions increas-
                                                                                          es the risk of an accident.




330
                                                                                                                Practical hints
                                                                                                                What to do if …?


Problem                                     Possible cause                               Suggested solution
v         The yellow ESP warning lamp       The ESP is deactivated.                      Risk of accident!
          comes on while driving.
                                                                                            Switch the ESP back on ( page 84).
                                                                                            Adapt your speed and driving to the pre-
                                                                                            vailing road and weather conditions.
                                                                                         If the ESP cannot be switched back on, have
                                                                                         the system checked at an authorized
                                                                                         Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
<         The red seat belt telltale illumi- The driver or the front passenger has not      Fasten your seat belt.
          nates briefly after starting the fastened his or her seat belt.
                                                                                            The warning lamp goes out.
          engine.




                                                                                                                               331
Practical hints
What to do if …?


Problem                                            Possible cause                                      Suggested solution
H           The yellow warning lamp for the The tire inflation pressure monitor detects a                 Bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
            tire inflation pressure monitor loss of pressure in at least one tire.                        abrupt steering and braking maneuvers.
            comes on.                                                                                     Observe the traffic situation around you.
                                                                                                          Take note of the messages in the multi-
                                                                                                          function display.
                                                                                                       The warning lamp goes out once the tire in-
                                                                                                       flation pressure monitor has been reactivat-
                                                                                                       ed after the tire inflation pressures have
                                                                                                       been corrected.

                                                                                                            i
 Warning!                                 G          Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
                                                     and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi-          The recommended tire inflation pres-
                                                     cle’s handling and stopping ability. Each tire,        sures for your vehicle can be found on
 When the tire inflation pressure monitoring
                                                     including the spare, should be checked                 the tire placard on the driver's door
 system warning light is lit, one or more of
                                                     monthly when cold and set to the recom-                B-pillar or, if available, the inside of the
 your tires is significantly under-inflated. You
                                                     mended inflation pressure as specified in              fuel filler flap, not in the owner’s
 should stop and check your tires as soon as
                                                     the vehicle placard and owner’s manual.                manual.
 possible, and inflate them to the proper
 pressure as indicated on the vehicle’s tire in-
 formation placard. Driving on a significantly
 under-inflated tire causes the tire to over-
 heat and can lead to tire failure.




332
                                                                                                                      Practical hints
                                                                                                                      What to do if …?


Problem                                          Possible cause                                 Suggested solution
1          The red SRS indicator lamp            There is a malfunction in the restraint sys-      Drive with added caution to the nearest
           comes on while driving.               tems. The air bags or emergency tensioning        authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
                                                 devices (ETDs) could deploy unexpectedly
                                                 or fail to activate in an accident.


Warning!                                G
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indi-
cated as outlined above, the SRS may not be
operational. For your safety, we strongly
recommend that you visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have
the system checked; otherwise the SRS may
not be activated when needed in an acci-
dent, which could result in serious or fatal
injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and
unnecessarily which could result in an acci-
dent and/or injury to you or to others.




                                                                                                                                     333
Practical hints
What to do if …?


Lamp in center console

Lamp                 Problem                          Possible cause                     Suggested solution
                                                                  TM1
5                    The indicator lamp comes A BabySmart      child seat is installed
8                    on.                      on the front passenger seat. Therefore
                                              the passenger front air bag is switched
                                              off.
                     The indicator lamp comes The system is malfunctioning.                 Have the system checked as soon as
                     on if there is no                                                      possible by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
                     BabySmartTM child seat                                                 Center.
                     installed on the front pas-
                     senger seat.
                     The indicator lamp does          The system is malfunctioning.         Make sure there is nothing between seat
                     not come on with a                                                     cushion and child seat and check
                     BabySmartTM child seat                                                 installation of the child seat.
                     properly installed on the
                                                                                            If the front passenger front air bag off
                     front passenger seat.
                                                                                            indicator lamp remains out, have the
                                                                                            system checked as soon as possible by an
                                                                                            authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
                                                                                            Do not use the BabySmartTM restraint to
                                                                                            transport children on the front passenger
                                                                                            seat until the system has been repaired.
1
    BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp.



334
                                                                                                                    Practical hints
                                                                                                                    What to do if …?


Vehicle status messages in the multi-          Certain messages of high priority cannot
function display                               be cleared from the multifunction display     Warning!                               G
                                               using the reset button J ( page 134) or
Warning and malfunction messages ap-           button j, k, ÿ, or è on the                   All categories of messages contain impor-
pear in the multifunction display located in   multifunction steering wheel                  tant information which should be taken note
the instrument cluster.                        ( page 138).                                  of and, where a malfunction is indicated, ad-
                                                                                             dressed as soon as possible at an autho-
Certain warning and malfunction messag-        Other messages of high priority and mes-      rized Mercedes-Benz Center.
es are accompanied by an audible signal.       sages of less immediate priority can be
                                               cleared from the multifunction display us-    Failure to repair condition noted may cause
Address these messages accordingly and                                                       damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
follow the additional instructions given in    ing the reset button J or button j,
                                               k, ÿ, or è on the multifunction               Limited Warranty, or result in property dam-
this Operator’s Manual.                                                                      age or personal injury.
                                               steering wheel. They are then stored in the
Selecting the vehicle status message           vehicle status message memory
memory menu in the control system              ( page 153). Remember that clearing a
( page 137) displays both cleared and          message will only make the message dis-       Warning!                               G
uncleared messages.                            appear. Clearing a message will not cor-
High-priority messages appear in the mul-      rect the condition that caused the            No messages will be displayed if either the
tifunction display in red color.               message to appear.                            instrument cluster or the multifunction dis-
                                                                                             play is inoperative. Contact your nearest au-
                                                                                             thorized Mercedes-Benz Center.




                                                                                                                                     335
Practical hints
What to do if …?


  i                                          On the pages that follow, you will find a
  Switching on the ignition causes all in-   compilation of the most important warning
  strument cluster lamps (except high        and malfunction messages that may ap-
  beam headlamp indicator lamp and           pear in the malfunction display.
  turn signal indicator lamps unless acti-   For your convenience the messages are di-
  vated) as well as the multifunction dis-   vided into two sections:
  play to come on. Make sure the lamps
                                                Text messages ( page 337)
  and multifunction display are in work-
  ing order before starting your journey.       Symbol messages ( page 342)




336
                                                                                                             Practical hints
                                                                                                             What to do if …?


Text messages

Display                           Possible cause                                 Possible solution
ABC         ACTIVE BODY CONTROL The capability of the ABC system is restrict-       Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
            DRIVE CAREFULLY!    ed. This can impair the handling.
                                                                                    Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz center as
                                                                                    soon as possible.
                                  The vehicle is losing oil.                        Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
                                                                                    so.
            ACTIVE BODY CONTROL The vehicle is parked on an extremely               Press the vehicle level control button to se-
            STOP, CAR TOO LOW   uneven surface.                                     lect level 2 ( page 223).
                                  ABC is malfunctioning.                            Stop and press the vehicle level control but-
                                                                                    ton to select a higher vehicle level
                                                                                    ( page 223).
                                                                                    Do not turn steering wheel too far to avoid
                                                                                    damaging the front fenders.
                                                                                    Listen for scraping noises.
                                                                                    Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
                                                                                    Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz center as
                                                                                    soon as possible.
            DISPLAY DEFECTIVE     The display for ABC or the ABC system itself      Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
            VISIT WORKSHOP        is malfunctioning.                                soon as possible.



                                                                                                                             337
Practical hints
What to do if …?


Display                            Possible cause                                Possible solution
ABC          ACTIVE BODY CONTROL The capability of the ABC system is restrict-      Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
             VISIT WORKSHOP      ed.
                                                                                    Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz center as
                                                                                    soon as possible.
ABS          MALFUNCTION           The ABS has detected a malfunction and           Continue driving with added caution. Wheels
             VISIT WORKSHOP        has switched off. The ESP and the BAS are        may lock during hard braking, reducing steer-
                                   also deactivated.                                ing capability.
                                   The brake system is still functioning nor-       Have the system checked at an authorized
                                   mally but without the ABS available.             Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
                                                                                 Failure to follow these instructions increases the
                                                                                 risk of an accident.
             DISPLAY DEFECTIVE     The ABS or the ABS display is malfunction-       Continue driving with added caution. Wheels
             VISIT WORKSHOP        ing.                                             may lock during hard braking, reducing steer-
                                                                                    ing capability.
                                                                                    Have the system checked at an authorized
                                                                                    Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
                                                                                 Failure to follow these instructions increases the
                                                                                 risk of an accident.
AIR CLEANER                        The air filter is clogged.                       Have the air filter checked by an authorized
CHANGE CARTRIDGE                                                                    Mercedes-Benz Center.
VISIT WORKSHOP



338
                                                                                                                Practical hints
                                                                                                                What to do if …?


Display                           Possible cause                                   Possible solution
DISTRONIC                         Distronic* is switched off and is temporarily       Try activating Distronic* again later.
EXTERNAL MALFUNCTION              unavailable.
REACTIVATE
DISTRONIC                         Distronic* is switched off because the Dis-         Clean the Distronic* cover in the radiator
CURRENTLY                         tronic* cover in the radiator grille is dirty.      grille ( page 320).
UNAVAILABLE
                                                                                      Restart the vehicle.
SEE OPERATORS MANUAL
DISTRONIC                         Distronic* is malfunctioning or the display         Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
                                  is malfunctioning.                                  soon as possible.
DRIVE TO WORKSHOP
ESP           MALFUNCTION         The ESP has detected a malfunction and              Continue driving with added caution.
              VISIT WORKSHOP      switched off.
                                                                                      Have the system checked at an authorized
                                  The ABS may still be operational.
                                                                                      Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
                                                                                   Failure to follow these instructions increases the
                                                                                   risk of an accident.
              DISPLAY DEFECTIVE   The ESP or the ESP display is malfunction-          Continue driving with added caution.
              VISIT WORKSHOP      ing.                                                Have the system checked at an authorized
                                                                                      Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
                                                                                   Failure to follow these instructions increases the
                                                                                   risk of an accident.



                                                                                                                                339
Practical hints
What to do if …?


Display                                 Possible cause                        Possible solution
ESP           UNAVAILABLE          The ESP was deactivated the power supply      Synchronize the ESP. With the vehicle sta-
              SEE OPERATORS MANUAL has been interrupted.                         tionary and the engine running, turn the
                                                                                 steering wheel completely to the left and
                                        The ABS is still operational.
                                                                                 then to the right to synchronize the ESP.
                                                                              If the ESP message does not go out:
                                                                                 Continue driving with added caution.
                                                                                 Have the system checked at an authorized
                                                                                 Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
                                                                              Failure to follow these instructions increases the
                                                                              risk of an accident.

  !
  When synchronizing the ESP, make
  sure you can turn the steering wheel in
  both directions as far as it will go with-
  out the wheel hitting any objects, e.g.
  a road curb.




340
                                                                                                Practical hints
                                                                                                What to do if …?


Display               Possible cause                                Possible solution
MOVE SELECTOR LEVER   You have tried to turn off the engine with       Place the gear selector lever in position P.
TO PARK               the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button
                      ( page 35) with the gear selector lever not
                      in P.




                                                                                                                341
Practical hints
What to do if …?


Symbol messages

Display                            Possible cause                               Possible solution
#                 BATTERY CHARGE   The battery is no longer charging.               Stop immediately and check the
                  VISIT WORKSHOP   Possible causes:                                 poly-V-belt.
                                      alternator malfunctioning                 If it is broken:
                                      broken poly-V-belt                            Do not continue to drive. Otherwise the
                                                                                    engine will overheat due to an inoperative
                                   Do not forget that the brake system re-
                                                                                    water pump which may result in damage
                                   quires electrical energy and may be oper-
                                                                                    to the engine. Notify an authorized
                                   ating with restricted capability.
                                                                                    Mercedes-Benz Center.
                                   Considerably greater brake pedal force is
                                   required and the stopping distance is     If it is intact:
                                   longer.
                                                                                  Drive immediately to the nearest autho-
                                                                                  rized Mercedes-Benz Center. Adjust driv-
                                                                                  ing to be consistent with reduced braking
                                                                                  responsiveness.
;                  RELEASE         You are driving with the parking brake en-       Release the parking brake ( page 50).
(USA only)         PARKING BRAKE   gaged.
3
(Canada only)




342
                                                                                                                         Practical hints
                                                                                                                         What to do if …?


Display                                         Possible cause                                  Possible solution
2                    BRAKE PAD WEAR             The brake pads have reached their wear             Have the brake pads replaced as soon as
                     VISIT WORKSHOP             limit.                                             possible.
;                    BRAKE FLUID                There is insufficient brake fluid in the res-      Risk of accident! Stop the vehicle and no-
(USA only)           VISIT WORKSHOP             ervoir.                                            tify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
3                                                                                                  Do not add brake fluid! This will not solve
(Canada only)                                                                                      the problem.
                                                                                                Failure to follow these instructions increases
                                                                                                the risk of accident.

                                                    !                                                 !
Warning!                               G            If you find that the brake fluid in the           Brake pad thickness must be visually
                                                    brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the           checked by a qualified technician at the
Driving with this message displayed can re-
                                                    minimum mark or below, have the                   intervals specified in the Maintenance
sult in an accident. Have your brake system
                                                    brake system checked for brake pad                Booklet.
checked immediately. Don’t add brake fluid
                                                    thickness and leaks.
before checking the brake system. Overfill-
ing the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and
the brake fluid catching fire. You can be se-
riously burned.




                                                                                                                                         343
Practical hints
What to do if …?


Display                                         Possible cause                              Possible solution
?                     VISIT WORKSHOP            There may be a malfunction in the:             Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
                                                                                               Center as soon as possible.
                                                   Fuel injection system
                                                   Ignition system
                                                   Exhaust system
                                                   Fuel system
B                     COOLANT                   The coolant level is too low.                  Add coolant ( page 279).
                      CHECK LEVEL!
                                                                                               If you have to add coolant frequently,
                                                                                               have the cooling system checked by an
                                                                                               authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

                                                   !
 Warning!                               G          Do not ignore the low engine coolant
                                                   level warning. Extended driving with
 Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.
                                                   the message and symbol displayed
 Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which
                                                   may cause serious engine damage not
 may burn if it comes into contact with hot
                                                   covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
 engine parts. You can be seriously burned.
                                                   Warranty.
                                                   Do not drive without a sufficient
                                                   amount of coolant in the cooling sys-
                                                   tem. The engine will overheat, causing
                                                   major engine damage.


344
                                                                                                                  Practical hints
                                                                                                                  What to do if …?


Display                                       Possible cause                              Possible solution
Ï                    COOLANT                  The coolant is too hot.                        Stop the vehicle and turn off the engine.
                     STOP, ENGINE OFF
                                                                                             Only start the engine again after the mes-
                                                                                             sage disappears. You could otherwise
                                                                                             damage the engine.

                                              During severe operating conditions,
Warning!                              G       e.g. stop-and-go traffic, the coolant tem-
                                              perature may rise close to 248°F (120°C).
Driving when your engine is badly overheat-
ed can cause some fluids which may have          !
leaked into the engine compartment to            The engine should not be operated with
catch fire. You could be seriously burned.       the coolant temperature above 248°F
Steam from an overheated engine can cause        (120°C). Doing so may cause serious
serious burns and can occur just by opening      engine damage which is not covered by
the engine hood. Stay away from the engine       the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
if you see or hear steam coming from it.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.




                                                                                                                                  345
Practical hints
What to do if …?


Display                           Possible cause                     Possible solution
Ï              COOLANT            The poly-V-belt could be broken.       Stop immediately and check the
               STOP, ENGINE OFF                                          poly-V-belt.
                                                                     If it is broken:
                                                                         Do not continue to drive. Otherwise the
                                                                         engine will overheat due to an inoperative
                                                                         water pump which may result in damage
                                                                         to the engine.
                                                                         Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
                                                                         ter.
                                                                     If it is intact:
                                                                         Restart the engine only after the message
                                                                         disappears from the multifunction dis-
                                                                         play. Doing so could result in serious en-
                                                                         gine damage that is not covered by the
                                                                         Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
                                                                         Observe the coolant temperature gauge
                                                                         ( page 135).
                                                                         Drive immediately to the nearest autho-
                                                                         rized Mercedes-Benz Center. Adjust driv-
                                                                         ing to be consistent with reduced braking
                                                                         responsiveness.


346
                                                                                                   Practical hints
                                                                                                   What to do if …?


Display                       Possible cause                                Possible solution
Ï         COOLANT             The cooling fan for the coolant is malfunc-      Observe the coolant temperature display.
          VISIT WORKSHOP      tioning.
                                                                               Have the fan replaced as soon as possi-
                                                                               ble.
Î         CRUISE CONTROL      Cruise control or Distronic* is malfunc-         Have cruise control or Distronic*
          DRIVE TO WORKSHOP   tioning.                                         checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
                                                                               Center.
G         DISPLAY DEFECTIVE   The instrument cluster display is malfunc-       Continue driving with added caution.
          VISIT WORKSHOP      tioning.
                                                                               Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
                                                                               ter as soon as possible.
±         DISPLAY DEFECTIVE   Certain electronic systems are unable to         Have the electronic systems checked by
          VISIT WORKSHOP      relay information to the control system.         an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
                              The following systems may have failed:
                                 Coolant temperature display
                                 Tachometer
                                 Cruise control display
J         DOOR OPEN           You are attempting to drive with one or          Close the doors.
                              more doors open.




                                                                                                                  347
Practical hints
What to do if …?


Display                             Possible cause                              Possible solution
:              USA only:            The engine oil level is too low.               Add engine oil ( page 278) and check
               ADD 1.0 QT. OIL                                                     the engine oil level ( page 275).
               AT FILLING STATION
               Canada only:
               ADD 1.0 LITER OIL
               AT FILLING STATION
               ENGINE OIL LEVEL     There is no oil in the engine.              There is a danger of engine damage.
               STOP, ENGINE OFF
                                                                                   Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt as
                                                                                   soon as possible.
                                                                                   Turn off the engine.
                                                                                   Add engine oil ( page 278) and check
                                                                                   the engine oil level ( page 275).
               ENGINE OIL LEVEL     You have added too much engine oil.            Have excess oil siphoned or drained off.
               REDUCE OIL LEVEL     There is a risk of damaging the engine or      Observe all legal requirements with re-
                                    the catalytic converter.                       spect to its disposal.




348
                                                                                                                        Practical hints
                                                                                                                        What to do if …?


Display                                       Possible cause                                    Possible solution
:                   ENGINE OIL                It may be that there is water in the engine          Have the engine oil level checked
                    VISIT WORKSHOP            oil.                                                 ( page 275).
                    ENGINE OIL LEVEL          The engine oil has dropped to a critical             Check the engine oil level ( page 275)
                    VISIT WORKSHOP            level.                                               and add engine oil as required
                                                                                                   ( page 278).
                                                                                                   If you must add engine oil frequently,
                                                                                                   have the engine checked for possible
                                                                                                   leaks.
                    OIL SENSOR MALFUNCT. The measuring system is malfunctioning.                   Have the measuring system checked by
                    VISIT WORKSHOP                                                                 an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

When the message ADD 1.0 QT. OIL AT           When this occurs, the warning will first                !
FILLING STATION (Canada: 1 Liter) ap-         come on intermittently and then stay on if              The engine oil level warnings should
pears while the engine is running and at      the oil level drops further.                            not be ignored. Extended driving with
operating temperature, the engine oil level                                                           the symbol displayed could result in
                                              Visually check for oil leaks. If no obvious oil
has dropped to approximately the mini-                                                                serious engine damage that is not
                                              leaks are noted, drive to the nearest ser-
mum level.                                                                                            covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
                                              vice station where the engine oil should be
                                              topped to the required level with an ap-                Warranty.
                                              proved oil specified in the Factory Ap-
                                              proved Service Products pamphlet.




                                                                                                                                        349
Practical hints
What to do if …?


Display                             Possible cause                               Possible solution
_              ENTRY POSITION       Seat, exterior mirrors and steering wheel       Wait until the seat, exterior mirrors and
               DO NOT DRIVE         have not yet moved to their preset driving      steering wheel have moved to their driv-
                                    positions.                                      ing positions.
                                                                                    The message will disappear.
Y              HOOD OPEN            You are driving with the hood open.             Close the hood ( page 274).
I              REMOVE KEY           You have forgotten to remove the                Remove the SmartKey from the ignition.
                                    SmartKey.
               REPLACE KEY          The SmartKey is malfunctioning.                 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
               DRIVE TO WORKSHOP                                                    ter as soon as possible.
               AUTOMATIC LIGHT ON   SmartKey in starter switch position 1           Remove the SmartKey from the starter
               REMOVE KEY           or 2.                                           switch.
               KEY                  The battery in the SmartKey with KEY-           Replace the battery ( page 371).
               CHECK BATTERY        LESS-GO* is discharged.
               KEY                  SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is not rec-           Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
               NOT RECOGNIZED       ognized while the engine is running be-         so.
                                    cause
                                                                                    Search for the SmartKey.
                                       the SmartKey is not in the vehicle     Otherwise the vehicle cannot be centrally
                                       there is strong radio-frequency inter- locked nor can the engine be started again
                                       ference                                after it has been stopped.




350
                                                                                                    Practical hints
                                                                                                    What to do if …?


Display                          Possible cause                             Possible solution
F         KEY                    The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is mo-          Change the position of the SmartKey with
          NOT RECOGNIZED         mentarily not recognized.                     KEYLESS-GO* in the vehicle.
                                                                               Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in
                                                                               the starter switch if necessary.
          KEY                    A SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* left in the       Take the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
          STILL IN VEHICLE       vehicle was recognized while locking the      out of the vehicle.
                                 vehicle from the outside.
          KEYLESS-GO             The KEYLESS-GO* system is malfunction-        Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
          DRIVE TO WORKSHOP      ing.                                          ter as soon as possible.
          SEAT BACKREST, LEFT    The passenger seat backrest is not en-        Fold back and push the seat backrest un-
          LOCK!                  gaged.                                        til the seat cushion and seat backrest au-
                                                                               dibly engage into the driving position.
          SEAT BACKREST, RIGHT The driver seat backrest is not engaged.        Fold back and push the seat backrest un-
          LOCK!                                                                til the seat cushion and seat backrest au-
                                                                               dibly engage into the driving position.
.         3RD BRAKE LIGHT        The high mounted brake lamp is malfunc-       Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
          CHECK LIGHT            tioning.                                      ter as soon as possible.
          STOP LAMP              Brake lamp illumination is delayed or         Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
          VISIT WORKSHOP         lamp is permanently on.                       ter as soon as possible.




                                                                                                                    351
Practical hints
What to do if …?


Display                                Possible cause                                Possible solution
.              BRAKE LIGHT LEFT        The left brake lamp is malfunctioning. A         Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
               SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON!     substitute bulb is being used.                   ter as soon as possible.
               BRAKE LIGHT RIGHT       The right brake lamp is malfunctioning. A        Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
               SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON!     substitute bulb is being used.                   ter as soon as possible.
               DISPLAY DEFECTIVE       The display for the lamps or the system is       Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
               VISIT WORKSHOP          malfunctioning.                                  ter as soon as possible.
               FRONT FOGLAMP, LEFT     The left front fog lamp is malfunctioning.       Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
               CHECK LIGHT                                                              ter as soon as possible.
               FRONT FOGLAMP, RIGHT The right front fog lamp is malfunctioning.         Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
               CHECK LIGHT                                                              ter as soon as possible.
               HIGH BEAM, LEFT         The left high beam lamp is malfunction-          Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
               CHECK LIGHT             ing.
               HIGH BEAM, RIGHT        The right high beam lamp is malfunction-         Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
               CHECK LIGHT             ing.
               LICENSE PLATE L, L      The left license plate lamp is malfunction-      Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
               CHECK LIGHT             ing.
               LICENSE PLATE L, R      The right license plate lamp is malfunc-         Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
               CHECK LIGHT             tioning.




352
                                                                                                 Practical hints
                                                                                                 What to do if …?


Display                       Possible cause                             Possible solution
.         LIGHT SENSOR        The lamp sensor is malfunctioning. The        In the control system, set lamp operation
          DRIVE TO WORKSHOP   headlamps switch on automatically.            to manual ( page 157).
                                                                            Switch on headlamps using the exterior
                                                                            lamp switch.
                                                                            Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
                                                                            Center as soon as possible.
          LOW BEAM, LEFT      The left low beam lamp is malfunctioning. Halogen headlamp:
          CHECK LIGHT
                                                                            Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
                                                                         Bi-Xenon* headlamp:
                                                                            Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
                                                                            Center as soon as possible.
          LOW BEAM, RIGHT     The right low beam lamp is malfunction- Halogen headlamp:
          CHECK LIGHT         ing.
                                                                         Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
                                                                         Bi-Xenon* headlamp:
                                                                            Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
                                                                            Center as soon as possible.
          MARKER LIGHT, FL    The front left side marker lamp is mal-       Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
          CHECK LIGHT         functioning.
          MARKER LIGHT, FR    The front right side marker lamp is mal-      Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
          CHECK LIGHT         functioning.

                                                                                                                353
Practical hints
What to do if …?


Display                               Possible cause                                 Possible solution
.              REAR FOGLIGHT          The rear fog lamp is malfunctioning.              Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
               CHECK LIGHT
               REVERSE LIGHT, LEFT    The left reverse lamp is malfunctioning.          Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
               CHECK LIGHT
               REVERSE LIGHT, RIGHT The right reverse lamp is malfunctioning.           Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
               CHECK LIGHT
               STANDING LIGHT, L      The left front parking lamp is malfunction-       Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
               CHECK LIGHT            ing.
               STANDING LIGHT, R      The right front parking signal lamp is mal-       Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
               CHECK LIGHT            functioning.
               STANDING LIGHT, L      The left rear parking signal lamp is mal-         Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
               SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON!    functioning. A substitute bulb is being
                                      used.
               STANDING LIGHT, R      The right rear parking signal lamp is mal-        Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
               SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON!    functioning. A substitute bulb is being
                                      used.
               TAIL LIGHT, LEFT       The left tail lamp is malfunctioning. A sub-      Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
               SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON!    stitute bulb is being used.
               TAIL LIGHT, RIGHT      The right tail lamp is malfunctioning. A          Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
               SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON!    substitute bulb is being used.



354
                                                                                                       Practical hints
                                                                                                       What to do if …?


Display                           Possible cause                                Possible solution
.         TURN OFF LIGHTS         Lamps have been turned on although the           Turn the exterior lamp switch to M
                                  SmartKey in the ignition is in position 0.       ( page 52).
          FRONT TURN SIGNAL, L The left front turn signal lamp is malfunc-         Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
          CHECK LIGHT          tioning.
          FRONT TURN SIGNAL, R The right front turn signal lamp is malfunc-        Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
          CHECK LIGHT          tioning.
          REAR TURN SIGNAL, L     The left rear turn signal lamp is malfunc-       Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
          SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON!     tioning. A substitute bulb is being used.
          REAR TURN SIGNAL, R     The right rear turn signal lamp is malfunc-      Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
          SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON!     tioning. A substitute bulb is being used.
          MIRROR TURN SIG., L     The left turn signal in the side mirror is       Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
          CHECK LIGHT             malfunctioning. This message will only ap-       ter as soon as possible.
                                  pear if all light emitting diodes have
                                  stopped working.
          MIRROR TURN SIG., R     The right turn signal in the side mirror is      Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
          CHECK LIGHT             malfunctioning. This message will only ap-       ter as soon as possible.
                                  pear if all light emitting diodes have
                                  stopped working.




                                                                                                                      355
Practical hints
What to do if …?


Display                            Possible cause                               Possible solution
<              SEAT BELT SYSTEM    The seat belt system is malfunctioning.         Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
               DRIVE TO WORKSHOP                                                   Center as soon as possible.
K              CLOSE               You have opened the driver’s door with          Close the tilt/sliding sunroof
               SUNROOF             the SmartKey removed from the starter           ( page 203).
                                   switch and the tilt/sliding sunroof open.
J              CLOSE               You have opened the driver’s door with          Close the tilt/sliding sunroof
               SUNROOF             the SmartKey removed from the starter           ( page 203).
                                   switch and the tilt/sliding sunroof open.
L              TELE AID            One or more main functions of the Tele          Have the Tele Aid system checked by an
               DRIVE TO WORKSHOP   Aid system are malfunctioning.                  authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
               TELE AID BATTERY    The emergency power battery for the Tele        Have the Tele Aid system checked by an
               DRIVE TO WORKSHOP   Aid system is malfunctioning. If the vehi-      authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
                                   cle battery is also discharged, Tele Aid
                                   will not be operational.
t              FUNCTION            This display appears if button t or
               UNAVAILABLE         s on the multifunction steering wheel
                                   is pressed and the vehicle is not equipped
                                   with a telephone.




356
                                                                                                     Practical hints
                                                                                                     What to do if …?


Display                       Possible cause                             Possible solution
A         TANK OPEN!          A loss of pressure has been detected in        Check the fuel cap ( page 270).
          CHECK FILLER CAP!   the fuel system. The fuel cap may not be
                                                                        If it is not closed properly:
                              closed properly or the fuel system may be
                              leaky.                                         Close the fuel cap.
                                                                         If it is closed properly:
                                                                            Have the fuel system checked by an au-
                                                                            thorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Ê         TRUNK OPEN          This message will appear whenever the         Close the trunk lid.
                              trunk lid is open.
W         WASHER FLUID        The fluid level has dropped to about 1/3      Add washer fluid ( page 282).
          CHECK LEVEL!        of total reservoir capacity.




                                                                                                                357
Practical hints
What to do if …?


Tire inflation pressure monitor
messages

Display                                               Possible cause                                    Possible solution
H                        TIRE PRES.                   One or more tires are deflating.                     Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoid-
                         CAUTION, TIRE PRES.                                                               ing abrupt steering and braking maneu-
                         TIRE PRES.                   The pressure has fallen significantly in             vers. Observe the traffic situation around
                         CHECK TIRES!                 one or more tires.                                   you
                                                                                                           Change the damaged wheel
                                                                                                           ( page 381).
                                                                                                           Have the damaged wheel repaired or re-
                                                                                                           placed at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
                                                                                                           Center.
                         TIRE PRESSURE                The pressure is too low in one or more               Check and correct tire inflation pressure
                         PLEASE CORRECT               tires.                                               as required ( page 294).


 Warning!                                    G         You may lose control of the vehicle. Contin-
                                                       ued driving with a flat tire will cause exces-
 Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects    sive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
 the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.




358
                                                                                                                                Practical hints
                                                                                                                                What to do if …?


Display                                              Possible cause                                    Possible solution
H                       TIRE PRES., LF               The left front tire is deflating.                    Bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
                        CAUTION, TIRE PRES.                                                               abrupt braking maneuvers. Observe the
                                                                                                          traffic situation around you.
                                                                                                          Change the wheel ( page 381).
                                                                                                          Have the damaged wheel repaired or re-
                                                                                                          placed at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
                                                                                                          Center.
                        TIRE PRES., LF               The left front tire inflation pressure is low.       Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt.
                        CHECK TIRES!
                                                                                                          Check and correct the tire inflation pres-
                                                                                                          sure ( page 294).
                                                                                                          If necessary, change the wheel
                                                                                                          ( page 381).
                                                                                                          Have the damaged wheel repaired or re-
                                                                                                          placed at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
                                                                                                          Center.


Warning!                                    G         You may lose control of the vehicle. Contin-
                                                      ued driving with a flat tire will cause exces-
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects    sive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.



                                                                                                                                                   359
Practical hints
What to do if …?


Display                                               Possible cause                                    Possible solution
H                        TIRE PRES., RF               The right front tire is deflating.                   Bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
                         CAUTION, TIRE PRES.                                                               abrupt braking maneuvers. Observe the
                                                                                                           traffic situation around you.
                                                                                                           Change the wheel ( page 381).
                                                                                                           Have the damaged wheel repaired or re-
                                                                                                           placed at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
                                                                                                           Center.
                         TIRE PRES., RF               The right front tire inflation pressure is           Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt.
                         CHECK TIRES!                 low.                                                 Check and correct the tire inflation pres-
                                                                                                           sure ( page 294).
                                                                                                           If necessary, change the wheel
                                                                                                           ( page 381).
                                                                                                           Have the damaged wheel repaired or re-
                                                                                                           placed at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
                                                                                                           Center.


 Warning!                                    G         You may lose control of the vehicle. Contin-
                                                       ued driving with a flat tire will cause exces-
 Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects    sive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
 the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.



360
                                                                                                                                Practical hints
                                                                                                                                What to do if …?


Display                                              Possible cause                                    Possible solution
H                       TIRE PRES., LR               The left rear tire is deflating.                     Bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
                        CAUTION, TIRE PRES.                                                               abrupt braking maneuvers. Observe the
                                                                                                          traffic situation around you.
                                                                                                          Change the wheel ( page 381).
                                                                                                          Have the damaged wheel repaired or re-
                                                                                                          placed at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
                                                                                                          Center.
                        TIRE PRES., LR               The left rear tire inflation pressure is low.        Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt.
                        CHECK TIRES!
                                                                                                          Check and correct the tire inflation pres-
                                                                                                          sure ( page 294).
                                                                                                          If necessary, change the wheel
                                                                                                          ( page 381).
                                                                                                          Have the damaged wheel repaired or re-
                                                                                                          placed at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
                                                                                                          Center.


Warning!                                    G         You may lose control of the vehicle. Contin-
                                                      ued driving with a flat tire will cause exces-
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects    sive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.



                                                                                                                                                   361
Practical hints
What to do if …?


Display                                               Possible cause                                    Possible solution
H                        TIRE PRES., RR               The right rear tire is deflating.                    Bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
                         CAUTION, TIRE PRES.                                                               abrupt braking maneuvers. Observe the
                                                                                                           traffic situation around you.
                                                                                                           Change the wheel ( page 381).
                                                                                                           Have the damaged wheel repaired or re-
                                                                                                           placed at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
                                                                                                           Center.
                         TIRE PRES., RR               The right rear tire inflation pressure is            Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt.
                         CHECK TIRES!                 low.                                                 Check and correct the tire inflation pres-
                                                                                                           sure ( page 294).
                                                                                                           If necessary, change the wheel
                                                                                                           ( page 381).
                                                                                                           Have the damaged wheel repaired or re-
                                                                                                           placed at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
                                                                                                           Center.


 Warning!                                    G         You may lose control of the vehicle. Contin-
                                                       ued driving with a flat tire will cause exces-
 Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects    sive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
 the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.



362
                                                                                                                                   Practical hints
                                                                                                                                   What to do if …?


Display                                         Possible cause                                    Possible solution
TIRE PRES. MONITOR                              There was a tire inflation pressure warning             Activate the tire inflation pressure monitor
REACTIVE AFTER                                  message.                                                after correcting the tire inflation pressure val-
CORRECTING PRESSURE                                                                                     ues ( page 294).
                                                The yellow warning lamp for the tire infla-
                                                tion pressure monitor comes on and you
                                                have not reactivated the system since the
                                                last tire inflation pressure check.
TIRE PRES. MONITOR                              The tire inflation pressure monitor is using
REACTIVATED                                     the current pressure values as the basis for
                                                monitoring.


Warning!                                    G          You may lose control of the vehicle. Contin-
                                                       ued driving with a flat tire will cause exces-
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects     sive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.




                                                                                                                                                   363
Practical hints
What to do if …?


Display                                          Possible cause                                     Possible solution
TIRE PRES. MONITOR                               The tire inflation pressure monitor* is un-              Remove any extra wheel sensors from the ve-
CURRENTLY                                        able to monitor the tire inflation pressure              hicle
UNAVAILABLE                                      due to:
                                                                                              As soon as the causes of the malfunction have
                                                      the presence of several when sensors in been removed, the tire inflation pressure moni-
                                                      the vehicle                             tor automatically becomes active again.
                                                      excessive wheel sensor temperatures
                                                      a nearby radio interference source
                                                      unrecognized wheel sensors installed
TIRE PRES. MONITOR                The tire inflation pressure monitor or a                                Have the tire inflation pressure monitor
NOT OPERATIONAL DRIVE TO WORKSHOP wheel sensor is malfunctioning.                                         checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
                                                                                                          Center.
                                                 A wheel without proper sensor was in-                    Have the wheels checked.
                                                 stalled.


 Warning!                                    G           You may lose control of the vehicle. Contin-
                                                         ued driving with a flat tire will cause exces-
 Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects      sive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
 the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.




364
                                                                                                                     Practical hints
                                                                                                               Where will I find...?
   Where will I find...?
First aid kit                                       i                                           Lift up trunk floor cover and engage
                                                    Check expiration dates and contents         trunk floor handle in upper edge of
The first aid kit is stored in the rear center                                                  trunk.
                                                    for completeness at least once a year
armrest.                                                                                        You can now remove the tools and ac-
                                                    and replace missing/expired items.
                                                                                                cessories.
                                                 Vehicle jack, vehicle tool kit, luggage        !
                                                 bowl, spare wheel                              To prevent damage, always disengage
                                                                                                trunk floor handle from trunk edge and
                                                 The spare wheel, the vehicle tool kit and
                                                                                                lower trunk floor before closing the
                                                 the luggage bowl are stored in the com-
                                                                                                trunk lid.
                                                 partment underneath the trunk floor.
                                                                                             The vehicle tool kit includes:
                                                                                                One interchangeable slot/Phillips
1 Arm rest
                                                                                                screwdriver
2 Lid
                                                                                                One towing eye bolt
   Fold rear arm rest down 1.
                                                                                                One wheel bolt wrench with socket
   Press handle upwards.
                                                                                                wrench
   Fold lid 2 up.
                                                                                                One alignment bolt
   Remove first aid kit.
                                                 1 Vehicle jack                                 One pair of gloves
                                                 2 Vehicle tool kit                             One fuse extractor
                                                 3 Luggage bowl
                                                                                                One fuse chart for the main fuse box
                                                 4 Spare wheel
                                                                                                Spare fuses

                                                                                                                                 365
Practical hints
Where will I find...?


Vehicle jack                                    Turn the crank handle counterclock-              Spare wheel
                                                wise to the end of the stop (storage po-
To prepare the vehicle jack for use             sition).                                         Removing the spare wheel
   Remove the vehicle jack from the spare                                                           Take out vehicle tool kit tray 2.
   wheel well under the trunk floor.          Warning!                                  G           Turn the luggage bowl 3 counter-
   Push the crank handle up.                                                                        clockwise.
                                              The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
   Turn the crank handle clockwise until it   up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets           Remove the spare wheel 4.
   engages (operational position).            built into both sides of the vehicle. To help
                                              avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift   Storing the spare wheel
                                              the vehicle during a wheel change. Never              Place spare wheel 4 in wheel well and
                                              get beneath the vehicle while it is supported         secure it with luggage bowl 3.
                                              by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from
                                              the area under the lifted vehicle. Always             Turn the luggage bowl 3 clockwise to
                                              firmly set parking brake and block wheels             its stop.
                                              before raising vehicle with jack.                     Place vehicle tool kit tray 2 in luggage
                                              Do not disengage parking brake while the              bowl 3.
                                              vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is
                                              always vertical (plumb line) when in use, es-
Storing the vehicle jack in the trunk         pecially on hills. Always try to use the jack
                                              on level surface. Make sure the jack arm is
   Retract the vehicle jack arm to the        fully seated in the jack take-up bracket. Al-
   base of the vehicle jack.                  ways lower the vehicle onto sufficient ca-
   Push the crank handle up.                  pacity jackstands before working under the
                                              vehicle.


366
                                                                                                                Practical hints
                                                                                       Unlocking/locking in an emergency
   Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Unlocking the vehicle                          Removing the mechanical key                 Unlocking the driver’s door

If you are unable to unlock the vehicle with
the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*, open the
driver’s door and the trunk using the me-
chanical key.

   i
   Unlocking the driver’s door and/or the
   trunk with the mechanical key will trig-
   ger the anti-theft alarm system.
   To cancel the alarm, insert the             1 Mechanical key locking tab                1 Unlocking
   SmartKey or SmartKey with                   2 Mechanical key
                                                                                              Insert the mechanical key into the driv-
   KEYLESS-GO* in the starter switch.             Move locking tab 1 in direction of ar-      er’s door lock until it stops.
                                                  row.                                        Turn the mechanical key counterclock-
                                                  Slide the mechanical key 2 out of the       wise to position 1.
                                                  housing.
                                                                                              The driver’s door is unlocked.




                                                                                                                                367
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency


Unlocking the trunk                              Turn the mechanical key counterclock-
                                                 wise to position 1.
A minimum height clearance of 6.3 ft
(1.90 m) is required to open the trunk lid.      The trunk unlocks and opens.
The trunk lid lock is located next to the        !
handle above the rear license plate recess.
                                                 The trunk lid swings open upwards au-
                                                 tomatically. Always make sure that
                                                 there is sufficient overhead clearance.

                                              Locking the vehicle
                                                                                             1 Unlocking
                                              If you are unable to lock the vehicle with       Remove the mechanical key out of the
                                              the SmartKey or the SmartKey with                SmartKey ( page 367).
                                              KEYLESS-GO*, do the following:
                                                                                               Insert the mechanical key into the driv-
                                                 Close the passenger doors and the             er’s door lock until it stops.
1 Unlocking and opening                          trunk lid.
                                                                                               Turn the mechanical key clockwise to
2 Trunk lid lock                                 Press the central locking switch in the       position 1.
   Insert the mechanical key into the            center console ( page 111).
                                                                                               The driver’s door is locked.
   trunk lid lock until it stops.                Check to see whether the locking
                                                 knobs on the passenger doors have
                                                 moved down.
                                                 If necessary push them down manually.
                                                 Except for the driver's door, the vehicle
                                                 should now be locked.

368
                                                                   Practical hints
                                                 Unlocking/locking in an emergency


Fuel filler flap

In case the central locking system does
not release the fuel filler flap, you can open
it manually.




1 Release knob
   Open the trunk.
   Remove the battery cover and the trim
   inside the trunk on the right-hand side.
   Pull release knob 1 in the direction of
   arrow.
   The fuel filler flap can be opened.




                                                                              369
Practical hints
Opening/closing in an emergency


Tilt/sliding sunroof                              Pry off lens 1 using a flat blade srew-   Insert crank 2 through hole.
                                                  driver ( page 365).
                                                                                            Turn crank 2 clockwise to:
You can open or close the tilt/sliding sun-
                                                  Switch on ignition ( page 34).
roof manually should an electrical malfunc-                                                     slide sunroof closed
tion occur.                                       Take crank the crank from the opera-          raise roof at the rear
                                                  tor’s manual pouch.
The tilt/sliding sunroof drive is located be-                                               Turn crank 2 counterclockwise to:
hind the lens of the interior overhead light.
                                                                                                slide sunroof open
                                                                                                lower roof at the rear

                                                                                            i
                                                                                            Turn crank 2 slowly and smoothly.
                                                                                            The tilt/sliding sunroof must be syn-
                                                                                            chronized after being operated manual-
                                                                                            ly ( page 205).
                                                2 Crank
1 Lens




370
                                                                                                                    Practical hints
                                                                                                  Replacing SmartKey batteries
  Replacing SmartKey batteries
If the batteries in the SmartKey or the         Batteries contain materials that can harm
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* are dis-              the environment if disposed of improperly.
charged, the vehicle can no longer be           Recycling of batteries is the preferred
locked or unlocked. It is recommended to        method of disposal. Many states require
have the batteries replaced at an autho-        sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
rized Mercedes-Benz Center.                     for recycling.

 Warning!                              G        SmartKey

 Batteries contain poisonous and corrosive         i
 substances. Therefore keep the batteries          When inserting the batteries, make          1 Mechanical key
 out of reach of children.                         sure they are clean and free of lint.       2 Battery compartment
 If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help                                                  Replacement batteries: Lithium, type
 immediately.                                      i                                           CR 2025 or equivalent.
                                                   When changing batteries, always re-            Insert the mechanical key 1 in side
                                                   place both batteries.                          opening and push gray slide.
                                                   The required replacement batteries are         The battery compartment 2 is un-
                                                   available at any authorized                    latched.
                                                   Mercedes-Benz Center.
                                                                                                  Pull battery compartment 2 out of the
                                                                                                  housing in direction of arrow.
                                                   Remove mechanical key out of the
                                                   SmartKey ( page 367).                          Remove the batteries.




                                                                                                                                  371
Practical hints
Replacing SmartKey batteries


                                            SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*                     Remove mechanical key out of the
                                                                                          SmartKey ( page 367).
                                                                                       Replacement battery: Lithium, type
                                                                                       CR 2025 or equivalent.
                                                                                          Insert the mechanical key 3 in side
                                                                                          opening and push gray slide.
                                                                                          The battery compartment is unlatched.
                                                                                          Pull the battery compartment out of the
3 Battery                                                                                 SmartKey housing.
4 Contact spring                                                                          Using mechanical key 3, apply pres-
                                            1 Battery
   Using a lint-free cloth, insert new                                                    sure to position 2.
                                            2 Tilt battery up
   batteries 3 under the contact            3 Mechanical key                              Battery 1 tilts up slightly.
   spring 4 with the plus (+) side facing
                                                                                          Pull out battery 1 in direction of ar-
   up.                                         i
                                                                                          row.
   Return battery compartment 2 into           When inserting the battery, make sure
                                               they are clean and free of lint.           Using a lint-free cloth, insert the new
   housing until it locks into place.
                                                                                          battery with the plus (+) side facing up.
   Slide mechanical key 1 back into the
   SmartKey.                                   i                                          Return battery compartment into hous-
                                               The required replacement battery is        ing until it locks into place.
   Check the operation of the SmartKey.        available at any authorized                Slide mechanical key 1 back into the
                                               Mercedes-Benz Center.                      SmartKey.
                                                                                          Check the operation of KEYLESS-GO*.


372
                                                                                                              Practical hints
                                                                                                              Replacing bulbs
   Replacing bulbs
Safe vehicle operation depends on proper        i                                           i
exterior lighting and signaling. It is there-   If the headlamps or front fog lamps are     Substitute bulbs will be brought into
fore essential that all bulbs and lamp as-      fogged up on the inside as a result of      use when the following lamps malfunc-
semblies are in good working order at all       high humidity, driving the vehicle a dis-   tion:
times.                                          tance with the lights on should clear up        Brake lamps
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely        the fogging.
important. Have headlamps checked and                                                           Rear parking lamps
readjusted at regular intervals and when a                                                      Rear turn signal lamps
bulb has been replaced. See your autho-
                                                                                                Tail lamps
rized Mercedes-Benz Center for headlamp
adjustment.                                                                                 Observe the messages in the multi-
                                                                                            function display ( page 351).




                                                                                                                            373
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs


Bulbs             Front lamps                                              Rear lamps

                          Lamp                       Type                      Lamp                Type
                      1 Additional turn sig-         LED                    8 High mounted brake LED
                        nal lamp                                              lamp
                      2 Turn signal lamp             1156 NA                9 Brake lamp           LED
                      3 High beam flasher            H7-55 W                a Tail, parking and    P 21/4 W
                      4 Side marker lamp             W5W                      standing lamp

                      5 Fog lamp                     HB4-55 W                  Side marker lamp    LED

                      6 Parking and stand-           W5W                    b Backup lamp          P 21 W
                        ing lamp                                            c License plate lamp   C5W
                                                             1
                      7 Low beam and high Xenon                             d Rear fog lamp,       P 21/4 W
                        beam lamp         D2S-35 W                            driver’s side
                  1                                                         e Turn signal lamp     PY 21 W
                      Bi-Xenon headlamps: For safety reasons (high volt-
                      age), do not replace the Xenon bulb yourself. See
                      your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.




374
                                                                                                                  Practical hints
                                                                                                                  Replacing bulbs


Notes on bulb replacement                        Only use 12 volt bulbs of the same type    Have the LEDs and bulbs for the following
                                                 and with the specified watt rating.        lamps replaced by an authorized
 Warning!                               G        Switch lights off before changing a bulb
                                                                                            Mercedes-Benz Center.
                                                 to prevent short circuits.                    Additional turn signal lamps in the exte-
 Keep bulbs out of reach of children.                                                          rior rear view mirrors
                                                 Always use a clean lint-free cloth when
 Bulbs and bulb sockets can get very hot. Al-    handling bulbs.                               Bi-Xenon lamps
 low the lamp to cool down before changing
                                                 Your hands should be dry and free of oil      High mounted brake lamp
 a bulb.
                                                 and grease.
 Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. A                                                      Brake lamps
 bulb can explode if you                         If the newly installed bulb does not
                                                                                               Rear side marker lamps
                                                 come on, visit an authorized
     touch or move it when hot                   Mercedes-Benz Center.                         Rear parking lamps
     drop the bulb
                                                                                               i
     scratch the bulb
                                                                                               Have the headlamp adjustment
 Wear eye and hand protection.                                                                 checked regularly.
 Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is
 dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the
 lamp and its components. We recommend
 that you have such work done by a qualified
 technician.




                                                                                                                                  375
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs


Replacing bulbs for front lamps                                                     Bi-Xenon headlamp

Before you start to replace a bulb for a
front lamp, do the following first:                                                  Warning!                               G
   Turn the exterior lamp switch to M                                                Do not remove the cover for the Bi-Xenon
   ( page 52).                                                                       headlamp. Because of high voltage in Xenon
   Open the hood ( page 273) (except                                                 lamps, it is dangerous to replace the bulb or
   for side marker lamps).                                                           repair the lamp and its components. We rec-
                                                                                     ommend that you have such work done by a
                                                                                     qualified technician.
                                           2 Electrical connector for high beam
                                             flasher housing bulb
                                           3 Bulb socket for parking and standing
                                             lamp
                                           4 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp
                                           5 Housing cover for Bi-Xenon headlamp



1 Housing cover for high beam flasher
  bulb, parking and standing lamp




376
                                                                                                                 Practical hints
                                                                                                                 Replacing bulbs


High beam flasher bulb                        Parking and standing lamp bulb                  Remove front end first.
   Press ends of housing cover 1 tab to-         Press ends of housing cover 1 tab to-        Twist bulb socket counterclockwise
   gether and remove cover.                      gether and remove cover.                     and pull out.
   Press connector 2 downward.                   Pull out the bulb socket 3 with the          Pull bulb out of the bulb socket.
   Remove connector 2 with the bulb.             bulb.                                        Insert new bulb in socket.
                                                 Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket 3.
   Insert the new bulb so that the base lo-                                                   Reinstall bulb socket, push in and twist
   cates in the recess on the holder.            Insert a new bulb in the socket 3.           clockwise.
   From below, press connector 2 with            Reinstall the bulb socket 3.                 To reinstall lamp, set rear end in
   bulb upward onto the reflector.               Align housing cover 1 and click into         bumper and let front end snap into
   Align housing cover 1 and click into          place.                                       place.
   place.
                                              Side marker lamp bulb                        Replacing bulbs for rear lamps
Front turn signal bulb
                                                                                           Before you start to replace a bulb for a
   Turn bulb socket 4 counterclockwise                                                     front lamp, do the following first:
   and pull out.
                                                                                              Turn the exterior lamp switch to M
   Gently push bulb into bulb socket 4,                                                       ( page 52).
   turn counterclockwise and remove.
                                                                                              Open the trunk ( page 101).
   Insert new bulb in bulb socket 4, push
   in and twist clockwise.
   Reinsert bulb socket 4 in lamp and
   twist clockwise.                              Carefully slide lamp towards rear.


                                                                                                                                  377
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs


Tail lamp assemblies                          Turn lock counterclockwise and move        License plate lamp
                                              the trim to the side.
                                              Turn bulb socket counterclockwise and
                                              pull out.
                                              Gently twist bulb counterclockwise and
                                              pull out of bulb holder.
                                              Insert new bulb into the holder and turn
                                              it clockwise.
                                              Reinstall bulb socket.
1 Black socket:                               The bulb socket should audibly click.      1 Screws
  Backup lamp                                 Replace trim and secure with lock.            Loosen both screws 1.
2 White socket:
  Turn signal lamp                                                                          Remove the license plate lamp.
3 Red socket:                                                                               Replace the bulb.
  Tail, standing and parking lamp
4 Red socket:                                                                               Reinstall the license plate lamp.
  Driver’s side: tail, parking and rear fog                                                 Retighten screws 1.
  lamp
  Passenger’s side: tail and parking lamp




378
                                                                                                                Practical hints
                                                                                                      Replacing wiper blades
   Replacing wiper blades
   !                                        Removing wiper blades
   To avoid damage to the hood, the wiper
   arms should only be folded forward          Turn SmartKey in starter switch to
   when in the vertical position.              position 1.
                                               Turn combination switch to wiper
                                               setting II ( page 54).
                                               With wiper arm in vertical position, turn
                                               SmartKey in starter switch to
                                               position 0.
                                                                                             Turn the wiper blade at a right angle to
                                             Warning!                               G        wiper arm (arrow 1).
                                                                                             Slide the wiper blade sideways out of
                                             For safety reasons, switch off wipers and re-   the retainer in the direction of
                                             move SmartKey from starter switch (vehi-        arrow 2.
                                             cles with KEYLESS-GO*: Make sure the
Wiper blades in vertical position
                                             vehicle's on-board electronics have status
                                             0) before replacing a wiper blade. Other-
                                             wise, the wiper motor could suddenly turn
                                             on and cause injury.


                                               Fold the wiper arm forward until it
                                               snaps into place.




                                                                                                                               379
Practical hints
Replacing wiper blades


Installing wiper blades                     !
                                            Never open the hood when the wiper
   Slide the wiper blade onto wiper arm     arm is folded forward.
   until it locks in place.
                                            Hold on to the wiper when folding the
   Rotate the wiper blade into position     wiper arm back. If released, the force
   parallel to wiper arm.                   of the impact from the tensioning
   Fold the wiper arm backward to rest on   spring could crack the windshield.
   the windshield. Make sure you hold       Do not allow the wiper arms to contact
   onto the wiper when folding the wiper    the windshield glass without a wiper
   arm back.                                blade inserted.
                                            Make certain that the wiper blades are
                                            properly installed. Improperly installed
                                            wiper blades may cause windshield
                                            damage.
                                            For your convenience, we recommend
                                            that you have this work carried out by
                                            an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.




380
                                                                                                                   Practical hints
                                                                                                                               Flat tire
  Flat tire
Preparing the vehicle                         Vehicles with SmartKey with                  Mounting the spare wheel
                                              KEYLESS-GO*:
   Park the vehicle as far as possible from
                                                 Turn off the engine by pressing the
   moving traffic on a hard surface.
                                                 KEYLESS-GO* button on the gear se-
                                                                                            Warning!                               G
   Turn on the hazard warning flashers.          lector lever once ( page 59).
                                                                                            Never operate the vehicle with more than
   Turn the steering wheel so that the           Open the driver’s door (this puts the      one spare wheel mounted.
   front wheels are in a straight ahead          starter switch in position 0, same as      The spare wheel rim is for temporary use
   position.                                     with the SmartKey removed from the         only. Use for over a total of 12000 miles
   Set the parking brake.                        starter switch). The driver’s door then    (20000 km) (aggregate of all uses) may
                                                 can be closed again.                       cause wheel rim failure leading to an acci-
   Move the gear selector lever to P.
                                                                                            dent and possible injuries.
Vehicles with SmartKey:                          i
                                                 Open door only when conditions are         The spare wheel should only be used tempo-
   Turn off the engine ( page 59).               safe to do so.                             rarily and replaced with a regular road wheel
   Remove the SmartKey from the starter                                                     as quickly as possible.
   switch.                                       Have any passenger exit the vehicle at     CL 55 AMG, CL 65 AMG and Sport Pack-
                                                 a safe distance from the roadway.          age* only:
                                                                                            The spare wheel is for temporary use only.
                                                                                            When driving with spare wheel mounted, en-
                                                                                            sure proper tire inflation pressure and do
                                                                                            not exceed vehicle speed of 50 mph
                                                                                            (80 km/h).




                                                                                                                                    381
Practical hints
Flat tire


                                                  Place chocks behind the downhill sides
 The dimensions of the spare wheel are dif-
                                                  of both wheels of the axle not being
 ferent from those of the road wheels. As a
                                                  worked on.
 result, the vehicle handling characteristics
 change when driving with a mounted spare
 wheel. Adapt your driving style accordingly.   Warning!                                  G
Preparing the vehicle                           The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
                                                up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets
   Take vehicle tool kit tray and vehicle       built into both sides of the vehicle. To help
   jack out of trunk.                           avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift
   Take the spare wheel out of wheel well       the vehicle during a wheel change. Never              Take the two-piece wheel wrench out
   ( page 366).                                 get beneath the vehicle while it is supported         of the vehicle tool kit tray. Assemble
                                                by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from            wheel wrench.
Lifting the vehicle                             the area under the lifted vehicle. Always             On wheel to be changed, loosen but do
                                                firmly set parking brake and block wheels             not yet remove the wheel bolts (ap-
   Prevent the vehicle from rolling away
                                                before raising vehicle with jack.                     proximately one full turn with wrench).
   by blocking wheels with wheel chocks
   (not included) or other sizable objects.     Do not disengage parking brake while the           The tube openings are located directly be-
                                                vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is     hind the front wheel housings and in front
When changing wheel on a level surface:
                                                always vertical (plumb line) when in use, es-      of the rear wheel housings.
   Place one chock in front of and one be-      pecially on hills. Always try to use the jack
   hind the wheel that is diagonally oppo-      on level surface. Make sure the jack arm is
   site to the wheel being changed.             fully seated in the jack take-up bracket. Al-
                                                ways lower the vehicle onto sufficient ca-
When changing wheel on a hill:
                                                pacity jackstands before working under the
                                                vehicle.


382
                                                                                                                   Practical hints
                                                                                                                               Flat tire


                                                                                             Keeping jack in this position, turn
                                                                                             crank 3 clockwise until the jack base
                                                                                             meets the ground. Make sure the jack
                                                                                             is vertical (plumb line).
                                                                                             Continue to turn the crank until the tire
                                                                                             is a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the
                                                                                             ground.

                                                                                           Warning!                                 G
1 Jack support tube cover                 1 Jack arm
                                          2 Jack support tube hole                         The jack is intended only for lifting the vehi-
   Move cover 1 toward rear by pressing                                                    cle briefly for wheel changes. It is not suited
                                          3 Crank
   at point indicated by arrow.                                                            for performing maintenance work under the
                                             Insert jack arm 1 fully into tube
   Remove cover 1 carefully to avoid                                                       vehicle.
                                             hole 2 up to the stop.
   damage to the locking tabs.                                                                 Never start the engine when the vehicle
                                                                                               is raised.
                                           Warning!                               G            Never lie down under the raised vehicle.
                                           Insert the jack arm fully into the jack sup-
                                           port tube hole up to the stop. Otherwise the
                                           vehicle may fall from the jack and cause per-
                                           sonal injury or damage to the vehicle.




                                                                                                                                     383
Practical hints
Flat tire


Removing the wheel                             Mounting the new wheel                             Guide the spare wheel onto the align-
                                                                                                  ment bolt and push it on.
                                                  Clean contact surfaces of wheel and
                                                  wheel hub.                                      Insert wheel bolts and tighten them
                                                                                                  slightly.
                                                  !
                                                                                                  Unscrew the alignment bolt, install last
                                                  To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat
                                                                                                  wheel bolt and tighten slightly.
                                                  against hub and hold it there while in-
                                                  stalling first wheel bolt.
                                                                                                Warning!                              G
                                                Warning!                               G        Use only genuine equipment
1 Alignment bolt                                                                                Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts. Other wheel
   Unscrew upper-most wheel bolt and re-        Always replace wheel bolts that are dam-        bolts may come loose.
   move.                                        aged or rusted.                                 Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the ve-
                                                Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts.       hicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle could
   Replace this wheel bolt with alignment
                                                                                                tip over.
   bolt 1 supplied in the tool kit.             Damaged wheel hub threads should be re-
                                                paired immediately. Do not continue to drive
   Remove the remaining bolts.
                                                under these circumstances! Contact an au-      Lowering the vehicle
   !                                            thorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call             Lower vehicle by turning crank coun-
   Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt.    Roadside Assistance.                              terclockwise until vehicle is resting ful-
   This could result in damage to the bolt      Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tight-        ly on its own weight.
   and wheel hub threads.                       ened wheel bolts can cause the wheel to
                                                                                                  Remove the jack.
                                                come off. This could cause an accident.
   Remove the wheel.                            Make sure you are using the correct wheel
                                                bolts.

384
                                                                                                  Practical hints
                                                                                                         Flat tire


                                                     Before storing the jack in the trunk, it
                                                     should be fully collapsed, with handle
                                                     folded in.
                                                     Place the wheel bolt wrench, alignment
                                                     bolt and jack back in the vehicle tool kit
                                                     in the trunk and close the covering lid.

                                                  Replacing jack support tube cover
                                                     Slide tongue of cover under the upper
1 - 5 Wheel bolts                                    edge of the tube opening.
   Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly, fol-         Applying even pressure, press cover
   lowing the diagonal sequence illustrat-           until it snaps into place. Be careful not
   ed (1 to 5), until all bolts are tight.           to damage the locking tabs or clamp
   Observe a tightening torque of                    the plastic retaining strap.
   110 lb-ft (150 Nm).
                                                     !
                                                     You can also screw the faulty wheel
 Warning!                                G           down into the spare wheel well in the
                                                     trunk.
 Have the tightening torque checked after
 changing a wheel. The wheels could come             Do not activate the tire inflation pres-
 loose if they are not tightened to a torque of      sure monitor until the depressurized
 110 lb-ft (150 Nm).                                 tire is no longer in the vehicle.




                                                                                                             385
Practical hints
Battery


                                                    !                                           The battery is located in the trunk under
 Warning!                                G          Never loosen or detach battery termi-       the right hand wheel well cover panel.
                                                    nal clamps while the engine is running
 Failure to follow these instructions can re-
                                                    or the SmartKey is in the starter switch.
 sult in severe injury or death.
                                                    Otherwise the alternator and other
 Never lean over batteries while connecting,        electronic components could be se-
 you might get injured.                             verely damaged.
 Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not       Have the battery checked regularly by
 allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,     an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
 skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately     Refer to Maintenance Booklet for main-
 flush affected area with water and seek            tenance intervals or contact your au-
 medical help if necessary.                         thorized Mercedes-Benz Center for           1 Battery cover
 A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,          further information.                        2 Locking knob
 which is flammable and explosive. Keep
 flames or sparks away from battery, avoid                                                         Rotate and loosen locking button 2
 improper connection of jumper cables,            Warning!                                 G       approx. one-half turn.
 smoking, etc.                                                                                     Remove battery cover 1.
                                                  With a disconnected battery
                                                     you will no longer be able to turn the
 Warning!                                G           SmartKey in the starter switch and
                                                     pressing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
 Do not place metal objects on the battery as        button ( page 35) on the gear selector
 this could result in a short circuit.               lever will have no effect

 Use leak-proof battery only to avoid the risk       the gear selector lever will remain
                                                     locked in position P
 of acid burns in the event of an accident.

386
                                                                                                     Practical hints
                                                                                                                  Battery


                                 Disconnecting the battery                  Charging and reinstalling the battery

                                    Turn off all electrical consumers.         Charge battery in accordance with the
                                                                               instructions of the battery charger
                                    Open the trunk ( page 101).
                                                                               manufacturer.
                                    Use a 10 mm open-end wrench to dis-
                                                                               Reinstall the charged battery. Follow
                                    connect the battery negative lead 3.
                                                                               the previously described steps in re-
                                    Remove cover 4 from the positive ter-      verse order.
                                    minal.

3 Negative terminal
                                    Disconnect the battery positive lead.    Warning!                                 G
4 Cover over positive terminal
                                 Removing the battery                        Never charge a battery while still installed in
                                                                             the vehicle. Gases may escape during charg-
                                    Remove the screw securing the bat-       ing and cause explosions that may result in
                                    tery.                                    paint damage, corrosion or personal injury.
                                    Remove the battery support and
                                    bracket.
                                    Take out the battery.




                                                                                                                       387
Practical hints
Battery


Reconnecting the battery                       i                                        Batteries contain materials that can harm
                                               The following procedures must be car-    the environment if disposed of improperly.
   Turn off all electrical consumers.                                                   Large 12-volt storage batteries contain
                                               ried out following any interruption of
   Connect the positive lead and fasten its    battery power (e.g. due to reconnect-    lead. Recycling of batteries is the preferred
   cover 4.                                    ing):                                    method of disposal. Many states require
                                                                                        sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
   Connect negative lead 3.                        Set the clock (see COMAND opera-     for recycling.
                                                   tor’s manual).
   !
                                                   Synchronize the ESP ( page 340).
   Never invert the terminal connections.
                                                   Synchronize side windows
   !                                               ( page 200).
   The battery, its filler caps and the vent       Synchronize tilt/sliding sunroof
   tube must always be secu